Manufacturers' names are abbreviated in "Entrance Door Hardware Sets" Article.
2. References to BHMA Standards: Provide products complying with these standards and requirements for description, quality, and function.
D. Cylinders:
1. As specified in Section 087100 "Door Hardware."
E. Strikes: Provide strike with black-plastic dust box for each latch or lock bolt; fabricated for aluminum framing.
F. Removable Mullions: BHMA A156.3 extruded aluminum.
1. When used with panic exit devices, provide keyed removable mullions listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for panic protection, based on testing in accordance with UL 305. Use only mullions that have been tested with exit devices to be used.
G. Weather Stripping: Manufacturer's standard replaceable components.
1. Compression Type: Made of ASTM D2000 molded neoprene or ASTM D2287 molded PVC.
2. Sliding Type: AAMA 701/702, made of wool, polypropylene, or nylon woven pile with nylon-fabric or aluminum-strip backing.
H. Weather Sweeps: Manufacturer's standard exterior-door bottom sweep with concealed fasteners on mounting strip.
I. Finger Guards: Manufacturer's standard collapsible neoprene or PVC gasket anchored to frame hinge-jamb at center-pivoted doors.
2.5 GLAZING
A. Glazing: Comply with Section 088000 "Glazing."
B. Glazing Gaskets: Comply with Section 088000 "Glazing." C. Glazing Sealants: Comply with Section 088000 "Glazing." D. Structural Glazing Sealants: ASTM C1184 chemically curing silicone formulation that is compatible with system components with which it comes in contact; specifically formulated and tested for use as structural sealant and approved by structural-sealant manufacturer for use in storefront system indicated.
1. Color: Black.
E. Weatherseal Sealants: ASTM C920 for Type S; Grade NS; Class 25; Uses NT, G, A, and O; chemically curing silicone formulation that is compatible with structural sealant and other ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Aluminum-Framed Entrances and Storefronts Renovation & Expansion Final Design 084113 - 9
100% Design Submittal
system components with which it comes in contact; recommended by structural-sealant, weatherseal-sealant, and structural-sealant-glazed storefront manufacturers for this use.
1. Color: Match structural sealant.
2.6 MATERIALS
A. Sheet and Plate: ASTM B209.
B. Extruded Bars, Rods, Profiles, and Tubes: ASTM B221.
C. Structural Profiles: ASTM B308/B308M.
D. Steel Reinforcement:
1. Structural Shapes, Plates, and Bars: ASTM A36/A36M.
2. Cold-Rolled Sheet and Strip: ASTM A1008/A1008M.
3. Hot-Rolled Sheet and Strip: ASTM A1011/A1011M.
2.7 ACCESSORIES
A. Fasteners and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant, nonstaining, nonbleeding fasteners and accessories compatible with adjacent materials.
1. Use self-locking devices where fasteners are subject to loosening or turning out from thermal and structural movements, wind loads, or vibration.
2. Reinforce members as required to receive fastener threads.
3. Use exposed fasteners with countersunk Phillips screw heads, finished to match framing system.
B. Anchors: Three-way adjustable anchors with minimum adjustment of 1 inch that accommodate fabrication and installation tolerances in material and finish compatible with adjoining materials and recommended by manufacturer.
1. Concrete and Masonry Inserts: Hot-dip galvanized cast-iron, malleable-iron, or steel inserts complying with ASTM A123/A123M or ASTM A153/A153M requirements.
C. Concealed Flashing: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant, nonstaining, nonbleeding flashing compatible with adjacent materials.
D. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt-mastic paint containing no asbestos, formulated for 30- mil thickness per coat.
2.8 FABRICATION
A. Form or extrude aluminum shapes before finishing.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Aluminum-Framed Entrances and Storefronts Renovation & Expansion Final Design 084113 - 10
100% Design Submittal
B. Weld in concealed locations to greatest extent possible to minimize distortion or discoloration of finish. Remove weld spatter and welding oxides from exposed surfaces by descaling or grinding.
C. Fabricate components that, when assembled, have the following characteristics:
1. Profiles that are sharp, straight, and free of defects or deformations.
2. Accurately fitted joints with ends coped or mitered.
3. Physical and thermal isolation of glazing from framing members.
4. Accommodations for thermal and mechanical movements of glazing and framing to maintain required glazing edge clearances.
5. Provisions for field replacement of glazing from interior for vision glass and exterior for spandrel glazing or metal panels.
6. Fasteners, anchors, and connection devices that are concealed from view to greatest extent possible.
D. Mechanically Glazed Framing Members: Fabricate for flush glazing without projecting stops.
E. Structural-Sealant-Glazed Framing Members: Include accommodations for using temporary support device to retain glazing in place while structural sealant cures.
F. Storefront Framing: Fabricate components for assembly using screw-spline system.
G. Entrance Door Frames: Reinforce as required to support loads imposed by door operation and for installing entrance door hardware.
1. At interior and exterior doors, provide compression weather stripping at fixed stops.
H. Entrance Doors: Reinforce doors as required for installing entrance door hardware.
1. At pairs of exterior doors, provide sliding-type weather stripping retained in adjustable strip and mortised into door edge.
2. At exterior doors, provide weather sweeps applied to door bottoms.
I. Entrance Door Hardware Installation: Factory install entrance door hardware to the greatest extent possible. Cut, drill, and tap for factory-installed entrance door hardware before applying finishes.
J. After fabrication, clearly mark components to identify their locations in Project in accordance with Shop Drawings.
2.9 ALUMINUM FINISHES
A. Color Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, AA-M12C22A42/A44, Class I, 0.018 mm or thicker.
1. Color: Black.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Aluminum-Framed Entrances and Storefronts Renovation & Expansion Final Design 084113 - 11
100% Design Submittal
2.10 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Structural Sealant: Perform quality-control procedures complying with ASTM C1401 recommendations, including, but not limited to, assembly material qualification procedures, sealant testing, and assembly fabrication reviews and checks.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION OF ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCE AND STOREFRONT SYSTEMS A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Do not install damaged components.
C. Fit joints to produce hairline joints free of burrs and distortion.
D. Rigidly secure nonmovement joints.
E. Install anchors with separators and isolators to prevent metal corrosion and electrolytic deterioration and to prevent impeding movement of moving joints.
F. Seal perimeter and other joints watertight unless otherwise indicated.
G. Metal Protection:
1. Where aluminum is in contact with dissimilar metals, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with materials recommended by manufacturer for this purpose or by installing nonconductive spacers.
2. Where aluminum is in contact with concrete or masonry, protect against corrosion by painting contact surfaces with bituminous paint.
H. Set continuous sill members and flashing in full sealant bed, as specified in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants," to produce weathertight installation.
I. Install components plumb and true in alignment with established lines and grades.
J. Install operable units level and plumb, securely anchored, and without distortion. Adjust weather-stripping contact and hardware movement to produce proper operation.
K. Install entrance doors to produce smooth operation and tight fit at contact points. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Aluminum-Framed Entrances and Storefronts Renovation & Expansion Final Design 084113 - 12
100% Design Submittal
1. Exterior Doors: Install to produce weathertight enclosure and tight fit at weather stripping.
2. Field-Installed Entrance Door Hardware: Install surface-mounted entrance door hardware in accordance with entrance door hardware manufacturers' written instructions using concealed fasteners to greatest extent possible.
L. Install glazing as specified in Section 088000 "Glazing."
3.3 ERECTION TOLERANCES
A. Install aluminum-framed entrance and storefront systems to comply with the following maximum tolerances:
1. Plumb: 1/8 inch in 10 feet; 1/4 inch in 40 feet.
2. Level: 1/8 inch in 20 feet; 1/4 inch in 40 feet.
3. Alignment:
a. Where surfaces abut in line or are separated by reveal or protruding element up to 1/2 inch wide, limit offset from true alignment to 1/16 inch. b. Where surfaces are separated by reveal or protruding element from 1/2 to 1 inch wide, limit offset from true alignment to 1/8 inch.
c. Where surfaces are separated by reveal or protruding element of 1 inch wide or more, limit offset from true alignment to 1/4 inch.
4. Location: Limit variation from plane to 1/8 inch in 12 feet; 1/2 inch over total length.
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests.
B. Tests: Perform the following tests on representative areas of aluminum-framed entrance and storefront systems.
1. Water-Spray Test: Before installation of interior finishes has begun, areas designated by Engineer to be tested in accordance with AAMA 501.2 and to not evidence water penetration.
a. Perform a minimum of two tests in areas as directed by Engineer.
2. Air Leakage: ASTM E783 at 1.5 times the rate specified for laboratory testing in "Performance Requirements" Article but not more than 0.09 cfm/sq. ft. at a static-airpressure differential of 1.57 lbf/sq. ft. a. Perform a minimum of two tests in areas as directed by Engineer.
3. Structural-Sealant Adhesion: Test structural sealant in accordance with recommendations in ASTM C1401, Destructive Test Method A, "Hand Pull Tab (Destructive)," Appendix X2.
a. Test a minimum of two areas on each building facade. b. Repair installation areas damaged by testing.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Aluminum-Framed Entrances and Storefronts Renovation & Expansion Final Design 084113 - 13
100% Design Submittal
C. Aluminum-framed entrance and storefront systems will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.
D. Prepare test and inspection reports.
3.5 MAINTENANCE SERVICE
A. Entrance Door Hardware Maintenance:
1. Maintenance Tools and Instructions: Furnish a complete set of specialized tools and maintenance instructions as needed for Owner's continued adjustment, maintenance, and removal and replacement of entrance door hardware.
2. Initial Maintenance Service: Beginning at Substantial Completion, provide six months' full maintenance by skilled employees of entrance door hardware Installer. Include quarterly preventive maintenance, repair or replacement of worn or defective components, lubrication, cleaning, and adjusting as required for proper entrance door hardware operation at rated speed and capacity. Use parts and supplies that are the same as those used in the manufacture and installation of original equipment.
END OF SECTION 084113
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Aluminum-Framed Entrances and Storefronts Renovation & Expansion Final Design 084113 - 14
100% Design Submittal
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Aluminum Windows
Renovation & Expansion Final Design 085113 - 1
100% Design Submittal
SECTION 085113 - ALUMINUM WINDOWS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Aluminum windows.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 084113 "Aluminum-Framed Entrances and Storefronts" for coordinating finish among aluminum fenestration units.
2. Section 088000 “Glazing” for glass of aluminum windows.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Combination Assemblies: An assembly formed by a combination of two or more separate fenestration products whose frames are mulled together utilizing a combination mullion or reinforcing mullion.
B. Combination Mullions: A horizontal or vertical member formed by joining two or more individual fenestration units together without a mullion stiffener.
C. Reinforcing Mullions: A horizontal or vertical member with an added continuous mullion stiffener and joining two or more individual fenestration units along the sides of the mullion stiffener.
1.4 COORDINATION
A. Finish Matching: Coordinate all exposed exterior aluminum components and trim to ensure uniform and consistent color and appearance. Use products specified in this Section as a benchmark. Engineer's decision will be final as to whether a proposed product matches.
1.5 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS
A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Aluminum Windows
Renovation & Expansion Final Design 085113 - 2
100% Design Submittal
1. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials, Installer's personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays.
2. Review and discuss finishing of aluminum windows that is required to be coordinated with finishing of other aluminum work for color and finish matching.
3. Review, discuss, and coordinate interrelationship of aluminum windows with other exterior wall components. Include provisions for anchoring, flashing, weeping, sealing perimeters, and protecting finishes.
4. Review and discuss sequence of work required to construct a watertight and weathertight exterior building envelope.
5. Inspect and discuss condition of substrate and other preparatory work performed by other trades.
1.6 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
1. Include construction details, material descriptions, glazing and fabrication methods, dimensions of individual components and profiles, hardware, and finishes.
B. Shop Drawings:
1. Plans, elevations, sections, hardware, accessories, insect screens, operational clearances, and details of installation, including anchor, flashing, and sealant installation.
C. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's standard color sheets, showing full range of available colors for each type of exposed finish.
D. Samples for Verification: Actual sample of finished products for each type of exposed finish:
1. Exposed Aluminum Finishes: 2 by 4 inches.
E. Product Schedule: For aluminum windows. Use same designations indicated on Drawings.
F. Delegated Design Submittals: For reinforcing mullions, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.
1.7 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Test and Evaluation Reports:
1. Product Test Reports: For each aluminum window, for tests performed by qualified testing agency.
B. Qualification Statements: For manufacturer and Installer.
C. Delegated Design Engineer Qualifications: For reinforcing mullions.
D. Sample warranties.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Aluminum Windows
Renovation & Expansion Final Design 085113 - 3
100% Design Submittal
1.8 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Warranty Documentation:
1. Manufacturers' special warranties.
1.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A manufacturer capable of fabricating aluminum windows that meet or exceed performance requirements indicated and of documenting this performance by test reports and calculations.
B. Installer Qualifications: Authorized representative who is trained and approved by aluminum window manufacturer.
C. Testing Agency Qualifications: An FGIA-accredited testing agency for testing indicated.
1.10 MOCKUPS
A. Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals, to demonstrate aesthetic effects, and to set quality standards for materials and execution.
1. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Owner specifically approves such deviations by Change Order.
2. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.
1.11 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver aluminum windows to Project site in original, unopened packages and store them in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. Protect aluminum windows against damage from moisture, humidity, temperature extremes, direct sunlight, surface contamination, and other causes.
B. Handle aluminum windows in a manner that prevents damage before, during, and after installation.
1.12 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install aluminum windows outside of limits recommended in writing by manufacturer.
1.13 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace aluminum windows that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Aluminum Windows
Renovation & Expansion Final Design 085113 - 4
100% Design Submittal
1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Failure to meet performance requirements.
b. Structural failures, including excessive deflection, water leakage, condensation, and air infiltration.
c. Faulty operation of movable sash and hardware.
d. Deterioration of materials and finishes beyond normal weathering. e. Failure of insulating glass.
2. Warranty Period:
a. Window: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. b. Glazing Units: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. c. Hardware: Three years from date of Substantial Completion. d. Aluminum Finish: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SOURCE LIMITATIONS
A. Obtain aluminum windows from single source from single manufacturer.
2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Product Standard: Comply with AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440 for definitions and minimum standards of performance, materials, components, accessories, and fabrication unless more stringent requirements are indicated.
1. Window Certification: FGIA certified with label attached to each window.
B. Performance Class and Grade: AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440 as follows:
1. Minimum Performance Class: As indicated on Drawings.
2. Minimum Performance Grade: As indicated on Drawings.
3. Mulled Window Systems: Evaluate and rate combination assemblies as single systems as determined by AAMA 450 in accordance with AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440 requirements.
C. Energy Performance: Certified and labeled by manufacturer for energy performance as follows:
1. Thermal Transmittance (U-factor): As determined in accordance with NFRC 100:
a. Fixed Windows: Not more than. 0.46.
b. Operable Windows: Not more than. 0.46.
2. Solar Heat-Gain Coefficient (SHGC): As determined in accordance with NFRC 200:
a. Fixed Windows: Not more than 0.30.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Aluminum Windows
Renovation & Expansion Final Design 085113 - 5
100% Design Submittal
b. Operable Windows: Not more than 0.30 as determined in accordance with NFRC 200.
D. Thermal Movements: Provide aluminum windows, including anchorage, which allow for thermal movements resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of joint sealants, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Base engineering calculation on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss.
1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F ambient; 180 deg F material surfaces.
E. Windborne-Debris Impact Resistance: Passes ASTM E1886 missile-impact and cyclic-pressure tests in accordance with ASTM E1996 for Wind Zone 4 for enhanced protection.
1. Large-Missile Test: For glazing located within 30 ft. of grade.
2. Small-Missile Test: For glazing located more than 30 ft. above grade.
2.3 ALUMINUM WINDOWS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
1. EFCO Corporation.
2. Kawneer Company, Inc.; Arconic Corporation.
3. YKK AP America Inc.
B. Provide manufacturer's standard aluminum window assemblies consisting of frames, sashes, glass, hardware, fasteners, and all components and accessories as required for a complete installation.
C. Operating Types: Provide the following operating types in locations indicated on Drawings:
1. Fixed.
D. Frames and Sashes: Aluminum extrusions of alloy, temper, and strength complying with AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440.
1. Thermally Broken Construction: Fabricate frames, sashes, and muntins with an integral, concealed, low-conductance thermal barrier located between exterior materials and window members exposed on interior side in a manner that eliminates direct metal-tometal contact.
E. Glazing System: Manufacturer's standard factory-glazing system that produces weathertight seal.
F. Weather Stripping: Provide manufacturer's standard full-perimeter weather stripping for each operable sash unless otherwise indicated.
G. Fasteners: Noncorrosive and compatible with window members, trim, hardware, anchors, and other components.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Aluminum Windows
Renovation & Expansion Final Design 085113 - 6
100% Design Submittal
1. Exposed Fasteners: Avoid exposed fasteners to greatest extent possible. For application of hardware, use fasteners that match finish hardware being fastened.
H. Mullions: Provide manufacturer's standard combination and reinforcing mullions and cover plates matching window units, complete with anchors for support to structure. Allow for erection tolerances and provide for movement of window units due to thermal expansion and building deflections. Provide reinforcing mullions and cover plates capable of withstanding design wind loads of window units.
2.4 ACCESSORIES
A. Subsills: Thermally broken, extruded-aluminum subsills in configurations indicated on Drawings.
B. Interior Trim: Extruded-aluminum profiles in sizes and configurations indicated on Drawings.
C. Panning Trim: Profiles in sizes and configurations indicated on Drawings.
D. Nail Fins: Manufacturer's standard mounting flanges with holes pre-punched for mechanical fasteners.
2.5 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate aluminum windows in sizes indicated. Include a complete system for assembling components and anchoring windows.
B. Glaze aluminum windows in the factory.
C. Weather strip each operable sash to provide weathertight installation.
D. Weep Holes: Provide weep holes and internal passages to conduct infiltrating water to exterior.
E. Provide water-shed members above side-hinged sashes and similar lines of natural water penetration.
F. Complete fabrication, assembly, finishing, hardware application, and other work in the factory to greatest extent possible. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation.
2.6 GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS
A. Comply with NAAMM/NOMMA AMP 500 "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products," for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Aluminum Windows
Renovation & Expansion Final Design 085113 - 7
100% Design Submittal
C. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are unacceptable. Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.
2.7 ALUMINUM FINISHES
A. Color Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, AA-M12C22A42/A44, Class I, 0.018 mm or thicker.
1. Color: Black.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine openings, substrates, structural support, anchorage, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B. Verify rough opening dimensions, levelness of sill plate, and operational clearances.
C. Examine wall flashings, vapor retarders, air and weather barriers, and other built-in components to ensure weathertight window installation.
D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing windows, hardware, accessories, and other components. For installation procedures and requirements not addressed in manufacturer's written instructions, comply with installation requirements in ASTM E2112.
B. Install windows level, plumb, square, true to line, without distortion or impeding thermal movement, anchored securely in place to structural support, and in proper relation to wall flashing and other adjacent construction to produce weathertight construction.
C. Mullions: Install combination and reinforcing mullions for combination assemblies in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions.
D. Install windows and components to drain water passing joints and condensation to the exterior.
E. Separate aluminum from sources of corrosion or electrolytic action at points of contact with other materials.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Aluminum Windows
Renovation & Expansion Final Design 085113 - 8
100% Design Submittal
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.
1. Testing and inspecting agency will interpret tests and state in each report whether tested work complies with or deviates from requirements.
B. Testing Services: Testing and inspection of installed windows as follows:
1. Testing Methodology: Testing of windows for air infiltration and water resistance in accordance with AAMA 502.
2. Air-Infiltration Testing:
a. Test Pressure: As required to determine compliance in accordance with AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440 for performance class indicated. b. Allowable Air-Leakage Rate: 1.5 times the applicable AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440 rate for product type and performance class rounded down to one decimal place.
3. Water-Resistance Testing:
a. Test Pressure: Two-thirds times test pressure required to determine compliance with AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440 performance grade indicated. b. Allowable Water Infiltration: No water penetration.
4. Testing Extent: Three windows of each type as selected by Engineer and a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency. Windows will be tested immediately after installation.
5. Test Reports: Prepared in accordance with AAMA 502.
C. Tests and Inspections:
1. Windows will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.
D. Prepare test and inspection reports.
3.4 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust operating sashes and hardware for a tight fit at contact points and weather stripping for smooth operation and weathertight closure.
3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Clean exposed surfaces immediately after installing windows using manufacturer's written instructions. Avoid damaging finishes. Remove excess sealants, glazing materials, dirt, and other substances.
B. Remove and replace glass that has been broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or damaged during construction period.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Aluminum Windows
Renovation & Expansion Final Design 085113 - 9
100% Design Submittal
C. Protect window surfaces from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations. If contaminating substances do contact window surfaces, remove contaminants immediately in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions.
END OF SECTION 085113
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Aluminum Windows
Renovation & Expansion Final Design 085113 - 10
100% Design Submittal
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Door Hardware
Renovation & Expansion Final Design 087100 - 1
100% Design Submittal
SECTION 087100 - DOOR HARDWARE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Mechanical door hardware for the following:
a. Swinging doors.
2. Cylinders for door hardware specified in other Sections.
3. Electrified door hardware.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 081113 "Hollow Metal Doors and Frames" for astragals provided as part of labeled fire-rated assemblies and for door silencers provided as part of hollow-metal frames.
2. Section 081416 "Flush Wood Doors" for provided as part of labeled fire-rated assemblies.
1.3 COORDINATION
A. Installation Templates: Distribute for doors, frames, and other work specified to be factory prepared. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing door hardware to comply with indicated requirements.
B. Security: Coordinate installation of door hardware, keying, and access control with Owner's security consultant.
C. Electrical System Roughing-In: Coordinate layout and installation of electrified door hardware with connections to power supplies and building safety and security systems.
D. Existing Openings: Where hardware components are scheduled for application to existing construction or where modifications to existing door hardware are required, field verify existing conditions and coordinate installation of door hardware to suit opening conditions and to provide proper door operation.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Door Hardware
Renovation & Expansion Final Design 087100 - 2
100% Design Submittal
E. New hardware shall match or be compatible in function, finish, and manufacturer to existing where possible. Contractor shall confirm existing conditions and coordinate with Architect and Owner prior to submittals.
F. All cylinders and keying shall be coordinated with the Owner’s existing keying system. Provide keyed-alike groups and master keying per Owner direction.
1.4 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS
A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
1. Conference participants shall include Installer's Architectural Hardware Consultant and Owner's security consultant.
B. Keying Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
1. Conference participants shall include Installer's Architectural Hardware Consultant and Owner's security consultant.
2. Incorporate conference decisions into keying schedule after reviewing door hardware keying system including, but not limited to, the following:
a. Flow of traffic and degree of security required.
b. Preliminary key system schematic diagram.
c. Requirements for key control system.
d. Requirements for access control.
e. Address for delivery of keys.
1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes.
B. Shop Drawings: For electrified door hardware.
1. Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.
2. Include details of interface of electrified door hardware and building safety and security systems.
C. Samples: For each exposed product in each finish specified, in manufacturer's standard size.
1. Tag Samples with full product description to coordinate Samples with door hardware schedule.
D. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of exposed finish.
E. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed product, in each finish specified. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Door Hardware
Renovation & Expansion Final Design 087100 - 3
100% Design Submittal
1. Sample Size: Full-size units or minimum 2-by-4-inch Samples for sheet and 4-inch long Samples for other products.
a. Full-size Samples will be returned to Contractor. Units that are acceptable and remain undamaged through submittal, review, and field comparison process may, after final check of operation, be incorporated into the Work, within limitations of keying requirements.
2. Tag Samples with full product description to coordinate Samples with door hardware schedule.
F. Door Hardware Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of Installer's Architectural Hardware Consultant. Coordinate door hardware schedule with doors, frames, and related work to ensure proper size, thickness, hand, function, and finish of door hardware.
1. Submittal Sequence: Submit door hardware schedule after or concurrent with submissions of Product Data, Samples, and Shop Drawings. Coordinate submission of door hardware schedule with scheduling requirements of other work to facilitate the fabrication of other work that is critical in Project construction schedule.
2. Format: Use same scheduling sequence and format and use same door numbers as in door hardware schedule in the Contract Documents.
3. Content: Include the following information:
a. Identification number, location, hand, fire rating, size, and material of each door and frame.
b. Locations of each door hardware set, cross-referenced to Drawings on floor plans and to door and frame schedule.
c. Complete designations, including name and manufacturer, type, style, function, size, quantity, function, and finish of each door hardware product. d. Description of electrified door hardware sequences of operation and interfaces with other building control systems.
e. Fastenings and other installation information.
f. Explanation of abbreviations, symbols, and designations contained in door hardware schedule.
g. Mounting locations for door hardware.
h. List of related door devices specified in other Sections for each door and frame.
G. Keying Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of Installer's Architectural Hardware Consultant, detailing Owner's final keying instructions for locks. Include schematic keying diagram and index each key set to unique door designations that are coordinated with the Contract Documents.
1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For Installer and Architectural Hardware Consultant.
B. Product Certificates: For each type of electrified door hardware.
1. Certify that door hardware for use on each type and size of labeled fire-rated doors complies with listed fire-rated door assemblies.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Door Hardware
Renovation & Expansion Final Design 087100 - 4
100% Design Submittal
C. Product Test Reports: For compliance with accessibility requirements, for tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, for door hardware on doors located in accessible routes.
D. Field quality-control reports.
E. Sample Warranty: For special warranty.
1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Maintenance Data: For each type of door hardware to include in maintenance manuals.
B. Schedules: Final door hardware and keying schedule.
1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Supplier of products and an employer of workers trained and approved by product manufacturers and of an Architectural Hardware Consultant who is available during the course of the Work to consult Contractor, Engineer, and Owner about door hardware and keying.
1. Warehousing Facilities: In Project's vicinity.
2. Scheduling Responsibility: Preparation of door hardware and keying schedule.
3. Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of data for electrified door hardware, including Shop Drawings, based on testing and engineering analysis of manufacturer's standard units in assemblies similar to those indicated for this Project.
B. Architectural Hardware Consultant Qualifications: A person who is experienced in providing consulting services for door hardware installations that are comparable in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and who is currently certified by DHI as an Architectural Hardware Consultant (AHC) and an Electrified Hardware Consultant (EHC).
1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Inventory door hardware on receipt and provide secure lock-up for door hardware delivered to Project site.
B. Tag each item or package separately with identification coordinated with the final door hardware schedule, and include installation instructions, templates, and necessary fasteners with each item or package.
C. Deliver keys to manufacturer of key control system for subsequent delivery to Owner.
D. Deliver keys and permanent cores to Owner by registered mail or overnight package service. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Door Hardware
Renovation & Expansion Final Design 087100 - 5
100% Design Submittal
1.10 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of door hardware that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Structural failures including excessive deflection, cracking, or breakage. b. Faulty operation of doors and door hardware.
c. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering and use.
2. Warranty Period: Three years from date of Substantial Completion unless otherwise indicated below:
a. Electromagnetic and Delayed-Egress Locks: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.
b. Exit Devices: Two years from date of Substantial Completion. c. Manual Closers: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of door hardware from single manufacturer.
1. Provide electrified door hardware from same manufacturer as mechanical door hardware unless otherwise indicated. Manufacturers that perform electrical modifications and that are listed by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction are acceptable.
2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Where fire-rated doors are indicated, provide door hardware complying with NFPA 80 that is listed and labeled by a qualified testing agency, for fireprotection ratings indicated, based on testing at positive pressure according to NFPA 252 or UL 10C.
B. Smoke- and Draft-Control Door Assemblies: Where smoke- and draft-control door assemblies are required, provide door hardware that complies with requirements of assemblies tested according to UL 1784 and installed in compliance with NFPA 105.
1. Air Leakage Rate: Maximum air leakage of 0.3 cfm/sq. ft. at the tested pressure differential of 0.3-inch wg of water.
C. Electrified Door Hardware: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Door Hardware
Renovation & Expansion Final Design 087100 - 6
100% Design Submittal
D. Means of Egress Doors: Latches do not require more than 15 lbf to release the latch. Locks do not require use of a key, tool, or special knowledge for operation.
E. Accessibility Requirements: For door hardware on doors in an accessible route, comply with California Accessibility Standards.
1. Provide operating devices that do not require tight grasping, pinching, or twisting of the wrist and that operate with a force of not more than 5 lbf.
2. Comply with the following maximum opening-force requirements:
a. Interior, Non-Fire-Rated Hinged Doors: 5 lbf applied perpendicular to door. b. Sliding or Folding Doors: 5 lbf applied parallel to door at latch. c. Fire Doors: Minimum opening force allowable by authorities having jurisdiction.
3. Bevel raised thresholds with a slope of not more than 1:2. Provide thresholds not more than 1/2 inch high.
4. Adjust door closer sweep periods so that, from an open position of 90 degrees, the door will take at least 5 seconds to move to a position of 12 degrees from the latch.
5. Adjust spring hinges so that, from an open position of 70 degrees, the door will take at least 1.5 seconds to move to the closed position.
2.3 HINGES
A. Hinges: BHMA A156.1. Provide template-produced hinges for hinges installed on hollow-metal doors and hollow-metal frames.
2.4 SELF-CLOSING HINGES AND PIVOTS
A. Self-Closing Hinges and Pivots: BHMA A156.17.
2.5 CONTINUOUS HINGES
A. Continuous Hinges: BHMA A156.26; minimum 0.120-inch thick, hinge leaves with minimum overall width of 4 inches; fabricated to full height of door and frame and to template screw locations; with components finished after milling and drilling are complete.
B. Continuous, Gear-Type Hinges: Extruded-aluminum, pinless, geared hinge leaves joined by a continuous extruded-aluminum channel cap; with concealed, self-lubricating thrust bearings.
2.6 MECHANICAL LOCKS AND LATCHES
A. Lock Functions: As indicated in door hardware schedule.
B. Lock Throw: Comply with testing requirements for length of bolts required for labeled fire doors, and as follows:
1. Bored Locks: Minimum 1/2-inch latchbolt throw.
2. Mortise Locks: Minimum 3/4-inch latchbolt throw.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Door Hardware
Renovation & Expansion Final Design 087100 - 7
100% Design Submittal
3. Deadbolts: Minimum 1.25-inch bolt throw.
C. Lock Backset: 2-3/4 inches unless otherwise indicated.
D. Lock Trim:
1. Description: As indicated on Drawings.
2. Levers: Forged.
3. Escutcheons (Roses): Forged.
4. Dummy Trim: Match lever lock trim and escutcheons.
E. Strikes: Provide manufacturer's standard strike for each lock bolt or latchbolt complying with requirements indicated for applicable lock or latch and with strike box and curved lip extended to protect frame; finished to match lock or latch.
1. Flat-Lip Strikes: For locks with three-piece antifriction latchbolts, as recommended by manufacturer.
2. Extra-Long-Lip Strikes: For locks used on frames with applied wood casing trim.
3. Aluminum-Frame Strike Box: Manufacturer's special strike box fabricated for aluminum framing.
4. Rabbet Front and Strike: Provide on locksets for rabbeted meeting stiles.
F. Bored Locks: BHMA A156.2; Grade 1; Series 4000.
G. Mortise Locks: BHMA A156.13; Security Grade 1; stamped steel case with steel or brass parts; Series 1000.
2.7 AUXILIARY LOCKS
A. Bored Auxiliary Locks: BHMA A156.36: Grade 1; with strike that suits frame.
B. Mortise Auxiliary Locks: BHMA A156.36; Grade 1; with strike that suits frame.
C. Narrow Stile Auxiliary Locks: BHMA A156.36; Grade 1; with strike that suits frame.
2.8 ELECTRIC STRIKES
A. Electric Strikes: BHMA A156.31; Grade 1; with faceplate to suit lock and frame.
2.9 ELECTROMECHANICAL LOCKS
A. Electromechanical Locks: BHMA A156.25; Grade 1; motor or solenoid driven; with strike that suits frame.
1. Type: Mortise deadbolt.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Door Hardware
Renovation & Expansion Final Design 087100 - 8
100% Design Submittal
2.10 EXIT LOCKS AND EXIT ALARMS
A. Exit Locks and Alarms: BHMA A156.29, Grade 1.
2.11 SURFACE BOLTS
A. Surface Bolts: BHMA A156.16.
2.12 MANUAL FLUSH BOLTS
A. Manual Flush Bolts: BHMA A156.16; minimum 3/4-inch throw; designed for mortising into door edge.
2.13 AUTOMATIC AND SELF-LATCHING FLUSH BOLTS
A. Automatic Flush Bolts: BHMA A156.3, Type 25; minimum 3/4-inch throw; with dust-proof strikes; designed for mortising into door edge. Include wear plates.
2.14 EXIT DEVICES AND AUXILIARY ITEMS
A. Exit Devices and Auxiliary Items: BHMA A156.3.
2.15 LOCK CYLINDERS
A. Lock Cylinders: Tumbler type, constructed from brass or bronze, stainless steel, or nickel silver. Provide cylinder from same manufacturer of locking devices.
B. Standard Lock Cylinders: BHMA A156.5; Grade 1 permanent cores; face finished to match lockset.
1. Core Type: Interchangeable.
C. High-Security Lock Cylinders: BHMA A156.30; Grade 1 permanent cores that are removable; face finished to match lockset.
1. Type: E, electrical.
D. Construction Master Keys: Provide cylinders with feature that permits voiding of construction keys without cylinder removal. Provide 10 construction master keys.
E. Construction Cores: Provide construction cores that are replaceable by permanent cores.
Provide 10 construction master keys.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Door Hardware
Renovation & Expansion Final Design 087100 - 9
100% Design Submittal
2.16 KEYING
A. Keying System: Factory registered, complying with guidelines in BHMA A156.28, appendix.
Provide one extra key blank for each lock. Incorporate decisions made in keying conference.
1. No Master Key System: Only change keys operate cylinders. a. Provide three cylinder change keys.
2. Master Key System: Change keys and a master key operate cylinders. a. Provide three cylinder change keys and five master keys.
3. Grand Master Key System: Change keys, a master key, and a grand master key operate cylinders.
a. Provide three cylinder change keys and five each of master and grand master keys.
4. Great-Grand Master Key System: Change keys, a master key, a grand master key, and a great-grand master key operate cylinders.
a. Provide three cylinder change keys and five each of master, grand master, and great-grand master keys.
5. Existing System:
a. Master key or grand master key locks to Owner's existing system. b. Re-key Owner's existing master key system into new keying system.
6. Keyed Alike: Key all cylinders to same change key.
B. Keys: Nickel silver.
1. Stamping: Permanently inscribe each key with a visual key control number and include the following notation:
a. Notation: "DO NOT DUPLICATE."
2.17 KEY CONTROL SYSTEM
A. Key Control Cabinet: BHMA A156.28; metal cabinet with baked-enamel finish; containing key-holding hooks, labels, two sets of key tags with self-locking key holders, key-gathering envelopes, and temporary and permanent markers; with key capacity of 150 percent of the number of locks.
1. Wall-Mounted Cabinet: Grade 1 cabinet with hinged-panel door equipped with keyholding panels and pin-tumbler cylinder door lock.
B. Key Lock Boxes: Designed for storage of two keys.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Door Hardware
Renovation & Expansion Final Design 087100 - 10
100% Design Submittal
C. Key Control System Software: Multiple-index system for recording and reporting key-holder listings, tracking keys and lock and key history, and printing receipts for transactions. Include instruction manual.
D. All cylinders and keying shall be coordinated with the Owner’s existing keying system. Provide keyed-alike groups and master keying per Owner direction.
2.18 OPERATING TRIM
A. Operating Trim: BHMA A156.6; stainless steel unless otherwise indicated.
2.19 ACCESSORIES FOR PAIRS OF DOORS
A. Coordinators: BHMA A156.3; consisting of active-leaf, hold-open lever and inactive-leaf release trigger; fabricated from steel with nylon-coated strike plates; with built-in, adjustable safety release.
B. Carry-Open Bars: BHMA A156.3; prevent the inactive leaf from opening before the active leaf; provide polished brass or bronze carry-open bars with strike plate for inactive leaves of pairs of doors unless automatic or self-latching bolts are used.
C. Astragals: BHMA A156.22.
2.20 SURFACE CLOSERS
A. Surface Closers: BHMA A156.4; rack-and-pinion hydraulic type with adjustable sweep and latch speeds controlled by key-operated valves and forged-steel main arm. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for size of door closers depending on size of door, exposure to weather, and anticipated frequency of use. Provide factory-sized closers, adjustable to meet field conditions and requirements for opening force.
2.21 MECHANICAL STOPS AND HOLDERS
A. Wall- and Floor-Mounted Stops: BHMA A156.16.
2.22 DOOR GASKETING
A. Door Gasketing: BHMA A156.22; with resilient or flexible seal strips that are easily replaceable and readily available from stocks maintained by manufacturer.
B. Maximum Air Leakage: When tested according to ASTM E283 with tested pressure differential of 0.3-inch wg, as follows:
1. Smoke-Rated Gasketing: 0.3 cfm/sq. ft. of door opening.
2. Gasketing on Single Doors: 0.3 cfm/sq. ft. of door opening.
3. Gasketing on Double Doors: 0.50 cfm per ft. of door opening. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Door Hardware
Renovation & Expansion Final Design 087100 - 11
100% Design Submittal
2.23 THRESHOLDS
A. Thresholds: BHMA A156.21; fabricated to full width of opening indicated.
2.24 METAL PROTECTIVE TRIM UNITS
A. Metal Protective Trim Units: BHMA A156.6; fabricated from 0.050-inch- thick aluminum; with manufacturer's standard machine or self-tapping screw fasteners.
2.25 AUXILIARY DOOR HARDWARE
A. Auxiliary Hardware: BHMA A156.16.
2.26 AUXILIARY ELECTRIFIED DOOR HARDWARE
A. Auxiliary Electrified Door Hardware:
2.27 FABRICATION
A. Manufacturer's Nameplate: Do not provide products that have manufacturer's name or trade name displayed in a visible location except in conjunction with required fire-rating labels and as otherwise approved by Engineer.
1. Manufacturer's identification is permitted on rim of lock cylinders only.
B. Base Metals: Produce door hardware units of base metal indicated, fabricated by forming method indicated, using manufacturer's standard metal alloy, composition, temper, and hardness. Furnish metals of a quality equal to or greater than that of specified door hardware units and BHMA A156.18.
C. Fasteners: Provide door hardware manufactured to comply with published templates prepared for machine, wood, and sheet metal screws. Provide screws that comply with commercially recognized industry standards for application intended, except aluminum fasteners are not permitted. Provide Phillips flat-head screws with finished heads to match surface of door hardware unless otherwise indicated.
1. Concealed Fasteners: For door hardware units that are exposed when door is closed, except for units already specified with concealed fasteners. Do not use through bolts for installation where bolt head or nut on opposite face is exposed unless it is the only means of securely attaching the door hardware. Where through bolts are used on hollow door and frame construction, provide sleeves for each through bolt.
2. Fire-Rated Applications:
a. Wood or Machine Screws: For the following:
1) Hinges mortised to doors or frames; use threaded-to-the-head wood screws for wood doors and frames.
2) Strike plates to frames.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Door Hardware
Renovation & Expansion Final Design 087100 - 12
100% Design Submittal
3) Closers to doors and frames.
b. Steel Through Bolts: For the following unless door blocking is provided:
1) Surface hinges to doors.
2) Closers to doors and frames.
3) Surface-mounted exit devices.
3. Spacers or Sex Bolts: For through bolting of hollow-metal doors.
4. Gasketing Fasteners: Provide noncorrosive fasteners for exterior applications and elsewhere as indicated.
2.28 FINISHES
A. Provide finishes complying with BHMA A156.18 as indicated in door hardware schedule.
B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.
C. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.
D. Provide consistent finish on locksets, closers, stops, and push/pull hardware.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine doors and frames, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, labeled fire-rated door assembly construction, wall and floor construction, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B. Examine roughing-in for electrical power systems to verify actual locations of wiring connections before electrified door hardware installation.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Steel Doors and Frames: For surface-applied door hardware, drill and tap doors and frames according to ANSI/SDI A250.6.
B. Wood Doors: Comply with door and hardware manufacturers' written instructions. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Door Hardware
Renovation & Expansion Final Design 087100 - 13
100% Design Submittal
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Mounting Heights: Mount door hardware units at heights to comply with the following unless otherwise indicated or required to comply with governing regulations.
1. Standard Steel Doors and Frames: ANSI/SDI A250.8.
2. Wood Doors: DHI's "Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Wood Flush Doors."
B. Install each door hardware item to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Where cutting and fitting are required to install door hardware onto or into surfaces that are later to be painted or finished in another way, coordinate removal, storage, and reinstallation of surface protective trim units with finishing work. Do not install surface-mounted items until finishes have been completed on substrates involved.
1. Set units level, plumb, and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce attachment substrates as necessary for proper installation and operation.
2. Drill and countersink units that are not factory prepared for anchorage fasteners. Space fasteners and anchors according to industry standards.
C. Hinges: Install types and in quantities indicated in door hardware schedule, but not fewer than the number recommended by manufacturer for application indicated or one hinge for every 30 inches of door height, whichever is more stringent, unless other equivalent means of support for door, such as spring hinges or pivots, are provided.
D. Intermediate Offset Pivots: Where offset pivots are indicated, provide intermediate offset pivots in quantities indicated in door hardware schedule, but not fewer than one intermediate offset pivot per door and one additional intermediate offset pivot for every 30 inches of door height greater than 90 inches.
E. Lock Cylinders: Install construction cores to secure building and areas during construction period.
1. Replace construction cores with permanent cores as directed by Owner.
F. Key Control System:
1. Key Control Cabinet: Tag keys and place them on markers and hooks in key control system cabinet, as determined by final keying schedule.
2. Key Lock Boxes: Install where indicated or approved by Engineer to provide controlled access for fire and medical emergency personnel.
3. Key Control System Software: Set up multiple-index system based on final keying schedule.
G. Boxed Power Supplies: Locate power supplies as indicated or, if not indicated, above accessible ceilings. Verify location with Engineer.
1. Configuration: Provide one power supply for each door opening with electrified door hardware.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Door Hardware
Renovation & Expansion Final Design 087100 - 14
100% Design Submittal
H. Thresholds: Set thresholds for exterior doors and other doors indicated in full bed of sealant complying with requirements specified in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants." I. Stops: Provide floor stops for doors unless wall or other type stops are indicated in door hardware schedule. Do not mount floor stops where they will impede traffic.
J. Perimeter Gasketing: Apply to head and jamb, forming seal between door and frame.
1. Do not notch perimeter gasketing to install other surface-applied hardware.
K. Meeting Stile Gasketing: Fasten to meeting stiles, forming seal when doors are closed.
L. Door Bottoms: Apply to bottom of door, forming seal with threshold when door is closed.
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Independent Architectural Hardware Consultant: Owner will engage a qualified independent Architectural Hardware Consultant to perform inspections and to prepare inspection reports.
1. Independent Architectural Hardware Consultant will inspect door hardware and state in each report whether installed work complies with or deviates from requirements, including whether door hardware is properly installed and adjusted.
3.5 ADJUSTING
A. Initial Adjustment: Adjust and check each operating item of door hardware and each door to ensure proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units that cannot be adjusted to operate as intended. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating and ventilating equipment and to comply with referenced accessibility requirements.
1. Door Closers: Adjust sweep period to comply with accessibility requirements and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
2. Spring Hinges: Adjust to achieve positive latching when door is allowed to close freely from an open position of 70 degrees and so that closing time complies with accessibility requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
3. Electric Strikes: Adjust horizontal and vertical alignment of keeper to properly engage lock bolt.
B. Occupancy Adjustment: Approximately three months after date of Substantial Completion, Installer's Architectural Hardware Consultant shall examine and readjust each item of door hardware, including adjusting operating forces, as necessary to ensure function of doors, door hardware, and electrified door hardware.
3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by door hardware installation.
B. Clean operating items as necessary to restore proper function and finish. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Door Hardware
Renovation & Expansion Final Design 087100 - 15
100% Design Submittal
C. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure that door hardware is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
3.7 MAINTENANCE SERVICE
A. Maintenance Tools and Instructions: Furnish a complete set of specialized tools and maintenance instructions for Owner's continued adjustment, maintenance, and removal and replacement of door hardware.
B. Maintenance Service: Beginning at Substantial Completion, maintenance service shall include six months' full maintenance by skilled employees of door hardware Installer. Include quarterly preventive maintenance, repair or replacement of worn or defective components, lubrication, cleaning, and adjusting as required for proper door and door hardware operation. Parts and supplies shall be manufacturer's authorized replacement parts and supplies.
3.8 DEMONSTRATION
A. Train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain door hardware.
3.9 DOOR HARDWARE SCHEDULE
Set: 1.0 – EXTERIOR SINGLE HM UTILITY / STORAGE
Doors: DA-102, DA-120
Qty Description Catalog Number Finish Mfr
1 Continuous Hinge CFM x Height Required x SLI-HD1 — PE 1 Storeroom Lock 10 8204 LNL US32D SA
1 Surface Closer 281 CPS EN SA
1 Kick Plate K1050 10" x 2" LDW BEV CSK US32D RO
1 Threshold 2005AT — PE
1 Rain Guard 346C + 4" Overall Door Width — PE
1 Gasketing 2891AV — PE
1 Door Sweep 345CNB — PE
1 Position Switch DPS-M-BK — SU
Set: 2.0 – EXTERIOR ALSF PAIR VESTIBULE ENTRY
Doors: DA-117
Note: Exit devices to be dogged during designated hours for push/pull function. Coordinate with storefront submittals for compatibility.
Qty Description Catalog Number Finish Mfr
2 Continuous Hinge CFM x Height Required x SLI-HD1 — PE ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Door Hardware
Renovation & Expansion Final Design 087100 - 16
100% Design Submittal
1 Mullion L980A x Cyl to Match Facility Key US28 SA
1 Rim Exit Device 10 8804 Less Pull (Nightlatch) US32D SA 1 Rim Exit Device 8810 EO (Exit Only) US32D SA
2 Door Pull RM3310-36 US32D RO
2 Surface Closer 281 CPS EN SA
1 Threshold 2005AT — PE
1 Perimeter Seals By Aluminum Storefront Manufacturer — OT 2 Door Sweep 345CNB — PE
1 Position Switch DPS-M-BK — SU
Set: 3.0 – OFFICE FUNCTION WD
Doors: DA-112, DA-110, DA-115, DA-118
Qty Description Catalog Number Finish Mfr
3 Hinge TA2714 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" US26D MK
1 Office/Entry Lock 10 8205 LNL US32D SA
1 Surface Closer 1431 O EN SA
1 Kick Plate K1050 10" x 2" LDW BEV CSK US32D RO
1 Wall Stop 406 US32D RO
3 Silencer 608-RKW — RO
Set: 4.0 – PRIVACY WD
Doors: DA-111, DA-119
Qty Description Catalog Number Finish Mfr
3 Hinge TA2714 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" US26D MK
1 Privacy Lock 49 8265 LNL US32D SA
1 Surf Overhead Stop 10-436 630 RF
1 Surface Closer 281 O EN SA
1 Kick Plate K1050 10" x 2" LDW BEV CSK US32D RO
1 Mop Plate K1050 6" x 1" LDW CSK BEV US32D RO
3 Silencer 608-RKW — RO
Set: 5.0 – STOREROOM FUNCTION WD/HM OUTSWINGING
Doors: DA-105, DA-107
Qty Description Catalog Number Finish Mfr
3 Hinge TA2714 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" US26D MK
1 Storeroom Lock 10 8204 LNL US32D SA
1 Surface Closer 1431 CPS EN SA
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Door Hardware
Renovation & Expansion Final Design 087100 - 17
100% Design Submittal
1 Kick Plate K1050 10" x 2" LDW BEV CSK US32D RO
3 Silencer 608-RKW — RO
Set: 6.0 – ALSF CLASSROOM FUNCTION WD/HM
Doors: DA-100, DA-101, DA-108, DA-121, DA-122, DA-106
Qty Description Catalog Number Finish Mfr
3 Hinge TA2714 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" US26D MK
1 Classroom Lock 10 8237 LNL US32D SA
1 Surface Closer 1431 O EN SA
1 Wall Stop 406 US32D RO
1 Perimeter Seals By Aluminum Storefront Manufacturer — OT Set: 7.0 – INTERIOR SINGLE WD
Doors: DA-113
Qty Description Catalog Number Finish Mfr
3 Hinge TA2714 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" US26D MK
1 Storeroom Lock 10 8204 LNL US32D SA
1 Surface Closer 281 CPS EN SA
1 Kick Plate K1050 10" x 2" LDW BEV CSK US32D RO
1 Threshold 2005AT — PE
1 Gasketing 2891AV — PE
1 Door Sweep 345CNB — PE
1 Position Switch DPS-M-BK — SU
Set: 8.0 – EXTERIOR SINGLE HM
Doors: DA-109, DA-103
Note: Authorized credentials retract latch bolt for entry; door relocks upon closing. REX in rail allows free exit. Fail secure. Key override at all times.
Qty Description Catalog Number Finish Mfr
3 Hinge (NRP) 5BB1 4.5 x 4.5 NRP 630 IVE
1 Storeroom Lock T581HD7 DANE 626 FAL
1 SFIC Const. Core C607CCA — FAL
1 Permanent SFIC Core 80-036 626 SCH
1 OH Stop 90S 630 GLY
1 Surface Closer 4050 RW/PA 689 LCN
1 Kick Plate 8400 10" x 2" LDW 630 IVE
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Door Hardware
Renovation & Expansion Final Design 087100 - 18
100% Design Submittal
3 Silencer SR64 GY IVE
Set: 9.0 – PR - WD - EXIT DEVICE - EAC
Doors: DA-114, DA-123
Note: Door normally closed and secured. Authorized credentials retract latch bolt for entry; door relocks upon closing. REX in rail allows free exit. Fail secure. Key override at all times.
Qty Description Catalog Number Finish Mfr
3 Electric Hinge TA2714-QCXX-1/2" x 4-1/2" US26D MK
1 SVR Exit Device 43 NB8710 EO (Exit Only) US32D SA
1 SVR Exit Device DG1 43 55 56 NB8706 ETMD US32D SA
1 Surface Closer 422 CTB2 / PCTB2 as required EN SA
1 Kick Plate K1050 10" x 2" LDW US32D RO
1 Astragal Set 18061CNB — PE
1 Gasketing S88BL X LAR — PE
1 ElectroLynx Harness QC-C1500 (PS to hinge/strike) — MK 1 ElectroLynx Harness QC-CXXP (Lock/exit to hinge) — MK 1 Card Reader By security vendor — OT
1 Position Switch DPS-XXXX - WH (as required) — SU
1 Power Supply AQLXX - R8E1 (size as required) — SU
Set: 10.0 – SHARED ACCESS OFFICE/ENTRY FUNCTION
Doors: DA-104
Note: Door between two rooms requiring mutual access and security.
Qty Description Catalog Number Finish Mfr
3 Hinge, Full Mortise TA2714 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" US26D MK
1 Office/Entry Lock 10 8205 LNL US32D SA
1 Surface Closer 1431 CPS EN SA
1 Kick Plate K1050 10" x 2" LDW (Single) BEV CSK US32D RO 3 Silencer 608-RKW — RO
END OF SECTION 087100
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Glazing
Renovation & Expansion Final Design 088000 - 1
100% Design Submittal
SECTION 088000 – GLAZING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Glass products.
2. Laminated glass.
3. Insulating glass.
4. Glazing sealants.
5. Glazing tapes.
6. Miscellaneous glazing materials.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 084113 “Aluminum-framed Entrances and Storefronts.”
2. Section 085113 “Aluminum Windows.”
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Glass Manufacturers: Firms that produce primary glass, fabricated glass, or both, as defined in referenced glazing publications.
B. Glass Thicknesses: Indicated by thickness designations in millimeters in accordance with ASTM C1036.
C. IBC: International Building Code.
D. Interspace: Space between lites of an insulating-glass unit.
1.4 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate glazing channel dimensions to provide necessary bite on glass, minimum edge and face clearances, and adequate sealant thicknesses, with reasonable tolerances to achieve proper safety margins for glazing retention under each design load case, load case combination, and service condition.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Glazing
Renovation & Expansion Final Design 088000 - 2
100% Design Submittal
1.5 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS
A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
1. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials, Installer's personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays.
2. Review temporary protection requirements for glazing during and after installation.
1.6 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
B. Glass Samples: For each type of the following products; 12 inches square.
1. Laminated glass.
2. Insulating glass.
3. Spandrel glass.
C. Glazing Accessory Samples: For sealants and colored spacers, in 12-inch lengths. Install sealant Samples between two strips of material representative in color of adjoining framing system.
D. Glazing Schedule: List glass types and thicknesses for each size opening and location. Use same designations indicated on Drawings.
1.7 DELEGATED DESIGN SUBMITTALS
A. For glass indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.
1.8 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For Installer manufacturers of fabricated glass units.
B. Product Certificates: For glass.
C. Product Test Reports: For insulating glass and glazing sealants, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency.
1. For glazing sealants, provide test reports based on testing current sealant formulations within previous 36-month period.
D. Preconstruction adhesion and compatibility test report.
E. Sample Warranties: For special warranties.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Glazing
Renovation & Expansion Final Design 088000 - 3
100% Design Submittal
1.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fabricated-Glass Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer of fabricated glass units who is approved and certified by primary glass manufacturer.
B. Installer Qualifications: A qualified glazing contractor for this Project who is certified under the North American Contractor Certification Program (NACC) for Architectural Glass & Metal (AG&M) contractors.
C. Glass Testing Agency Qualifications: A qualified independent testing agency accredited according to the NFRC CAP 1 Certification Agency Program.
D. Sealant Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency qualified according to ASTM C1021 to conduct the testing indicated.
E. Mockups: Build mockups to demonstrate aesthetic effects and to set quality standards for materials and execution.
1. Install glazing in mockups specified in Section 084113 "Aluminum-Framed Entrances and Storefronts" Section 085113 "Aluminum Windows" to match glazing systems required for Project, including glazing methods.
2. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.
1.10 PRECONSTRUCTION TESTING
A. Preconstruction Adhesion and Compatibility Testing: Test each glass product, tape sealant, gasket, glazing accessory, and glass-framing member for adhesion to and compatibility with elastomeric glazing sealants.
1. Testing is not required if data are submitted based on previous testing of current sealant products and glazing materials matching those submitted.
2. Use ASTM C1087 to determine whether priming and other specific joint-preparation techniques are required to obtain rapid, optimum adhesion of glazing sealants to glass, tape sealants, gaskets, and glazing channel substrates.
3. Test no fewer than eight Samples of each type of material, including joint substrates, shims, sealant backings, secondary seals, and miscellaneous materials.
4. Schedule enough time for testing and analyzing results to prevent delaying the Work.
5. For materials failing tests, submit sealant manufacturer's written instructions for corrective measures including use of specially formulated primers.
1.11 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Protect glazing materials in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. Prevent damage to glass and glazing materials from condensation, temperature changes, direct exposure to sun, or other causes.
B. Comply with insulating-glass manufacturer's written instructions for venting and sealing units to avoid hermetic seal ruptures due to altitude change.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Glazing
Renovation & Expansion Final Design 088000 - 4
100% Design Submittal
1.12 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not proceed with glazing when ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by glazing material manufacturers and when glazing channel substrates are wet from rain, frost, condensation, or other causes.
1. Do not install glazing sealants when ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by sealant manufacturer or are below 40 deg F.
1.13 WARRANTY
A. Manufacturer's Special Warranty for Coated-Glass Products: Manufacturer agrees to replace coated-glass units that deteriorate within specified warranty period. Deterioration of coated glass is defined as defects developed from normal use that are not attributed to glass breakage or to maintaining and cleaning coated glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Defects include peeling, cracking, and other indications of deterioration in coating.
1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.
B. Manufacturer's Special Warranty for Laminated Glass: Manufacturer agrees to replace laminated-glass units that deteriorate within specified warranty period. Deterioration of laminated glass is defined as defects developed from normal use that are not attributed to glass breakage or to maintaining and cleaning laminated glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Defects include edge separation, delamination materially obstructing vision through glass, and blemishes exceeding those allowed by referenced laminated-glass standard.
1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.
C. Manufacturer's Special Warranty for Insulating Glass: Manufacturer agrees to replace insulating-glass units that deteriorate within specified warranty period. Deterioration of insulating glass is defined as failure of hermetic seal under normal use that is not attributed to glass breakage or to maintaining and cleaning insulating glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Evidence of failure is obstruction of vision by dust, moisture, or film on interior surfaces of glass.
1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
1. Guardian Glass; SunGuard.
2. Oldcastle Building Envelope.
3. Viracon, Inc.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Glazing
Renovation & Expansion Final Design 088000 - 5
100% Design Submittal
B. Source Limitations for Glass: Obtain tinted and coated glass from single source from single manufacturer.
C. Source Limitations for Glazing Accessories: For each product and installation method, obtain from single source from single manufacturer.
2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. General: Installed glazing systems shall withstand normal thermal movement and wind and impact loads (where applicable) without failure, including loss or glass breakage attributable to defective manufacture, fabrication, or installation; failure of sealants or gaskets to remain watertight and airtight; deterioration of glazing materials; or other defects in construction.
B. Structural Performance: Glazing shall withstand the following design loads within limits and under conditions indicated determined in accordance with the IBC and ASTM E1300:
1. Design Wind Pressures: As indicated on Drawings Determine design wind pressures applicable to Project in accordance with ASCE/SEI 7, based on heights above grade indicated on Drawings.
a. Wind Design Data: As indicated on Drawings.
b. Basic Wind Speed: As indicated on Drawings.
c. Importance Factor: 1.0.
d. Exposure Category: As indicated on Drawings .
2. Design Snow Loads: As indicated on Drawings.
3. Probability of Breakage for Sloped Glazing: For glass sloped more than 15 degrees from vertical, design glass for a probability of breakage not greater than 0.001.
4. Maximum Lateral Deflection: For glass supported on all four edges, limit center-of-glass deflection at design wind pressure to not more than 1/50 times the short-side length or 1 inch, whichever is less.
5. Thermal Loads: Design glazing to resist thermal stress breakage induced by differential temperature conditions and limited air circulation within individual glass lites and insulated glazing units.
C. Safety Glazing: Where safety glazing is indicated, provide glazing that complies with 16 CFR 1201, Category II.
D. Thermal and Optical Performance Properties: Provide glass with performance properties specified, as indicated in manufacturer's published test data, based on procedures indicated below:
1. For monolithic-glass lites, properties are based on units with lites 6 mm thick.
2. For laminated-glass lites, properties are based on products of construction indicated.
3. For insulating-glass units, properties are based on units of thickness indicated for overall unit and for each lite.
4. U-Factors: Center-of-glazing values, in accordance with NFRC 100 and based on most current non-beta version of LBL's WINDOW computer program, expressed as Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg F.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Glazing
Renovation & Expansion Final Design 088000 - 6
100% Design Submittal
5. SHGC and Visible Transmittance: Center-of-glazing values, in accordance with NFRC 200 and based on most current non-beta version of LBL's WINDOW computer program.
6. Visible Reflectance: Center-of-glazing values, in accordance with NFRC 300.
2.3 GLASS PRODUCTS, GENERAL
A. Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass product manufacturers and organizations below unless more stringent requirements are indicated. See these publications for glazing terms not otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards.
1. NGA Publications: "Laminated Glazing Reference Manual" and "Glazing Manual."
2. AAMA Publications: AAMA GDSG-1, "Glass Design for Sloped Glazing," and AAMA TIR A7, "Sloped Glazing Guidelines."
3. IGMA Publication for Sloped Glazing: IGMA TB-3001, "Guidelines for Sloped Glazing."
4. IGMA Publication for Insulating Glass: SIGMA TM-3000, "North American Glazing Guidelines for Sealed Insulating Glass Units for Commercial and Residential Use." B. Safety Glazing Labeling: Where safety glazing is indicated, permanently mark glazing with certification label of the SGCC or another certification agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Label shall indicate manufacturer's name, type of glass, thickness, and safety glazing standard with which glass complies.
C. Insulating-Glass Certification Program: Permanently marked either on spacers or on at least one component lite of units with appropriate certification label of the IGCC.
D. Thickness: Where glass thickness is indicated, it is a minimum. Provide glass that complies with performance requirements and is not less than thickness indicated.
1. Minimum Glass Thickness for Exterior Lites: 6 mm.
2. Thickness of Tinted Glass: Provide same thickness for each tint color indicated throughout Project.
E. Strength: Where annealed float glass is indicated, provide annealed float glass, heatstrengthened float glass, or fully tempered float glass as needed to comply with "Performance Requirements" Article. Where heat-strengthened float glass is indicated, provide heatstrengthened float glass or fully tempered float glass as needed to comply with "Performance Requirements" Article. Where fully tempered float glass is indicated, provide fully tempered float glass.
2.4 GLASS PRODUCTS
A. Clear Annealed Float Glass: ASTM C1036, Type I, Class 1 (clear), Quality-Q3.
B. Fully Tempered Float Glass: ASTM C1048, Kind FT (fully tempered), Condition A (uncoated) unless otherwise indicated, Type I, Class 1 (clear) or Class 2 (tinted) as indicated, Quality-Q3. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Glazing
Renovation & Expansion Final Design 088000 - 7
100% Design Submittal
1. Fabrication Process: By horizontal (roller-hearth) process with roll-wave distortion parallel to bottom edge of glass as installed unless otherwise indicated.
C. Heat-Strengthened Float Glass: ASTM C1048, Kind HS (heat strengthened), Type I, Condition A (uncoated) unless otherwise indicated, Type I, Class 1 (clear) or Class 2 (tinted) as indicated, Quality-Q3.
1. Fabrication Process: By horizontal (roller-hearth) process with roll-wave distortion parallel to bottom edge of glass as installed unless otherwise indicated.
D. Silicone-Coated Spandrel Glass: ASTM C1048, Type I, Condition C, Quality-Q3.
2.5 LAMINATED GLASS
A. Laminated Glass: ASTM C1172. Use materials that have a proven record of no tendency to bubble, discolor, or lose physical and mechanical properties after fabrication and installation.
1. Construction: Laminate glass with polyvinyl butyral interlayer to comply with interlayer manufacturer's written instructions.
2. Interlayer Thickness: Provide thickness not less than that indicated and as needed to comply with requirements.
3. Interlayer Color: Clear unless otherwise indicated.
2.6 INSULATING GLASS
A. Insulating-Glass Units: Factory-assembled units consisting of sealed lites of glass separated by a dehydrated interspace, qualified in accordance with ASTM E2190.
1. Sealing System: Dual seal, with manufacturer's standard primary and secondary sealants.
2. Perimeter Spacer: Manufacturer's standard spacer material and construction. a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
1) Technoform Glass Insulation North America.
2) Thermix; a brand of Ensinger USA.
3. Desiccant: Molecular sieve or silica gel, or a blend of both.
2.7 GLAZING SEALANTS
A. General:
1. Compatibility: Compatible with one another and with other materials they contact, including glass products, seals of insulating-glass units, and glazing channel substrates, under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Glazing
Renovation & Expansion Final Design 088000 - 8
100% Design Submittal
2. Suitability: Comply with sealant and glass manufacturers' written instructions for selecting glazing sealants suitable for applications indicated and for conditions existing at time of installation.
3. Colors of Exposed Glazing Sealants: As selected by Engineer from manufacturer's full range of industry colors.
B. Neutral-Curing Silicone Glazing Sealant, Class 100/50: Complying with ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Use NT.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
a. Pecora Corporation.
b. Sika Corporation.
c. The Dow Chemical Company.
2.8 GLAZING TAPES
A. Back-Bedding Mastic Glazing Tapes: Preformed, butyl-based, 100 percent solids elastomeric tape; nonstaining and nonmigrating in contact with nonporous surfaces; with or without spacer rod as recommended in writing by tape and glass manufacturers for application indicated; and complying with ASTM C1281 and AAMA 800 for products indicated below:
1. AAMA 806.3 tape, for glazing applications in which tape is subject to continuous pressure.
B. Expanded Cellular Glazing Tapes: Closed-cell, PVC foam tapes; factory coated with adhesive on both surfaces; and complying with AAMA 800 for the following types:
1. AAMA 810.1, Type 1, for glazing applications in which tape acts as primary sealant.
2. AAMA 810.1, Type 2, for glazing applications in which tape is used in combination with a full bead of liquid sealant.
2.9 MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS
A. General: Provide products of material, size, and shape complying with referenced glazing standard, recommended in writing by manufacturers of glass and other glazing materials for application indicated, and with a proven record of compatibility with surfaces contacted in installation.
B. Cleaners, Primers, and Sealers: Types recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer.
C. Setting Blocks:
1. Neoprene with Shore A durometer hardness of 85, plus or minus 5.
2. Type recommended in writing by sealant or glass manufacturer. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Glazing
Renovation & Expansion Final Design 088000 - 9
100% Design Submittal
D. Spacers:
1. Neoprene blocks or continuous extrusions of hardness required by glass manufacturer to maintain glass lites in place for installation indicated.
2. Type recommended in writing by sealant or glass manufacturer.
E. Edge Blocks:
1. Neoprene with Shore A durometer hardness per manufacturer's written instructions.
2. Type recommended in writing by sealant or glass manufacturer.
F. Cylindrical Glazing Sealant Backing: ASTM C1330, Type O (open-cell material), of size and density to control glazing sealant depth and otherwise produce optimum glazing sealant performance.
2.10 FABRICATION OF GLAZING UNITS
A. Fabricate glazing units in sizes required to fit openings indicated for Project, with edge and face clearances, edge and surface conditions, and bite complying with written instructions of product manufacturer and referenced glazing publications, to comply with system performance requirements.
1. Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes acting on glass framing members and glazing components.
a. Temperature Change: 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces.
B. Clean-cut or flat-grind vertical edges of butt-glazed monolithic lites to produce square edges with slight chamfers at junctions of edges and faces.
C. Grind smooth and polish exposed glass edges and corners.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine framing, glazing channels, and stops, with Installer present, for compliance with the following:
1. Manufacturing and installation tolerances, including those for size, squareness, and offsets at corners.
2. Presence and functioning of weep systems.
3. Minimum required face and edge clearances.
4. Effective sealing between joints of glass-framing members.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Glazing
Renovation & Expansion Final Design 088000 - 10
100% Design Submittal
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Clean glazing channels and other framing members receiving glass immediately before glazing.
Remove coatings not firmly bonded to substrates.
B. Examine glazing units to locate exterior and interior surfaces. Label or mark units as needed so that exterior and interior surfaces are readily identifiable. Do not use materials that leave visible marks in the completed Work.
3.3 GLAZING, GENERAL
A. Comply with combined written instructions of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets, and other glazing materials, unless more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in referenced glazing publications.
B. Protect glass edges from damage during handling and installation. Remove damaged glass from Project site and legally dispose of off Project site. Damaged glass includes glass with edge damage or other imperfections that, when installed, could weaken glass, impair performance, or impair appearance.
C. Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants, as determined by preconstruction testing.
D. Install setting blocks in sill rabbets, sized and located to comply with referenced glazing publications, unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer. Set blocks in thin course of compatible sealant suitable for heel bead.
E. Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass lites.
F. Provide spacers for glass lites where length plus width is larger than 50 inches.
1. Locate spacers directly opposite each other on both inside and outside faces of glass.
Install correct size and spacing to preserve required face clearances, unless gaskets and glazing tapes are used that have demonstrated ability to maintain required face clearances and to comply with system performance requirements.
2. Provide 1/8-inch- minimum bite of spacers on glass and use thickness equal to sealant width. With glazing tape, use thickness slightly less than final compressed thickness of tape.
G. Provide edge blocking where indicated or needed to prevent glass lites from moving sideways in glazing channel, as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer and in accordance with requirements in referenced glazing publications.
H. Set glass lites in each series with uniform pattern, draw, bow, and similar characteristics.
I. Set glass lites with proper orientation so that coatings face exterior or interior as specified.
J. Where wedge-shaped gaskets are driven into one side of channel to pressurize sealant or gasket on opposite side, provide adequate anchorage so gasket cannot walk out when installation is subjected to movement.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Glazing
Renovation & Expansion Final Design 088000 - 11
100% Design Submittal
K. Square cut wedge-shaped gaskets at corners and install gaskets in a manner recommended by gasket manufacturer to prevent corners from pulling away; seal corner joints and butt joints with sealant recommended in writing by gasket manufacturer.
3.4 TAPE GLAZING
A. Position tapes on fixed stops so that, when compressed by glass, their exposed edges are flush with or protrude slightly above sightline of stops.
B. Install tapes continuously, but not necessarily in one continuous length. Do not stretch tapes to make them fit opening.
C. Cover vertical framing joints by applying tapes to heads and sills first, then to jambs. Cover horizontal framing joints by applying tapes to jambs, then to heads and sills.
D. Place joints in tapes at corners of opening with adjoining lengths butted together, not lapped.
Seal joints in tapes with compatible sealant approved by tape manufacturer.
E. Do not remove release paper from tape until right before each glazing unit is installed.
F. Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against tape by inserting dense compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops.
Start gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of openings.
G. Apply cap bead of elastomeric sealant over exposed edge of tape.
3.5 GASKET GLAZING (DRY)
A. Cut compression gaskets to lengths recommended by gasket manufacturer to fit openings exactly, with allowance for stretch during installation.
B. Insert soft compression gasket between glass and frame or fixed stop so it is securely in place with joints miter cut and bonded together at corners.
C. Installation with Drive-in Wedge Gaskets: Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against soft compression gasket by inserting dense compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops. Start gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of openings. Compress gaskets to produce a weathertight seal without developing bending stresses in glass. Seal gasket joints with sealant recommended in writing by gasket manufacturer.
D. Installation with Pressure-Glazing Stops: Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against soft compression gasket. Install dense compression gaskets and pressureglazing stops, applying pressure uniformly to compression gaskets. Compress gaskets to produce a weathertight seal without developing bending stresses in glass. Seal gasket joints with sealant recommended in writing by gasket manufacturer.
E. Install gaskets so they protrude past face of glazing stops. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Glazing
Renovation & Expansion Final Design 088000 - 12
100% Design Submittal
3.6 SEALANT GLAZING (WET)
A. Install continuous spacers, or spacers combined with cylindrical sealant backing, between glass lites and glazing stops to maintain glass face clearances and to prevent sealant from extruding into glass channel and blocking weep systems until sealants cure. Secure spacers or spacers and backings in place and in position to control depth of installed sealant relative to edge clearance for optimum sealant performance.
B. Force sealants into glazing channels to eliminate voids and to ensure complete wetting or bond of sealant to glass and channel surfaces.
C. Tool exposed surfaces of sealants to provide a substantial wash away from glass.
3.7 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Immediately after installation, remove nonpermanent labels and clean surfaces.
B. Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations. Examine glass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior concrete and other masonry surfaces at frequent intervals during construction, but not less than once a month, for buildup of dirt, scum, alkaline deposits, or stains.
1. If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do contact with glass, remove substances immediately as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer. Remove and replace glass that cannot be cleaned without damage to coatings.
C. Remove and replace glass that is damaged during construction period.
D. Wash glass on both exposed surfaces not more than four days before date scheduled for inspections that establish date of Substantial Completion. Wash glass as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer.
3.8 MONOLITHIC GLASS SCHEDULE
A. Ultraclear Glass Type: Fully tempered float glass.
1. Basis-of-Design Product: Vitro Architectural Glass; Starphire.
2. Minimum Thickness: 6 mm.
3. Safety glazing required.
B. Silicone-coated, spandrel tempered float glass (SMG).
1. Basis-of-Design Product: Vitro Architectural Glass; Starphire.
2. Minimum Thickness: 6 mm.
3. Safety glazing required.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Glazing
Renovation & Expansion Final Design 088000 - 13
100% Design Submittal
3.9 LAMINATED GLASS SCHEDULE
A. Tinted Laminated Glass Type: Two plies of heat-strengthened float glass.
1. Basis-of-Design Product: Vitro Architectural Glass; Starphire Solar Control Laminated Glass.
2. Conformance: ASTM C1172 and complying with testing requirements.
3. Outboard Lite: Starphire float glass as manufactured by Vitro Architectural Glass. a. Conformance: ASTM C1036, Type I, Class 1, Quality q3. b. Thickness: 6 mm (1/4").
c. Heat-Treatment: Heat-strengthened, ASTM C1048, Kind HS.
4. Interlayer:
a. Type: PVB.
b. Thickness: 0.060".
c. Color: Clear.
5. Inboard Lite: Solargray tinted float glass as manufactured by Vitro Architectural Glass. a. Conformance: ASTM C1036, Type I, Class 2, Quality q3. b. Thickness: 6 mm (1/4").
c. Heat-Treatment: Heat-strengthened, ASTM C1048, Kind HS. d. Magnetic Sputter Vacuum Deposition Coating (MSVD): ASTM C1376. e. Coating: Solarban 70 on Surface #2.
6. Winter Nighttime U-Factor: 0.95 maximum.
7. Summer Daytime U-Factor: 0.86 maximum.
8. Visible Light Transmittance: 30 percent minimum.
9. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: 0.25 maximum.
10. Outdoor Visible Light Reflectance: 15 percent maximum.
3.10 INSULATING GLASS SCHEDULE
A. Glass Type (ITG): Double Glazed Clear Insulating Glass Unit, Low-E.
1. Basis-of-Design Product: Vitro Architectural Glass; Solarcoat Low-E on Clear 6 mm (2) | Air 1/2" (12.7 mm) | Solarcoat Low-E on Clear 6 mm (3).
2. Conformance: ASTM E 2190.
3. Outdoor Lite: Clear float glass as manufactured by Vitro Architectural Glass. a. Conformance: ASTM C1036, Type 1, Class 1, Quality q3. b. Glass Thickness: 6 mm (1/4").
c. Pyrolytic deposition coating: ASTM C1376.
d. Coating: Solarcoat Low-E on Surface #3.
e. Heat-Treatment: Tempered; ASTM C1048, Kind FT; Safety Glazing meets ANSI Z97.1 and CPSC 16CFR-1201.
4. Interspace Content: Air 1/2".
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Glazing
Renovation & Expansion Final Design 088000 - 14
100% Design Submittal
5. Indoor Lite: Clear float glass as manufactured by Vitro Architectural Glass. a. Conformance: ASTM C1036, Type 1, Class 1, Quality q3. b. Glass Thickness: 6 mm (1/4").
c. Pyrolytic deposition coating: ASTM C1376.
d. Coating: Solarcoat Low-E on Surface #3.
e. Heat-Treatment: Tempered; ASTM C1048, Kind FT; Safety Glazing meets ANSI Z97.1 and CPSC 16CFR-1201.
6. Performance Requirements:
a. Visible Light Transmittance: 68 percent minimum.
b. Winter Nighttime U-Factor: 0.31 maximum.
c. Summer daytime U-Factor: 0.30 maximum.
d. Shading Coefficient: 0.70 maximum.
e. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: 0.61 maximum.
f. Outdoor Visible Light Reflectance: 17 percent maximum.
END OF SECTION 088000
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Fixed Louvers
Renovation & Expansion Final Design 089119 - 1
100% Design Submittal
SECTION 089119 - FIXED LOUVERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Fixed extruded-aluminum louvers.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 042200 " Concrete Unit Masonry" for louvers in masonry wall.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Louver Terminology: Definitions of terms for metal louvers contained in AMCA 501 apply to this Section unless otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards.
B. Horizontal Louver: Louver with horizontal blades (i.e., the axis of the blades are horizontal).
C. Drainable-Blade Louver: Louver with blades having gutters that collect water and drain it to channels in jambs and mullions, which carry it to bottom of unit and away from opening.
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
1. For louvers specified to bear AMCA seal, include printed catalog pages showing specified models with appropriate AMCA Certified Ratings Seals.
B. Shop Drawings: For louvers and accessories. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. Show frame profiles and blade profiles, angles, and spacing.
1. Show weep paths, gaskets, flashings, sealants, and other means of preventing water intrusion.
2. Show mullion profiles and locations.
C. Samples: For each type of metal finish required.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Fixed Louvers
Renovation & Expansion Final Design 089119 - 2
100% Design Submittal
1.5 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Verify actual dimensions of openings by field measurements before fabrication.
1.6 WARRANTY
A. Special Finish Warranty, Factory-Applied Finishes: Standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair finishes or replace aluminum that shows evidence of deterioration of baked enamel, powder coat, or organic finishes within specified warranty period.
1. Deterioration includes, but is not limited to, the following:
a. Color fading more than 5 Delta E units when tested in accordance with ASTM D2244.
b. Chalking in excess of a No. 8 rating when tested in accordance with ASTM D4214.
c. Cracking, checking, peeling, or failure of paint to adhere to bare metal.
2. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Source Limitations: Obtain fixed louvers from single source from a single manufacturer where indicated to be of same type, design, or factory-applied color finish.
2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Louver Performance Ratings: Provide louvers complying with requirements specified, as demonstrated by testing manufacturer's stock units identical to those provided, except for length and width in accordance with AMCA 500-L.
B. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes.
1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces.
C. SMACNA Standard: Comply with recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" for fabrication, construction details, and installation procedures.
2.3 FIXED EXTRUDED-ALUMINUM LOUVERS
A. Horizontal Drainable-Blade Louver, Extruded Aluminum:
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Fixed Louvers
Renovation & Expansion Final Design 089119 - 3
100% Design Submittal
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
a. All-Lite Architectural Products.
b. Greenheck Fan Corporation.
c. Pottorff.
d. Ruskin; Air Distribution Technologies, Inc.; Johnson Controls, Inc. e. United Enertech Corp.
2. Louver Depth: As indicated on the louver schedule.
3. Mullion Type: Exposed.
4. AMCA Seal: Mark units with AMCA Certified Ratings Seal.
2.4 LOUVER SCREENS
A. General: Provide screen at louvers indicated.
1. Screen Location for Fixed Louvers: As indicated on the louver schedule.
2. Screening Type: Bird screening, except where insect screening is indicated.
B. Secure screen frames to louver frames with machine screws with heads finished to match louver, spaced a maximum of 6 inches from each corner and at 12 inches o.c.
C. Louver Screen Frames: Fabricate with mitered corners to louver sizes indicated.
1. Metal: Same type and form of metal as indicated for louver to which screens are attached. Reinforce extruded-aluminum screen frames at corners with clips.
2. Finish: Same finish as louver frames to which louver screens are attached.
3. Type: Rewirable frames with a driven spline or insert.
2.5 MATERIALS
A. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B221, Alloy 6063-T5, T-52, or T6.
B. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B209, Alloy 3003 or 5005, with temper as required for forming, or as otherwise recommended by metal producer for required finish.
C. Fasteners: Use types and sizes to suit unit installation conditions.
1. Use tamper-resistant screws for exposed fasteners unless otherwise indicated.
2. For fastening aluminum, use aluminum or 300 series stainless steel fasteners.
3. For fastening galvanized steel, use hot-dip-galvanized-steel or 300 series stainless steel fasteners.
4. For fastening stainless steel, use 300 series stainless steel fasteners.
5. For color-finished louvers, use fasteners with heads that match color of louvers.
D. Post Installed Fasteners for Concrete and Masonry: Torque-controlled expansion anchors, fabricated from stainless steel components, with allowable load or strength design capacities calculated in accordance with ICC-ES AC193 and ACI 318 greater than or equal to the design ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Fixed Louvers
Renovation & Expansion Final Design 089119 - 4
100% Design Submittal
load, as determined by testing in accordance with ASTM E488/E488M conducted by a qualified testing agency.
E. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D1187/D1187M.
2.6 FABRICATION
A. Factory assemble louvers to minimize field splicing and assembly. Disassemble units as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation.
B. Maintain equal louver blade spacing, including separation between blades and frames at head and sill, to produce uniform appearance.
C. Fabricate frames, including integral sills, to fit in openings of sizes indicated, with allowances made for fabrication and installation tolerances, adjoining material tolerances, and perimeter sealant joints.
1. Frame Type: Channel unless otherwise indicated.
D. Include supports, anchorages, and accessories required for complete assembly.
E. Provide vertical mullions of type and at spacings indicated, but not more than is recommended by manufacturer, or 72 inches o.c., whichever is less.
1. Fully Recessed Mullions: Where indicated, provide mullions fully recessed behind louver blades. Where length of louver exceeds fabrication and handling limitations, fabricate with close-fitting blade splices designed to permit expansion and contraction.
2. Semirecessed Mullions: Where indicated, provide mullions partly recessed behind louver blades, so louver blades appear continuous. Where length of louver exceeds fabrication and handling limitations, fabricate with interlocking split mullions and close-fitting blade splices designed to permit expansion and contraction.
3. Exposed Mullions: Where indicated, provide units with exposed mullions of same width and depth as louver frame. Where length of louver exceeds fabrication and handling limitations, provide interlocking split mullions designed to permit expansion and contraction.
4. Exterior Corners: Prefabricated corner units with mitered and welded blades and with fully recessed mullions at corners.
F. Provide subsills made of same material as louvers or extended sills for recessed louvers.
G. Join frame members to each other and to fixed louver blades with fillet welds concealed from view unless otherwise indicated or size of louver assembly makes bolted connections between frame members necessary.
2.7 ALUMINUM FINISHES
A. Finish louvers after assembly.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Fixed Louvers
Renovation & Expansion Final Design 089119 - 5
100% Design Submittal
B. High-Performance Organic Finish, Two-Coat PVDF: Fluoropolymer finish complying with AAMA 2605 and containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in color coat.
1. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions.
2. Color and Gloss: As selected by Engineer from manufacturer's full range.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and openings, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Coordinate setting drawings, diagrams, templates, instructions, and directions for installation of anchorages that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry construction. Coordinate delivery of such items to Project site.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Locate and place louvers level, plumb, and at indicated alignment with adjacent work.
B. Use concealed anchorages where possible. Provide brass or lead washers fitted to screws where required to protect metal surfaces and to make a weathertight connection.
C. Form closely fitted joints with exposed connections accurately located and secured.
D. Provide perimeter reveals and openings of uniform width for sealants and joint fillers, as indicated.
E. Protect unpainted galvanized- and nonferrous-metal surfaces that are in contact with concrete, masonry, or dissimilar metals from corrosion and galvanic action by applying a heavy coating of bituminous paint or by separating surfaces with waterproof gaskets or nonmetallic flashing.
F. Install concealed gaskets, flashings, joint fillers, and insulation as louver installation progresses, where weathertight louver joints are required. Comply with Section 079200 "Joint Sealants" for sealants applied during louver installation.
3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Clean exposed louver surfaces that are not protected by temporary covering, to remove fingerprints and soil during construction period. Do not let soil accumulate during construction period.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Fixed Louvers
Renovation & Expansion Final Design 089119 - 6
100% Design Submittal
B. Before final inspection, clean exposed surfaces with water and a mild soap or detergent not harmful to finishes. Thoroughly rinse surfaces and dry.
C. Restore louvers damaged during installation and construction, so no evidence remains of corrective work. If results of restoration are unsuccessful, as determined by Engineer, remove damaged units and replace with new units.
1. Touch up minor abrasions in finishes with air-dried coating that matches color and gloss of, and is compatible with, factory-applied finish coating.
END OF SECTION 089119
Division 09
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Non-Structural Metal Framing Renovation & Expansion Final Design 092216 - 1
100% Design Submittal
SECTION 092216 - NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Framing systems.
2. Suspension systems.
B. Iron and steel products supplied under this section must comply with the American Iron and Steel provisions of the Contract.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data:
1. Framing systems.
2. Suspension systems.
3. Grid suspension systems.
B. American Iron and Steel (AIS): Submit certification indicating compliance with AIS requirements for all metal products
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Product Certificates: For each type of code-compliance certification for studs and tracks.
B. Evaluation Reports: For steel studs and runners firestop tracks, from ICC-ES or other qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Code-Compliance Certification of Studs and Tracks: Provide documentation that framing members are certified according to the product-certification program of the Steel Framing Industry Association or the Steel Stud Manufacturers Association . ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Non-Structural Metal Framing Renovation & Expansion Final Design 092216 - 2
100% Design Submittal
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver materials in manufacturer's original, unopened, undamaged containers with identification labels intact.
B. Protect cold-formed metal framing from corrosion, deformation, and other damage during delivery, storage, and handling as required by AISI S202, "Code of Standard Practice for ColdFormed Steel Structural Framing." PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies that incorporate nonload-bearing steel framing, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated, in accordance with ASTM E119 by an independent testing agency.
B. STC-Rated Assemblies: For STC-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated on Drawings, in accordance with ASTM E90 and classified in accordance with ASTM E413 by an independent testing agency.
C. Horizontal Deflection: For wall assemblies, limited to 1/240 of the wall height based on horizontal loading of 10 lbf/sq. ft.
D. Design framing systems in accordance with AISI S220, "North American Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Framing - Nonstructural Members," unless otherwise indicated.
2.2 FRAMING SYSTEMS
A. Framing Members, General: Comply with ASTM C754 for conditions indicated.
1. Steel Sheet Components: Comply with ASTM C645 requirements for metal unless otherwise indicated
2. Protective Coating: Comply with; ASTM A653/A653M, G40;. Galvannealed products are unacceptable.
a. Coating demonstrates equivalent corrosion resistance with an evaluation report acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Studs and Track: ASTM C645 Use either conventional steel studs and tracks or embossed, highstrength steel studs and tracks.
1. Manufacturer: CEMCO; California Expanded Metal Products Co.
2. Minimum Base-Steel Thickness: As required by performance requirements for horizontal deflection 0.0329 inch.
3. Depth: As indicated on Drawings.
C. High-Strength Steel Studs and Tracks: Roll-formed with surface deformations to stiffen the framing members.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Non-Structural Metal Framing Renovation & Expansion Final Design 092216 - 3
100% Design Submittal
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
a. CEMCO; California Expanded Metal Products Co.
b. ClarkDietrich.
c. SCAFCO Steel Stud Company.
2. Minimum Base-Steel Thickness: As required by horizontal deflection performance requirements.
3. Depth: As indicated on Drawings.
D. Slip-Type Head Joints: Where indicated, provide one of the following:
1. Single Long-Leg Track System: Top track with 2-inch- deep flanges in thickness not less than indicated for studs, installed with studs friction fit into top track and with continuous bridging located within 12 inches of the top of studs to provide lateral bracing.
2. Deflection Track: Steel sheet top track manufactured to prevent cracking of finishes applied to interior partition framing resulting from deflection of structure above; in thickness not less than indicated for studs and in width to accommodate depth of studs. a. Manufacturer: CEMCO; California Expanded Metal Products Co.
E. Firestop Tracks: Top track manufactured to allow partition heads to expand and contract with movement of structure while maintaining continuity of fire-resistance-rated assembly indicated; in thickness not less than indicated for studs and in width to accommodate depth of studs.
1. Manufacturer: CEMCO, California Expanded Metal Products Co.
F. Flat Strap and Backing Plate: Steel sheet for blocking and bracing in length and width indicated.
1. Manufacturers: MRI Steel Framing, LLC or equal.
2. Minimum Base-Steel Thickness: 0.0269 inch.
G. Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C645.
1. Manufacturers: MRI Steel Framing, LLC or equal.
2. Minimum Base-Steel Thickness: 0.0296 inch.
3. Depth: 7/8 inch.
H. Resilient Furring Channels: 1/2-inch- deep, steel sheet members designed to reduce sound transmission.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following:
a. MRI Steel Framing, LLC.
2. Configuration: Asymmetrical or hat shaped.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Non-Structural Metal Framing Renovation & Expansion Final Design 092216 - 4
100% Design Submittal
2.3 SUSPENSION SYSTEMS
A. Tie Wire: ASTM A641/A641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.062-inch- diameter wire, or double strand of 0.048-inch- diameter wire.
B. Hanger Attachments to Concrete:
1. Post-Installed Anchors: Fastener systems with an evaluation report acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, based on ICC-ES AC193 and ACI318 greater than or equal to design load, as determined by testing per ASTM E 448/E 488M conducted by a qualified testing agency.
C. Wire Hangers: ASTM A641/A641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.16 inch in diameter.
D. Carrying Channels (Main Runners): Cold-rolled, commercial-steel sheet with a base-steel thickness of 0.0538 inch and minimum 1/2-inch- wide flanges.
1. Depth: 2 inches.
E. Furring Channels (Furring Members):
1. Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: 7/8 inch deep.
a. Minimum Base-Steel Thickness: 0.0296 inch.
2.4 AUXILIARY MATERIALS
A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards.
1. Fasteners for Steel Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding power, and other properties required to fasten steel members to substrates.
B. Isolation Strip at Exterior Walls: Provide one of the following:
1. Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt: ASTM D226/D226M, Type I (No. 15 asphalt felt), nonperforated.
2. Foam Gasket: Adhesive-backed, closed-cell vinyl foam strips that allow fastener penetration without foam displacement, 1/8 inch thick, in width to suit steel stud size.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and substrates, with Installer present, and including welded hollow-metal frames, cast-in anchors, and structural framing, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Non-Structural Metal Framing Renovation & Expansion Final Design 092216 - 5
100% Design Submittal
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Suspended Assemblies: Coordinate installation of suspension systems with installation of overhead structure to ensure that inserts and other provisions for anchorages to building structure have been installed to receive hangers at spacing required to support the Work and that hangers will develop their full strength.
1. Furnish concrete inserts and other devices indicated to other trades for installation in advance of time needed for coordination and construction.
3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Installation Standard: ASTM C754.
1. Gypsum Board Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C840 that apply to framing installation.
B. Install framing and accessories plumb, square, and true to line, with connections securely fastened.
C. Install supplementary framing, and blocking to support fixtures, equipment services, heavy trim, grab bars, toilet accessories, furnishings, or similar construction.
D. Install bracing at terminations in assemblies.
E. Do not bridge building control and expansion joints with non-load-bearing steel framing members. Frame both sides of joints independently.
3.4 INSTALLATION OF FRAMING SYSTEMS
A. Install framing system components according to spacings indicated, but not greater than spacings required by referenced installation standards for assembly types.
B. Where studs are installed directly against exterior masonry walls or dissimilar metals at exterior walls, install isolation strip between studs and exterior wall.
C. Install studs so flanges within framing system point in same direction.
D. Install tracks at floors and overhead supports. Extend framing full height to structural supports or substrates above suspended ceilings except where partitions are indicated to terminate at suspended ceilings. Continue framing around ducts that penetrate partitions above ceiling.
1. Slip-Type Head Joints: Where framing extends to overhead structural supports, install to produce joints at tops of framing systems that prevent axial loading of finished assemblies.
2. Door Openings: Screw vertical studs at jambs to jamb anchor clips on door frames; install track section (for cripple studs) at head and secure to jamb studs. a. Install two studs at each jamb unless otherwise indicated. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Non-Structural Metal Framing Renovation & Expansion Final Design 092216 - 6
100% Design Submittal
b. Install cripple studs at head adjacent to each jamb stud, with a minimum 1/2-inch clearance from jamb stud to allow for installation of control joint in finished assembly.
c. Extend jamb studs through suspended ceilings and attach to underside of overhead structure.
3. Other Framed Openings: Frame openings other than door openings the same as required for door openings unless otherwise indicated. Install framing below sills of openings to match framing required above door heads.
4. Fire-Resistance-Rated Partitions: Install framing to comply with fire-resistance-rated assembly indicated and support closures and to make partitions continuous from floor to underside of solid structure.
a. Firestop Track: Where indicated, install to maintain continuity of fire-resistancerated assembly indicated.
5. Sound-Rated Partitions: Install framing to comply with sound-rated assembly indicated.
E. Direct Furring:
1. Screw to wood framing.
2. Attach to concrete or masonry with stub nails, screws designed for masonry attachment, or powder-driven fasteners spaced 24 inches o.c.
F. Installation Tolerance: Install each framing member so fastening surfaces vary not more than 1/8 inch from the plane formed by faces of adjacent framing.
3.5 INSTALLATION OF SUSPENSION SYSTEMS
A. Install suspension system components according to spacings indicated, but not greater than spacings required by referenced installation standards for assembly types.
1. Hangers: 48 inches o.c.
2. Carrying Channels (Main Runners): 48 inches o.c.
3. Furring Channels (Furring Members): 16 inches o.c.
B. Isolate suspension systems from building structure where they abut or are penetrated by building structure to prevent transfer of loading imposed by structural movement.
C. Suspend hangers from building structure as follows:
1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structural or suspension system. a. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions and offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means.
2. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that interfere with locations of hangers required to support standard suspension ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Non-Structural Metal Framing Renovation & Expansion Final Design 092216 - 7
100% Design Submittal
system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in the form of trapezes or equivalent devices.
a. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within performance limits established by referenced installation standards.
3. Wire Hangers: Secure by looping and wire tying, either directly to structures or to inserts, eye screws, or other devices and fasteners that are secure and appropriate for substrate, and in a manner that will not cause hangers to deteriorate or otherwise fail.
4. Flat Hangers: Secure to structure, including intermediate framing members, by attaching to inserts, eye screws, or other devices and fasteners that are secure and appropriate for structure and hanger, and in a manner that will not cause hangers to deteriorate or otherwise fail.
5. Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck.
6. Do not attach hangers to permanent metal forms. Furnish cast-in-place hanger inserts that extend through forms.
7. Do not attach hangers to rolled-in hanger tabs of composite steel floor deck.
8. Do not connect or suspend steel framing from ducts, pipes, or conduit.
3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Installation Tolerances: Install suspension systems that are level to within 1/8 inch in 12 feet measured lengthwise on each member that will receive finishes and transversely between parallel members that will receive finishes.
END OF SECTION 092216
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Non-Structural Metal Framing Renovation & Expansion Final Design 092216 - 8
100% Design Submittal
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Gypsum Board
Renovation & Expansion Final Design 092900 - 1
100% Design Submittal
SECTION 092900 - GYPSUM BOARD
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Interior gypsum board.
2. Tile backing panels.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 092216 "Non-Structural Metal Framing" for non-structural steel framing and suspension systems that support gypsum board panels.
2. Section 093013 "Ceramic Tiling" for tile backer units installed as substrates for ceramic tile.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For the following:
1. Gypsum wallboard.
2. Gypsum board, Type X.
3. Gypsum ceiling board.
4. Impact-resistant gypsum board.
5. Mold-resistant gypsum board.
6. Glass-mat, water-resistant backing board.
7. Interior trim.
8. Aluminum trim.
9. Joint treatment materials.
10. Sound-attenuation blankets.
11. Acoustical sealant.
B. Samples: For the following products:
1. Trim Accessories: Full-size Sample in 12-inch- long length for each trim accessory indicated.
C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of trim accessory indicated. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Gypsum Board
Renovation & Expansion Final Design 092900 - 2
100% Design Submittal
D. Samples for Verification: For the following products:
1. Trim Accessories: Full-size Sample in 12-inch- long length for each trim accessory indicated.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Mockups: Build mockups of at least 100 sq. ft. in surface area to demonstrate aesthetic effects and to set quality standards for materials and execution.
1. Build mockups for the following:
a. Each level of gypsum board finish indicated for use in exposed locations. b. Each texture finish indicated.
2. Apply or install final decoration indicated, including painting and wallcoverings, on exposed surfaces for review of mockups.
3. Simulate finished lighting conditions for review of mockups.
4. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction traffic, and other potential causes of damage. Stack panels flat and supported on risers on a flat platform to prevent sagging.
1.6 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with ASTM C840 requirements or gypsum board manufacturer's written instructions, whichever are more stringent.
B. Do not install paper-faced gypsum panels until installation areas are enclosed and conditioned.
C. Do not install panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.
1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape.
2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Gypsum Board
Renovation & Expansion Final Design 092900 - 3
100% Design Submittal
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E119 by an independent testing agency.
B. STC-Rated Assemblies: For STC-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E90 and classified according to ASTM E413 by an independent testing agency.
2.2 GYPSUM BOARD, GENERAL
A. Size: Provide maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in each area and that correspond with support system indicated.
2.3 INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD
A. Gypsum Wallboard: ASTM C1396/C1396M.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
a. CertainTeed; SAINT-GOBAIN.
b. Gold Bond Building Products, LLC provided by National Gypsum Company. c. USG Corporation.
2. Thickness: 5/8 inch.
3. Long Edges: Tapered.
B. Gypsum Board, Type X: ASTM C1396/C1396M.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
a. CertainTeed; SAINT-GOBAIN.
b. Gold Bond Building Products, LLC provided by National Gypsum Company. c. USG Corporation.
2. Thickness: 5/8 inch.
3. Long Edges: Tapered.
C. Gypsum Ceiling Board: ASTM C1396/C1396M.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
a. CertainTeed; SAINT-GOBAIN.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Gypsum Board
Renovation & Expansion Final Design 092900 - 4
100% Design Submittal
b. Gold Bond Building Products, LLC provided by National Gypsum Company. c. USG Corporation.
2. Thickness: 1/2 inch.
3. Long Edges: Tapered.
D. Impact-Resistant Gypsum Board: ASTM C1396/C1396M gypsum board, tested according to ASTM C1629/C1629M.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
a. CertainTeed; SAINT-GOBAIN.
b. Gold Bond Building Products, LLC provided by National Gypsum Company. c. USG Corporation.
2. Core: 5/8 inch, Type X.
3. Surface Abrasion: ASTM C1629/C1629M, meets or exceeds Level 3 requirements.
4. Indentation: ASTM C1629/C1629M, meets or exceeds Level 3 requirements.
5. Soft-Body Impact: ASTM C1629/C1629M, meets or exceeds Level 3 requirements.
6. Hard-Body Impact: ASTM C1629/C1629M, meets or exceeds Level 3 requirements according to test in Annex A1.
7. Long Edges: Tapered.
8. Mold Resistance: ASTM D3273, score of 10 as rated according to ASTM D3274.
E. Mold-Resistant Gypsum Board: ASTM C1396/C1396M. With moisture- and mold-resistant core and paper surfaces. Use at exposed to view surfaces inside restrooms and locker rooms.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
a. CertainTeed; SAINT-GOBAIN.
b. Gold Bond Building Products, LLC provided by National Gypsum Company. c. USG Corporation.
2. Core: 1/2 inch, for ceiling 5/8 inch, Type X for walls.
3. Long Edges: Tapered.
4. Mold Resistance: ASTM D3273, score of 10 as rated according to ASTM D3274.
2.4 TILE BACKING PANELS
A. Glass-Mat, Water-Resistant Backing Board: ASTM C1178/C1178M, with manufacturer's standard edges.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
a. CertainTeed; SAINT-GOBAIN.
b. Gold Bond Building Products, LLC provided by National Gypsum Company. c. USG Corporation.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Gypsum Board
Renovation & Expansion Final Design 092900 - 5
100% Design Submittal
2. Core: 5/8 inch, Type X.
3. Mold Resistance: ASTM D3273, score of 10 as rated according to ASTM D3274.
2.5 TRIM ACCESSORIES
A. Interior Trim: ASTM C1047.
1. Material: Galvanized or aluminum-coated steel sheet.
2. Shapes:
a. Cornerbead.
b. Bullnose bead.
c. LC-Bead: J-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound. d. L-Bead: L-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound. e. U-Bead: J-shaped; exposed short flange does not receive joint compound. f. Expansion (control) joint.
g. Curved-Edge Cornerbead: With notched or flexible flanges.
B. Aluminum Trim: Extruded accessories of profiles and dimensions indicated.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
a. Fry Reglet Corporation.
b. Gordon, Inc.
c. Pittcon Industries.
2. Aluminum: Alloy and temper with not less than the strength and durability properties of ASTM B221, Alloy 6063-T5.
3. Finish: Corrosion-resistant primer compatible with joint compound and finish materials specified.
2.6 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS
A. General: Comply with ASTM C475/C475M.
B. Joint Tape:
1. Interior Gypsum Board: Paper.
2. Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board: 10-by-10 glass mesh.
3. Tile Backing Panels: As recommended by panel manufacturer.
C. Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Board: For each coat, use formulation that is compatible with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats.
1. Prefilling: At open joints, rounded or beveled panel edges, and damaged surface areas, use setting-type taping compound.
2. Embedding and First Coat: For embedding tape and first coat on joints, fasteners, and trim flanges, use setting-type taping compound.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Gypsum Board
Renovation & Expansion Final Design 092900 - 6
100% Design Submittal
a. Use setting-type compound for installing paper-faced metal trim accessories.
3. Fill Coat: For second coat, use drying-type, all-purpose compound.
4. Finish Coat: For third coat, use drying-type, all-purpose compound.
5. Skim Coat: For final coat of Level 5 finish, use high-build interior coating product designed for application by airless sprayer and to be used instead of skim coat to produce Level 5 finish.
D. Joint Compound for Tile Backing Panels:
1. Glass-Mat, Water-Resistant Backing Panel: As recommended by backing panel manufacturer.
2.7 AUXILIARY MATERIALS
A. Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards and manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Laminating Adhesive: Adhesive or joint compound recommended for directly adhering gypsum panels to continuous substrate.
C. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C1002 unless otherwise indicated.
1. Use screws complying with ASTM C954 for fastening panels to steel members from
0.033 to 0.112 inch thick.
2. For fastening cementitious backer units, use screws of type and size recommended by panel manufacturer.
D. Sound-Attenuation Blankets: ASTM C665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing) produced by combining thermosetting resins with mineral fibers manufactured from glass, slag wool, or rock wool.
1. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Comply with mineral-fiber requirements of assembly.
E. Acoustical Sealant: Manufacturer's standard nonsag, paintable, nonstaining latex sealant complying with ASTM C 834. Product effectively reduces airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies according to ASTM E 90.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
a. Hilti, Inc.
b. Pecora Corporation.
c. United States Gypsum Company.
F. Thermal Insulation: As specified in Section 072100 "Thermal Insulation." ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Gypsum Board
Renovation & Expansion Final Design 092900 - 7
100% Design Submittal
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and substrates including welded hollow-metal frames and support framing, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B. Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION AND FINISHING OF PANELS, GENERAL
A. Comply with ASTM C840.
B. Install ceiling panels across framing to minimize the number of abutting end joints and to avoid abutting end joints in central area of each ceiling. Stagger abutting end joints of adjacent panels not less than one framing member.
C. Install panels with face side out. Butt panels together for a light contact at edges and ends with not more than 1/16 inch of open space between panels. Do not force into place.
D. Locate edge and end joints over supports, except in ceiling applications where intermediate supports or gypsum board back-blocking is provided behind end joints. Do not place tapered edges against cut edges or ends. Stagger vertical joints on opposite sides of partitions. Do not make joints other than control joints at corners of framed openings.
E. Form control and expansion joints with space between edges of adjoining gypsum panels.
F. Cover both faces of support framing with gypsum panels in concealed spaces (above ceilings, etc.), except in chases braced internally.
1. Unless concealed application is indicated or required for sound, fire, air, or smoke ratings, coverage may be accomplished with scraps of not less than 8 sq. ft. in area.
2. Fit gypsum panels around ducts, pipes, and conduits.
3. Where partitions intersect structural members projecting below underside of floor/roof slabs and decks, cut gypsum panels to fit profile formed by structural members; allow 1/4- to 3/8-inch- wide joints to install sealant.
G. Isolate perimeter of gypsum board applied to non-load-bearing partitions at structural abutments. Provide 1/4- to 1/2-inch- wide spaces at these locations and trim edges with edge trim where edges of panels are exposed. Seal joints between edges and abutting structural surfaces with acoustical sealant.
H. Attachment to Steel Framing: Attach panels so leading edge or end of each panel is attached to open (unsupported) edges of stud flanges first.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Gypsum Board
Renovation & Expansion Final Design 092900 - 8
100% Design Submittal
I. STC-Rated Assemblies: Seal construction at perimeters, behind control joints, and at openings and penetrations with a continuous bead of acoustical sealant. Install acoustical sealant at both faces of partitions at perimeters and through penetrations. Comply with ASTM C919 and with manufacturer's written instructions for locating edge trim and closing off sound-flanking paths around or through assemblies, including sealing partitions above acoustical ceilings.
J. Install sound attenuation blankets before installing gypsum panels unless blankets are readily installed after panels have been installed on one side.
3.3 INSTALLATION OF INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD
A. Install interior gypsum board in the following locations:
1. Wallboard Type: As indicated on Drawings.
2. Type X: As indicated on Drawings and where required for fire-resistance-rated assembly.
3. Ceiling Type: Ceiling surfaces.
4. Impact-Resistant and Mold-resistant Type: As indicated on Drawings.
5. Glass-Mat Interior Type: As indicated on Drawings.
B. Single-Layer Application:
1. On ceilings, apply gypsum panels before wall/partition board application to greatest extent possible and at right angles to framing unless otherwise indicated.
2. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum panels vertically (parallel to framing) unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly, and minimize end joints. a. Stagger abutting end joints not less than one framing member in alternate courses of panels.
b. At stairwells and other high walls, install panels horizontally unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly.
3. On Z-shaped furring members, apply gypsum panels vertically (parallel to framing) with no end joints. Locate edge joints over furring members.
4. Fastening Methods: Apply gypsum panels to supports with steel drill screws.
C. Multilayer Application:
1. On ceilings, apply gypsum board indicated for base layers before applying base layers on walls/partitions; apply face layers in same sequence. Apply base layers at right angles to framing members and offset face-layer joints one framing member, 16 inches minimum, from parallel base-layer joints, unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistancerated assembly.
2. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum board indicated for base layers and face layers vertically (parallel to framing) with joints of base layers located over stud or furring member and face-layer joints offset at least one stud or furring member with base-layer joints unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly. Stagger joints on opposite sides of partitions.
3. On Z-shaped furring members, apply base layer vertically (parallel to framing) and face layer either vertically (parallel to framing) or horizontally (perpendicular to framing) with ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Gypsum Board
Renovation & Expansion Final Design 092900 - 9
100% Design Submittal
vertical joints offset at least one furring member. Locate edge joints of base layer over furring members.
4. Fastening Methods: Fasten base layers with screws; fasten face layers with adhesive and supplementary fasteners.
D. Laminating to Substrate: Where gypsum panels are indicated as directly adhered to a substrate (other than studs, joists, furring members, or base layer of gypsum board), comply with gypsum board manufacturer's written instructions and temporarily brace or fasten gypsum panels until fastening adhesive has set.
3.4 INSTALLATION OF TILE BACKING PANELS
A. Glass-Mat, Water-Resistant Backing Panels: Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions and install at showers, tubs, and where indicated to receive tile. Install with 1/4-inch gap where panels abut other construction or penetrations.
B. Where tile backing panels abut other types of panels in same plane, shim surfaces to produce a uniform plane across panel surfaces.
3.5 INSTALLATION OF TRIM ACCESSORIES
A. General: For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same fasteners used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Control Joints: Install control joints according to ASTM C840 and in specific locations approved by Engineer for visual effect.
C. Interior Trim: Install in the following locations:
1. Cornerbead: Use at outside corners.
2. Bullnose Bead: Use where indicated.
3. LC-Bead: Use at exposed panel edges.
4. L-Bead: Use where indicated.
5. U-Bead: Use where indicated.
6. Curved-Edge Cornerbead: Use at curved openings.
D. Aluminum Trim: Install in locations indicated on Drawings.
3.6 FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD
A. General: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, edge trim, control joints, penetrations, fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare gypsum board surfaces for decoration. Promptly remove residual joint compound from adjacent surfaces.
B. Prefill open joints and damaged surface areas.
C. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except for trim products specifically indicated as not intended to receive tape.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Gypsum Board
Renovation & Expansion Final Design 092900 - 10
100% Design Submittal
D. Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below and according to ASTM C840:
1. Level 1: Ceiling plenum areas, concealed areas, and where indicated.
2. Level 2: Panels that are substrate for tile.
3. Level 4: At panel surfaces that will be exposed to view unless otherwise indicated. a. Primer and its application to surfaces are specified in Section 099123 "Interior Painting."
4. Level 5: Where indicated on Drawings.
a. Primer and its application to surfaces are specified in Section 099123 "Interior Painting."
E. Glass-Mat Faced Panels: Finish according to manufacturer's written instructions.
3.7 PROTECTION
A. Protect adjacent surfaces from drywall compound and promptly remove from floors and other non-drywall surfaces. Repair surfaces stained, marred, or otherwise damaged during drywall application.
B. Protect installed products from damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction, and other causes during remainder of the construction period.
C. Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.
1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture-damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape.
2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.
END OF SECTION 092900
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Ceramic Tiling
Renovation & Expansion Final Design 093013 - 1
100% Design Submittal
SECTION 093013 - CERAMIC TILING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Porcelain tile.
2. Porcelain wall tile.
3. Stone thresholds.
4. Tile backing panels.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 079200 "Joint Sealants" for sealing of expansion, contraction, control, and isolation joints in tile surfaces.
2. Section 092900 "Gypsum Board" for cementitious backer units.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. General: Definitions in the ANSI A108 series of tile installation standards and in ANSI A137.1 apply to Work of this Section unless otherwise specified.
B. ANSI A108 Series: ANSI A108.01, ANSI A108.02, ANSI A108.1A, ANSI A108.1B, ANSI A108.1C, ANSI A108.4, ANSI A108.5, ANSI A108.6, ANSI A108.8, ANSI A108.9, ANSI A108.10, ANSI A108.11, ANSI A108.12, ANSI A108.13, ANSI A108.14, ANSI A108.15, ANSI A108.16, and ANSI A108.17, which are contained in its "Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile."
C. Face Size: Actual tile size, excluding spacer lugs.
D. Module Size: Actual tile size plus joint width indicated.
1.4 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS
A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
1. Review requirements in ANSI A108.01 for substrates and for preparation by other trades. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Ceramic Tiling
Renovation & Expansion Final Design 093013 - 2
100% Design Submittal
1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
B. Shop Drawings: Show locations of each type of tile and tile pattern. Show widths, details, and locations of expansion, contraction, control, and isolation joints in tile substrates and finished tile surfaces.
C. Samples for Initial Selection: For tile, grout, and accessories involving color selection.
D. Samples for Verification:
1. Assembled samples mounted on a rigid panel, with grouted joints, for each type and composition of tile and for each color and finish required. Make samples at least 36 inches square, but not fewer than four tiles. Use grout of type and in color or colors approved for completed Work.
2. Full-size units of each type of trim and accessory for each color and finish required.
3. Metal edge strips in 6-inch lengths.
1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For Installer.
B. Master Grade Certificates: For each shipment, type, and composition of tile, signed by tile manufacturer and Installer.
C. Product Certificates: For each type of product.
D. Product Test Reports: For tile-setting and -grouting products and certified porcelain tile.
1.7 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish extra materials that match and are from same production runs as products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Tile and Trim Units: Furnish quantity of full-size units equal to 3 percent of amount installed for each type, composition, color, pattern, and size indicated.
2. Grout: Furnish quantity of grout equal to 3 percent of amount installed for each type, composition, and color indicated.
1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications:
1. Installer employs only Ceramic Tile Education Foundation Certified Installers or installers recognized by the U.S. Department of Labor as Journeyman Tile Layers for Project.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Ceramic Tiling
Renovation & Expansion Final Design 093013 - 3
100% Design Submittal
B. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.
1. Build mockup of each type of floor tile installation.
2. Build mockup of each type of wall tile installation.
3. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.
1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver and store packaged materials in original containers with seals unbroken and labels intact until time of use. Comply with requirements in ANSI A137.1 for labeling tile packages.
B. Store tile and cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location.
C. Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and contamination can be avoided.
D. Store liquid materials in unopened containers and protected from freezing.
1.10 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install tile until construction in spaces is complete and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated in referenced standards and manufacturer's written instructions.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Source Limitations for Tile: Obtain tile of each type and color or finish from single source or producer.
1. Obtain tile of each type and color or finish from same production run and of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties for each contiguous area.
B. Source Limitations for Setting and Grouting Materials: Obtain ingredients of a uniform quality for each mortar, adhesive, and grout component from single manufacturer and each aggregate from single source or producer.
1. Obtain setting and grouting materials, except for unmodified Portland cement and aggregate, from single manufacturer.
C. Source Limitations for Other Products: Obtain each of the following products specified in this Section from a single manufacturer:
1. Stone thresholds.
2. Metal edge strips.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Ceramic Tiling
Renovation & Expansion Final Design 093013 - 4
100% Design Submittal
2.2 PRODUCTS, GENERAL
A. ANSI Ceramic Tile Standard: Provide tile that complies with ANSI A137.1 for types, compositions, and other characteristics indicated.
1. Provide tile complying with Standard grade requirements unless otherwise indicated.
B. ANSI Standards for Tile Installation Materials: Provide materials complying with ANSI A108.02, ANSI standards referenced in other Part 2 articles, ANSI standards referenced by TCNA installation methods specified in tile installation schedules, and other requirements specified.
C. Factory Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations within ranges, blend tile in factory and package so tile units taken from one package show same range in colors as those taken from other packages and match approved Samples.
2.3 TILE PRODUCTS
A. Porcelain Tile Type: Unglazed porcelain tile.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
a. American Marazzi Tile, Inc.
b. Daltile.
c. Interceramic.
2. Certification: Tile certified by the Porcelain Tile Certification Agency.
3. Face Size: As indicated on the architectural finish schedule.
4. Face Size Variation: Rectified.
5. Thickness: 1/4 inch.
6. Face: Plain with square edges.
7. Dynamic Coefficient of Friction: Not less than 0.42.
8. Tile Color, Glaze, and Pattern: As indicated on the architectural finish schedule.
9. Grout Color: As selected by Engineer from manufacturer's full range.
10. Trim Units: Coordinated with sizes and coursing of adjoining flat tile where applicable and matching characteristics of adjoining flat tile. Provide shapes as follows, selected from manufacturer's standard shapes:
a. External Corners: Surface bullnose, module size same as adjoining flat tile. b. Internal Corners: Field-butted square corners.
B. Bullnose Tile/Build-up Base.
1. Tile Color, Glaze, and Pattern: As indicated on the architectural finish schedule drawing.
2.4 THRESHOLDS
A. General: Fabricate to sizes and profiles indicated or required to provide transition between adjacent floor finishes.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Ceramic Tiling
Renovation & Expansion Final Design 093013 - 5
100% Design Submittal
1. Bevel edges at 1:2 slope, with lower edge of bevel aligned with or up to 1/16 inch above adjacent floor surface. Finish bevel to match top surface of threshold. Limit height of threshold to 1/2 inch or less above adjacent floor surface.
B. Marble Thresholds: ASTM C503/C503M, with a minimum abrasion resistance of 12 according to ASTM C1353 or ASTM C241/C241M and with honed finish.
2.5 SETTING MATERIALS
A. Standard Dry-Set Mortar (Thinset): ANSI A118.1.
1. For wall applications, provide mortar that complies with requirements for nonsagging mortar in addition to the other requirements in ANSI A118.1.
B. Modified Dry-Set Mortar (Thinset): ANSI A118.4.
1. Provide prepackaged, dry-mortar mix containing dry, redispersible, vinyl acetate or acrylic additive to which only water must be added at Project site.
2. For wall applications, provide mortar that complies with requirements for nonsagging mortar in addition to the other requirements in ANSI A118.4.
2.6 GROUT MATERIALS
A. High-Performance Tile Grout: ANSI A118.7.
1. Polymer Type: Ethylene vinyl acetate or acrylic additive, in dry, redispersible form, prepackaged with other dry ingredients.
2. Polymer Type: Acrylic resin or styrene-butadiene rubber in liquid-latex form for addition to prepackaged dry-grout mix.
2.7 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Trowelable Underlayments and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement-based formulation provided or approved by manufacturer of tile-setting materials for installations indicated.
B. Vapor-Retarder Membrane: Polyethylene sheeting, ASTM D4397, 4.0 mils thick.
C. Metal Edge Strips: Angle or L-shaped, height to match tile and setting-bed thickness, metallic or combination of metal and PVC or neoprene base, designed specifically for flooring applications; stainless steel, ASTM A276/A276M or ASTM A666, 300 Series exposed-edge material.
D. Tile Cleaner: A neutral cleaner capable of removing soil and residue without harming tile and grout surfaces, specifically approved for materials and installations indicated by tile and grout manufacturers.
E. Floor Sealer: Manufacturer's standard product for sealing grout joints and that does not change color or appearance of grout.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Ceramic Tiling
Renovation & Expansion Final Design 093013 - 6
100% Design Submittal
2.8 MIXING MORTARS AND GROUT
A. Mix mortars and grouts to comply with referenced standards and mortar and grout manufacturers' written instructions.
B. Add materials, water, and additives in accurate proportions.
C. Obtain and use type of mixing equipment, mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing time, and other procedures to produce mortars and grouts of uniform quality with optimum performance characteristics for installations indicated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions where tile will be installed, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
1. Verify that substrates for setting tile are firm; dry; clean; free of coatings that are incompatible with tile-setting materials, including curing compounds and other substances that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone; and comply with flatness tolerances required by ANSI A108.01 for installations indicated.
2. Verify that concrete substrates for tile floors installed with thinset mortar comply with surface finish requirements in ANSI A108.01 for installations indicated. a. Verify that surfaces that received a steel trowel finish have been mechanically scarified.
b. Verify that protrusions, bumps, and ridges have been removed by sanding or grinding.
3. Verify that installation of grounds, anchors, recessed frames, electrical and mechanical units of work, and similar items located in or behind tile has been completed.
4. Verify that joints and cracks in tile substrates are coordinated with tile joint locations; if not coordinated, adjust joint locations in consultation with Engineer.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in concrete substrates for tile floors installed with thinset mortar with trowelable leveling and patching compound specifically recommended by tilesetting material manufacturer.
B. Where indicated, prepare substrates to receive waterproof membrane by applying a reinforced mortar bed that complies with ANSI A108.1A and is sloped 1/4 inch per foot toward drains.
C. Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations, verify that tile has been factory blended and packaged so tile units taken from one package show same range of colors as those taken from ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Ceramic Tiling
Renovation & Expansion Final Design 093013 - 7
100% Design Submittal
other packages and match approved Samples. If not factory blended, either return to manufacturer or blend tiles at Project site before installing.
3.3 INSTALLATION OF CERAMIC TILE
A. Comply with TCNA's "Handbook for Ceramic, Glass, and Stone Tile Installation" for TCNA installation methods specified in tile installation schedules. Comply with parts of the ANSI A108 series "Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile" that are referenced in TCNA installation methods, specified in tile installation schedules, and apply to types of setting and grouting materials used.
1. For the following installations, follow procedures in the ANSI A108 series of tile installation standards for providing 95 percent mortar coverage:
a. Tile floors in wet areas.
B. Extend tile work into recesses and under or behind equipment and fixtures to form complete covering without interruptions unless otherwise indicated. Terminate work neatly at obstructions, edges, and corners without disrupting pattern or joint alignments.
C. Accurately form intersections and returns. Perform cutting and drilling of tile without marring visible surfaces. Carefully grind cut edges of tile abutting trim, finish, or built-in items for straight aligned joints. Fit tile closely to electrical outlets, piping, fixtures, and other penetrations so plates, collars, or covers overlap tile.
D. Provide manufacturer's standard trim shapes where necessary to eliminate exposed tile edges.
E. Where accent tile differs in thickness from field tile, vary setting-bed thickness so that tiles are flush.
F. Jointing Pattern: Lay tile in grid pattern unless otherwise indicated. Lay out tile work and center tile fields in both directions in each space or on each wall area. Lay out tile work to minimize the use of pieces that are less than half of a tile. Provide uniform joint widths unless otherwise indicated.
1. For tile mounted in sheets, make joints between tile sheets same width as joints within tile sheets so joints between sheets are not apparent in finished work.
2. Where adjoining tiles on floor, base, walls, or trim are specified or indicated to be same size, align joints.
3. Where tiles are specified or indicated to be whole integer multiples of adjoining tiles on floor, base, walls, or trim, align joints unless otherwise indicated.
G. Joint Widths: Unless otherwise indicated, install tile with the following joint widths:
1. Ceramic Mosaic Tile: 1/16 inch.
2. Porcelain Tile: 1/4 inch.
H. Lay out tile wainscots to dimensions indicated or to next full tile beyond dimensions indicated. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Ceramic Tiling
Renovation & Expansion Final Design 093013 - 8
100% Design Submittal
I. Expansion Joints: Provide expansion joints and other sealant-filled joints, including control, contraction, and isolation joints, where indicated. Form joints during installation of setting materials, mortar beds, and tile. Do not saw-cut joints after installing tiles.
1. Where joints occur in concrete substrates, locate joints in tile surfaces directly above them.
J. Metal Edge Strips: Install where exposed edge of tile flooring meets carpet, wood, or other flooring that finishes flush with or below top of tile and no threshold is indicated.
K. Floor Sealer: Apply floor sealer to grout joints according to floor-sealer manufacturer's written instructions. As soon as floor sealer has penetrated grout joints, remove excess sealer and sealer from tile faces by wiping with soft cloth.
3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Remove and replace tile that is damaged or that does not match adjoining tile. Provide new matching units, installed as specified and in a manner to eliminate evidence of replacement.
B. Cleaning: On completion of placement and grouting, clean all ceramic tile surfaces so they are free of foreign matter.
1. Remove grout residue from tile as soon as possible.
2. Clean grout smears and haze from tile according to tile and grout manufacturer's written instructions but no sooner than 10 days after installation. Use only cleaners recommended by tile and grout manufacturers and only after determining that cleaners are safe to use by testing on samples of tile and other surfaces to be cleaned. Protect metal surfaces and plumbing fixtures from effects of cleaning. Flush surfaces with clean water before and after cleaning.
3.5 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed tile work with kraft paper or other heavy covering during construction period to prevent staining, damage, and wear. If recommended by tile manufacturer, apply coat of neutral protective cleaner to completed tile walls and floors.
B. Prohibit foot and wheel traffic from tiled floors for at least seven days after grouting is completed.
C. Before final inspection, remove protective coverings and rinse neutral protective cleaner from tile surfaces.
3.6 INTERIOR CERAMIC TILE INSTALLATION SCHEDULE
A. Interior Floor Installations, Concrete Subfloor:
1. Ceramic Tile Installation: TCNA F111 and ANSI A108.1A; cement mortar bed (thickset) with cleavage membrane.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Ceramic Tiling
Renovation & Expansion Final Design 093013 - 9
100% Design Submittal
a. Ceramic Tile Type: Porcelain Tile.
b. Bond Coat for Cured-Bed Method: Medium-bed, modified dry-set mortar. c. Grout: High-performance unsanded grout.
END OF SECTION 093013
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Ceramic Tiling
Renovation & Expansion Final Design 093013 - 10
100% Design Submittal
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Acoustical Tile Ceilings Renovation & Expansion Final Design 095123 - 1
100% Design Submittal
SECTION 095123 - ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Acoustical tiles.
2. Metal suspension system.
B. Products furnished, but not installed under this Section, include anchors, clips, and other ceiling attachment devices to be cast in concrete.
1.3 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS
A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data:
1. Acoustical tiles.
2. Metal suspension system.
3. Accessories.
B. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified, 6 inches in size.
C. Samples for Initial Selection: For components with factory-applied finishes.
D. Samples for Verification: For each component indicated and for each exposed finish required, prepared on Samples of sizes indicated below:
1. Acoustical Tiles: Set of full-size Samples of each type, color, pattern, and texture.
2. Concealed Suspension-System Members: 6-inch- long Sample of each type.
3. Exposed Moldings and Trim: Set of 6-inch- long Samples of each type and color.
4. Seismic Clips: Full size.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Acoustical Tile Ceilings Renovation & Expansion Final Design 095123 - 2
100% Design Submittal
1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved:
1. Ceiling suspension-system members.
2. Structural members to which suspension systems will be attached.
3. Method of attaching hangers to building structure.
a. Furnish layouts for cast-in-place anchors, clips, and other ceiling attachment devices whose installation is specified in other Sections.
4. Carrying channels or other supplemental support for hanger-wire attachment where conditions do not permit installation of hanger wires at required spacing.
5. Size and location of initial access modules for acoustical tile.
6. Items penetrating finished ceiling and ceiling-mounted items including the following:
a. Lighting fixtures.
b. Diffusers.
c. Grilles.
d. Speakers.
e. Sprinklers.
f. Access panels.
g. Perimeter moldings.
7. Show operation of hinged and sliding components adjacent to acoustical tiles.
8. Minimum Drawing Scale: 1/4 inch = 1 foot.
B. Qualification Data: For testing agency.
C. Product Test Reports: For each acoustical tile ceiling, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency.
D. Evaluation Reports: For each acoustical tile ceiling suspension system and anchor and fastener type, from ICC-ES.
E. Field quality-control reports.
F. Provide documentation verifying that acoustical ceiling meets the pollutant emission limits in accordance with the California Department of Public Health (CDPH) Standard Method for the Testing and Evaluation of Volatile Organic Chemical Emissions from Indoor Sources Using Environmental Chambers, Version 1.2 (January 2017), as required by CALGreen.
1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Maintenance Data: For finishes to include in maintenance manuals. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Acoustical Tile Ceilings Renovation & Expansion Final Design 095123 - 3
100% Design Submittal
1.7 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish extra materials, from the same product run, that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Acoustical Ceiling Units: Full-size tiles equal to 2 percent of quantity installed.
2. Suspension-System Components: Quantity of each concealed grid and exposed component equal to 2 percent of quantity installed.
1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals, to demonstrate aesthetic effects, and to set quality standards for materials and execution.
1. Build mockup of typical ceiling area as shown on Drawings.
2. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Engineer specifically approves such deviations in writing.
3. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.
1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver acoustical tiles, suspension-system components, and accessories to Project site and store them in a fully enclosed, conditioned space where they will be protected against damage from moisture, humidity, temperature extremes, direct sunlight, surface contamination, and other causes.
B. Before installing acoustical tiles, permit them to reach room temperature and a stabilized moisture content.
1.10 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install acoustical tile ceilings until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet-work in spaces is complete and dry, work above ceilings is complete, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use.
1. Pressurized Plenums: Operate ventilation system for not less than 48 hours before beginning acoustical tile ceiling installation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SOURCE LIMITATIONS
A. Source Limitations for Suspended Acoustical Tile Ceiling System: Obtain each type of acoustical ceiling tile and its suspension system from single source from single manufacturer. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Acoustical Tile Ceilings Renovation & Expansion Final Design 095123 - 4
100% Design Submittal
2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Seismic Performance: Suspended ceilings to withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined in accordance with ASCE/SEI 7.
B. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E84; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.
1. Flame-Spread Index: Class A in accordance with ASTM E1264.
2. Smoke-Developed Index: 50 or less.
C. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Comply with ASTM E119; testing by a qualified testing agency.
Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.
1. Indicate design designations from UL or from the listings of another qualified testing agency.
2.3 ACOUSTICAL TILES (ACT)
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.
2. CertainTeed Corporation.
3. USG Corporation.
B. Acoustical Tile Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard tiles of configuration indicated that comply with ASTM E1264 classifications as designated by type, form, pattern, acoustical rating, and light reflectance unless otherwise indicated.
C. Classification: Provide tiles as follows:
1. Basis of Design: “Calla” as manufactured by Armstrong or approved equivalent by specified manufacturer.
D. Color: White.
E. Light Reflectance (LR): Not less than0.80 .
F. Ceiling Attenuation Class (CAC): Not less than 30.
G. Noise Reduction Coefficient (NRC): Not less than 0.70.
H. Edge/Joint Detail: As indicated by manufacturer's designation.
I. Thickness: 3/4 inch.
J. Modular Size: As indicated on Drawings.
K. Grid: Factory 9/16” wide steel grid with factory white finish. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Acoustical Tile Ceilings Renovation & Expansion Final Design 095123 - 5
100% Design Submittal
L. Antimicrobial Treatment: Manufacturer's standard broad spectrum, antimicrobial formulation that inhibits fungus, mold, mildew, and gram-positive and gram-negative bacteria and showing no mold, mildew, or bacterial growth when tested in accordance with ASTM D3273, ASTM D3274, or ASTM G21 and evaluated in accordance with ASTM D3274 or ASTM G21.
2.4 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEM
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.
2. USG Corporation.
B. Metal Suspension-System Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard, direct-hung, fully concealed, metal suspension system and accessories of type, structural classification, and finish indicated that complies with applicable requirements in ASTM C635/C635M.
1. High-Humidity Finish: Where indicated, provide coating tested and classified for "severe environment performance" in accordance with ASTM C635/C635M.
2.5 ACCESSORIES
A. Attachment Devices: Size for five times the design load indicated in ASTM C635/C635M, Table 1, "Direct Hung," unless otherwise indicated. Comply with seismic design requirements.
1. Anchors in Concrete: Anchors of type and material indicated below, with holes or loops for attaching hangers of type indicated and with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to five times that imposed by ceiling construction, as determined by testing in accordance with ASTM E488/E488M or ASTM E1512 as applicable, conducted by a qualified testing and inspecting agency.
a. Type: Post-installed expansion anchors.
b. Corrosion Protection, Carbon Steel: Components zinc plated in accordance with ASTM B633, Class SC 1 (mild) service condition.
c. Corrosion Protection, Stainless Steel: Components complying with ASTM F593 and ASTM F594, Group 1 Alloy 304 or 316.
2. Power-Actuated Fasteners in Concrete: Fastener system of type suitable for application indicated, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with clips or other accessory devices for attaching hangers of type indicated, and with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 10 times that imposed by ceiling construction, as determined by testing in accordance with ASTM E1190, conducted by a qualified testing and inspecting agency.
B. Wire Hangers, Braces, and Ties: Provide wires as follows:
1. Stainless Steel Wire: ASTM A580/A580M, Type 304, nonmagnetic. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Acoustical Tile Ceilings Renovation & Expansion Final Design 095123 - 6
100% Design Submittal
2. Size: Wire diameter sufficient for its stress at three times hanger design load (ASTM C635/C635M, Table 1, "Direct Hung") will be less than yield stress of wire, but not less than 0.106-inch- diameter wire.
C. Seismic Stabilizer Bars: Manufacturer's standard perimeter stabilizers designed to accommodate seismic forces.
D. Seismic Clips: Manufacturer's standard seismic clips designed to secure acoustical tiles in-place during a seismic event.
2.6 METAL EDGE MOLDINGS AND TRIM
A. Extruded-Aluminum Edge Moldings and Trim: Where indicated, provide manufacturer's extruded-aluminum edge moldings and trim of profile indicated or referenced by manufacturer's designations, including splice plates, corner pieces, and attachment and other clips, complying with seismic design requirements.
1. Baked-Enamel or Powder-Coat Finish: Minimum dry film thickness of 1.5 mils. Comply with ASTM C635/C635M and coating manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning, conversion coating, and applying and baking finish.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, including structural framing and substrates to which acoustical tile ceilings attach or abut, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements specified in this and other Sections that affect ceiling installation and anchorage and for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B. Examine acoustical tiles before installation. Reject acoustical tiles that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical tiles to balance border widths at opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid using less-than-half-width tiles at borders unless otherwise indicated and comply with layout shown on reflected ceiling plans.
B. Layout openings for penetrations centered on the penetrating items. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Acoustical Tile Ceilings Renovation & Expansion Final Design 095123 - 7
100% Design Submittal
3.3 INSTALLATION OF SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS
A. Install suspended acoustical tile ceilings in accordance with ASTM C636/C636M, seismic design requirements, and manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Suspend ceiling hangers from building's structural members and as follows:
1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structure or of ceiling suspension system.
2. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions; offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means.
3. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that interfere with location of hangers at spacings required to support standard suspension-system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in form of trapezes or equivalent devices.
4. Secure wire hangers to ceiling suspension members and to supports above with a minimum of three tight turns. Connect hangers directly to structure or to inserts, eye screws, or other devices that are secure and appropriate for substrate and that will not deteriorate or otherwise fail due to age, corrosion, or elevated temperatures.
5. Secure flat, angle, channel, and rod hangers to structure, including intermediate framing members, by attaching to inserts, eye screws, or other devices that are secure and appropriate for both the structure to which hangers are attached and the type of hanger involved. Install hangers in a manner that will not cause them to deteriorate or fail due to age, corrosion, or elevated temperatures.
6. Do not support ceilings directly from permanent metal forms or floor deck. Fasten hangers to cast-in-place hanger inserts, post-installed mechanical or adhesive anchors, or power-actuated fasteners that extend through forms into concrete.
7. When steel framing does not permit installation of hanger wires at spacing required, install carrying channels or other supplemental support for attachment of hanger wires.
8. Do not attach hangers to steel deck tabs.
9. Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck. Attach hangers to structural members.
10. Space hangers not more than 48 inches o.c. along each member supported directly from hangers unless otherwise indicated; provide hangers not more than 8 inches from ends of each member.
11. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within performance limits established by referenced standards.
C. Secure bracing wires to ceiling suspension members and to supports with a minimum of four tight turns. Suspend bracing from building's structural members as required for hangers without attaching to permanent metal forms, steel deck, or steel deck tabs. Fasten bracing wires into concrete with cast-in-place or post-installed anchors.
D. Install edge moldings and trim of type indicated at perimeter of acoustical ceiling area and where necessary to conceal edges of acoustical tiles.
1. Apply acoustical sealant in a continuous ribbon concealed on back of vertical legs of moldings before they are installed.
2. Screw attach moldings to substrate at intervals not more than 16 inches o.c. and not more than 3 inches from ends. Miter corners accurately and connect securely.
3. Do not use exposed fasteners, including pop rivets, on moldings and trim. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Acoustical Tile Ceilings Renovation & Expansion Final Design 095123 - 8
100% Design Submittal
E. Install suspension-system runners so they are square and securely interlocked with one another.
Remove and replace dented, bent, or kinked members.
F. Arrange directionally patterned acoustical tiles as follows:
1. As indicated on reflected ceiling plans.
G. Install acoustical tiles in coordination with suspension system and exposed moldings and trim.
Place splines or suspension-system flanges into kerfed edges of tiles so tile-to-tile joints are interlocked.
1. Fit adjoining tiles to form flush, tight joints. Scribe and cut tiles for accurate fit at borders and around penetrations through ceiling.
2. Hold tile field in compression by inserting leaf-type, spring-steel spacers between tiles and moldings, spaced 12 inches o.c.
3.4 ERECTION TOLERANCES
A. Suspended Ceilings: Install main and cross runners level to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 12 feet, non-cumulative.
B. Moldings and Trim: Install moldings and trim to substrate and level with ceiling suspension system to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 12 feet, non-cumulative.
3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Special Inspections: Owner will engage a qualified special inspector to perform the following special inspections:
1. Periodic inspection during the installation of suspended ceiling grids in accordance with ASCE/SEI 7.
B. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.
C. Perform the following tests and inspections of completed installations of acoustical tile ceiling hangers and anchors and fasteners in successive stages and when installation of ceiling suspension systems on each floor has reached 20 percent completion, but no tiles have been installed. Do not proceed with installations of acoustical tile ceiling hangers for the next area until test results for previously completed installations of acoustical tile ceiling hangers show compliance with requirements.
1. Within each test area, testing agency will select one of every 10 power-actuated fasteners and post-installed anchors used to attach hangers to concrete and will test them for 200 lbf of tension; it will also select one of every two post-installed anchors used to attach bracing wires to concrete and will test them for 440 lbf of tension.
2. When testing discovers fasteners and anchors that do not comply with requirements, testing agency will test those anchors not previously tested until 20 pass consecutively and then will resume initial testing frequency.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Acoustical Tile Ceilings Renovation & Expansion Final Design 095123 - 9
100% Design Submittal
D. Acoustical tile ceiling hangers, anchors, and fasteners will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.
E. Prepare test and inspection reports.
3.6 ADJUSTING
A. Clean exposed surfaces of acoustical tile ceilings, including trim and edge moldings. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and touchup of minor finish damage.
B. Remove and replace tiles and other ceiling components that cannot be successfully cleaned and repaired to permanently eliminate evidence of damage.
END OF SECTION 095123
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Acoustical Tile Ceilings Renovation & Expansion Final Design 095123 - 10
100% Design Submittal
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Resilient Base and Accessories Renovation & Expansion Final Design 096513 - 1
100% Design Submittal
SECTION 096513 - RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Thermoplastic-rubber base.
2. Rubber molding accessories.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of product indicated.
C. Product Schedule: For resilient base and accessory products. Use same designations indicated on Drawings.
1.4 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish extra materials, from the same product run, that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Furnish not less than 10 linear feet for every 500 linear feet or fraction thereof, of each type, color, pattern, and size of resilient product installed.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Store resilient products and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the weather, with ambient temperatures maintained within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 50 deg F or more than 90 deg F.
1.6 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 70 deg F or more than 95 deg F, in spaces to receive resilient products during the following periods:
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Resilient Base and Accessories Renovation & Expansion Final Design 096513 - 2
100% Design Submittal
1. 48 hours before installation.
2. During installation.
3. 48 hours after installation.
B. After installation and until Substantial Completion, maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 55 deg F or more than 95 deg F.
C. Install resilient products after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 THERMOPLASTIC-RUBBER BASE
A. Product Standard: ASTM F1861, Type TP (rubber, thermoplastic).
1. Group: I (solid, homogeneous).
2. Style and Location:
a. Style B, Cove: Provide in areas with resilient floor coverings. b. Style C, Butt to: Provide in areas indicated.
B. Thickness: 0.125 inch.
C. Height: As indicated on Drawings.
D. Lengths: Cut lengths 48 inches long or coils in manufacturer's standard length.
E. Outside Corners: Preformed.
F. Inside Corners: Preformed.
G. Colors: As indicated by manufacturer's designations.
2.2 INSTALLATION MATERIALS
A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland-cement-based or blended hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or approved by resilient-product manufacturer for applications indicated.
B. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by resilient-product manufacturer for resilient products and substrate conditions indicated.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Resilient Base and Accessories Renovation & Expansion Final Design 096513 - 3
100% Design Submittal
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
1. Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements specified in other Sections and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits that might interfere with adhesion of resilient products.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
1. Installation of resilient products indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion of resilient products.
B. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching compound; remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate.
C. Do not install resilient products until materials are the same temperature as space where they are to be installed.
1. At least 48 hours in advance of installation, move resilient products and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed.
D. Immediately before installation, sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient products.
3.3 RESILIENT BASE INSTALLATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient base.
B. Apply resilient base to walls, columns, pilasters, casework and cabinets in toe spaces, and other permanent fixtures in rooms and areas where base is required.
C. Install resilient base in lengths as long as practical without gaps at seams and with tops of adjacent pieces aligned.
D. Tightly adhere resilient base to substrate throughout length of each piece, with base in continuous contact with horizontal and vertical substrates.
E. Do not stretch resilient base during installation.
F. On masonry surfaces or other similar irregular substrates, fill voids along top edge of resilient base with manufacturer's recommended adhesive filler material. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Resilient Base and Accessories Renovation & Expansion Final Design 096513 - 4
100% Design Submittal
G. Preformed Corners: Install preformed corners before installing straight pieces.
3.4 RESILIENT ACCESSORY INSTALLATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient accessories.
B. Resilient Molding Accessories: Butt to adjacent materials and tightly adhere to substrates throughout length of each piece. Install reducer strips at edges of floor covering that would otherwise be exposed.
3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protecting resilient products.
B. Perform the following operations immediately after completing resilient-product installation:
1. Remove adhesive and other blemishes from surfaces.
C. Protect resilient products from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period.
D. Cover resilient products subject to wear and foot traffic until Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION 096513
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Resilient Tile Flooring Renovation & Expansion Final Design 096519 - 1
100% Design Submittal
SECTION 096519 - RESILIENT TILE FLOORING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Luxury Vinyl floor tile.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
B. Shop Drawings: For each type of resilient floor tile.
1. Include floor tile layouts, edges, columns, doorways, enclosing partitions, built-in furniture, cabinets, and cutouts.
2. Show details of special patterns.
C. Samples: Full-size units of each color, texture, and pattern of floor tile required.
D. Product Schedule: For floor tile. Use same designations indicated on Drawings.
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMTTALS
A. Provide documentation verifying that resinous flooring materials meet the pollutant emission limits in accordance with the California Department of Public Health (CDPH) Standard Method for the Testing and Evaluation of Volatile Organic Chemical Emissions from Indoor Sources Using Environmental Chambers, Version 1.2 or later, as required by CALGreen.
1.5 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish extra materials, from the same product run, that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Floor Tile: Furnish one box for every 50 boxes or fraction thereof, of each type, color, and pattern of floor tile installed.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Resilient Tile Flooring Renovation & Expansion Final Design 096519 - 2
100% Design Submittal
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: An entity that employs installers and supervisors who are competent in techniques required by manufacturer for floor tile installation and seaming method indicated.
B. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals, to demonstrate aesthetic effects, and to set quality standards for materials and execution.
1. Coordinate mockups in this Section with mockups specified in other Sections. a. Size: Minimum 100 sq. ft. for each type, color, and pattern in locations directed by Engineer.
2. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Engineer specifically approves such deviations in writing.
3. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Store floor tile and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the weather, with ambient temperatures maintained within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 50 deg F or more than 90 deg F. Store floor tiles on flat surfaces.
1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 70 deg F or more than 95 deg F, in spaces to receive floor tile during the following periods:
1. 48 hours before installation.
2. During installation.
3. 48 hours after installation.
B. After installation and until Substantial Completion, maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 55 deg F or more than 95 deg F.
C. Close spaces to traffic during floor tile installation.
D. Close spaces to traffic for 48 hours after floor tile installation.
E. Install floor tile after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 LUXURY VINYL FLOOR TILE
A. Basis-of-Design: Shaw Contract.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Resilient Tile Flooring Renovation & Expansion Final Design 096519 - 3
100% Design Submittal
1. Style: Grain.
2. Style Name: 0364V.
3. Color Name: Antler.
4. Color Number: 6461.
5. Size: 7 inches x 48 inches.
6. Construction: 20 mil thick, floating LVT.
7. Installation: Staggered joints.
2.2 INSTALLATION MATERIALS
A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland-cement-based or blended hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or approved by floor tile manufacturer for applications indicated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
1. Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements specified in other Sections and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits that might interfere with adhesion of floor tile.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Prepare substrates according to floor tile manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion of resilient products.
B. Concrete Substrates: Prepare according to ASTM F710.
1. Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and hardeners.
2. Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended by floor tile manufacturer. Do not use solvents.
3. Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by floor tile manufacturer.
Proceed with installation only after substrate alkalinity falls within range on pH scale recommended by manufacturer in writing, but not less than 5 or more than 9 pH.
4. Moisture Testing: Perform tests so that each test area does not exceed 200 sq. ft., and perform no fewer than three tests in each installation area and with test areas evenly spaced in installation areas.
a. Anhydrous Calcium Chloride Test: ASTM F1869. Proceed with installation only after substrates have maximum moisture-vapor-emission rate of 3 lbs. of water/1000 sq. ft. in 24 hours.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Resilient Tile Flooring Renovation & Expansion Final Design 096519 - 4
100% Design Submittal
b. Relative Humidity Test: Using in-situ probes, ASTM F2170. Proceed with installation only after substrates have a maximum 75 percent relative humidity level measurement.
C. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching compound; remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate.
D. Do not install floor tiles until materials are the same temperature as space where they are to be installed.
1. At least 48 hours in advance of installation, move resilient floor tile and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed.
E. Immediately before installation, sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient floor tile.
3.3 FLOOR TILE INSTALLATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing floor tile.
B. Lay out floor tiles from center marks established with principal walls, discounting minor offsets, so tiles at opposite edges of room are of equal width. Adjust as necessary to avoid using cut widths that equal less than one-half tile at perimeter.
C. Match floor tiles for color and pattern by selecting tiles from cartons in the same sequence as manufactured and packaged, if so numbered. Discard broken, cracked, chipped, or deformed tiles.
D. Scribe, cut, and fit floor tiles to butt neatly and tightly to vertical surfaces and permanent fixtures including built-in furniture, cabinets, pipes, outlets, and door frames.
E. Extend floor tiles into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, and similar openings. Extend floor tiles to center of door openings.
F. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by repeating on floor tiles as marked on substrates. Use chalk or other nonpermanent marking device.
G. Install floor tiles on covers for telephone and electrical ducts, building expansion-joint covers, and similar items in installation areas. Maintain overall continuity of color and pattern between pieces of tile installed on covers and adjoining tiles. Tightly adhere tile edges to substrates that abut covers and to cover perimeters.
3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protecting floor tile.
B. Perform the following operations immediately after completing floor tile installation:
1. Remove adhesive and other blemishes from surfaces.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Resilient Tile Flooring Renovation & Expansion Final Design 096519 - 5
100% Design Submittal
2. Sweep and vacuum surfaces thoroughly.
3. Damp-mop surfaces to remove marks and soil.
C. Protect floor tile from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period.
D. Cover floor tile until Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION 096519
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Resilient Tile Flooring Renovation & Expansion Final Design 096519 - 6
100% Design Submittal
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Resinous Flooring Renovation & Expansion Final Design 096723 - 1
100% Design Submittal
SECTION 096723 - RESINOUS FLOORING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Resinous flooring systems.
1.3 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS
A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include manufacturer's technical data, application instructions, and recommendations for each resinous flooring component required.
B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of exposed finish required.
C. Samples for Verification: For each resinous flooring system required, 6 inches square, applied to a rigid backing by Installer for this Project.
1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Installer Certificates: Signed by manufacturer certifying that installers comply with specified requirements.
B. Material Certificates: For each resinous flooring component, from manufacturer.
C. Material Test Reports: For each resinous flooring system, by a qualified testing agency.
1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Maintenance Data: For resinous flooring to include in maintenance manuals. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Resinous Flooring Renovation & Expansion Final Design 096723 - 2
100% Design Submittal
1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: An authorized representative who is trained and approved by manufacturer.
B. Engage an installer who is certified in writing by resinous flooring manufacturer as qualified to apply resinous flooring systems indicated.
C. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.
1. Apply full-thickness mockups on 96-inch square floor area selected by Engineer. a. Include 96-inch length of integral cove base with inside and outside corner.
2. Simulate finished lighting conditions for Engineer's review of mockups.
3. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Engineer specifically approves such deviations in writing.
4. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.
1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver materials in original packages and containers, with seals unbroken, bearing manufacturer's labels indicating brand name and directions for storage and mixing with other components.
1.9 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with resinous flooring manufacturer's written instructions for substrate temperature, ambient temperature, moisture, ventilation, and other conditions affecting resinous flooring application.
B. Lighting: Provide permanent lighting or, if permanent lighting is not in place, simulate permanent lighting conditions during resinous flooring application.
C. Close spaces to traffic during resinous flooring application and for 24 hours after application unless manufacturer recommends a longer period.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PERORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Flammability: Self-extinguishing according to ASTM D635. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Resinous Flooring Renovation & Expansion Final Design 096723 - 3
100% Design Submittal
2.2 MANUFACTURERS
A. Source Limitations: Obtain primary resinous flooring materials, including primers, resins, hardening agents, grouting coats, and topcoats, from single source from single manufacturer.
Obtain secondary materials, including patching and fill material, joint sealant, and repair materials, of type and from manufacturer recommended in writing by manufacturer of primary materials.
2.3 RESINOUS FLOORING
A. Resinous Flooring System: Abrasion-, impact-, and chemical-resistant, aggregate-filled, and resin-based monolithic floor surfacing designed to produce a seamless floor and integral cove base.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
a. Sherwin-Williams Company, General Polymers.
b. Stonhard, Inc.
c. Tnemec Inc.
B. System Characteristics:
1. Color and Pattern: As indicated on Drawings.
2. Wearing Surface: Textured for slip resistance.
3. Overall System Thickness: 1/4 inch.
C. Primer: Type recommended by resinous flooring manufacturer for substrate and resinous flooring system indicated.
1. Formulation Description: 100 percent solids.
D. Waterproofing Membrane: Type recommended by resinous flooring manufacturer for substrate and resinous flooring system indicated.
1. Formulation Description: 100 percent solids.
E. Reinforcing Membrane: Flexible resin formulation that is recommended by resinous flooring manufacturer for substrate and resinous flooring system indicated and that inhibits substrate cracks from reflecting through resinous flooring.
1. Formulation Description: 100 percent solids.
a. Provide fiberglass scrim embedded in reinforcing membrane.
F. Patching and Fill Material: Resinous product of or approved by resinous flooring manufacturer and recommended by manufacturer for application indicated.
G. Body Coats:
1. Resin: Epoxy.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Resinous Flooring Renovation & Expansion Final Design 096723 - 4
100% Design Submittal
2. Formulation Description: 100 percent solids.
3. Type: Pigmented.
4. Application Method: Self-leveling slurry with broadcast aggregates.
5. Number of Coats: One.
6. Thickness of Coats: 1/4 inch.
7. Aggregates: Manufacturer's standard.
H. Grout Coat:
1. Resin: Epoxy.
2. Formulation Description: 100 percent solids.
3. Type: Pigmented.
4. Thickness of Coat: 8 mils .
I. Topcoats: Sealing or finish coats.
1. Resin: Epoxy.
2. Formulation Description: 100 percent solids.
3. Type: Pigmented.
4. Number of Coats: One.
5. Thickness of Coats: 1/4 inch.
6. Finish: Matte.
J. System Physical Properties: Provide resinous flooring system meet industry-standard requirements for compressive strength, impact resistance, abrasion resistance, and chemical resistance, as tested per applicable ASTM standards.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Prepare and clean substrates according to resinous flooring manufacturer's written instructions for substrate indicated. Provide clean, dry substrate for resinous flooring application.
B. Concrete Substrates: Provide sound concrete surfaces free of laitance, glaze, efflorescence, curing compounds, form-release agents, dust, dirt, grease, oil, and other contaminants incompatible with resinous flooring.
1. Roughen concrete substrates as follows:
a. Shot-blast surfaces with an apparatus that abrades the concrete surface, contains the dispensed shot within the apparatus, and recirculates the shot by vacuum pickup.
b. Comply with NACE No. 6/SSPC-SP13, with a Concrete Surface Profile (CSP) of 3 or greater in accordance with the International Concrete Repair Institute (ICRI) Technical Guideline No. 310.2R, unless manufacturer's written instructions are more stringent.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Resinous Flooring Renovation & Expansion Final Design 096723 - 5
100% Design Submittal
2. Repair damaged and deteriorated concrete according to resinous flooring manufacturer's written instructions.
3. Verify that concrete substrates are dry and moisture-vapor emissions are within acceptable levels according to manufacturer's written instructions. a. Anhydrous Calcium Chloride Test: ASTM F1869. Proceed with application of resinous flooring only after substrates have maximum moisture-vapor-emission rate of 3 lb. of water/1,000 sq. ft. of slab area in 24 hours. b. Relative Humidity Test: Use in situ probes, ASTM F2170. Proceed with installation only after substrates have a maximum 75 percent relative humidity level measurement.
4. Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Verify that concrete substrates have pH within acceptable range. Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. Proceed with application only after substrates pass testing.
C. Patching and Filling: Use patching and fill material to fill holes and depressions in substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Control Joint Treatment: Treat control joints and other nonmoving substrate cracks to prevent cracks from reflecting through resinous flooring according to manufacturer's written instructions.
D. Resinous Materials: Mix components and prepare materials according to resinous flooring manufacturer's written instructions.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Apply components of resinous flooring system according to manufacturer's written instructions to produce a uniform, monolithic wearing surface of thickness indicated.
1. Coordinate application of components to provide optimum adhesion of resinous flooring system to substrate, and optimum intercoat adhesion.
2. Cure resinous flooring components according to manufacturer's written instructions.
Prevent contamination during application and curing processes.
3. Expansion and Isolation Joint Treatment: At substrate expansion and isolation joints, comply with resinous flooring manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Primer: Apply primer over prepared substrate at manufacturer's recommended spreading rate.
C. Waterproofing Membrane: Apply waterproofing membrane where indicated on Drawings, in manufacturer's recommended thickness.
1. Apply waterproofing membrane to integral cove base substrates.
D. Reinforcing Membrane: Apply reinforcing membrane to substrate cracks.
E. Integral Cove Base: Apply cove base mix to wall surfaces before applying flooring. Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions and details, including those for taping, mixing, priming, troweling, sanding, and topcoating of cove base. Round internal and external corners. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Resinous Flooring Renovation & Expansion Final Design 096723 - 6
100% Design Submittal
1. Integral Cove Base: 4 inches high.
F. Self-Leveling Body Coats: Apply self-leveling slurry body coats in thickness indicated for flooring system.
1. Aggregates: Broadcast aggregates at rate recommended by manufacturer and, after resin is cured, remove excess aggregates to provide surface texture indicated.
G. Troweled or Screeded Body Coats: Apply troweled or screeded body coats in thickness indicated for flooring system. Hand or power trowel and grout to fill voids. When body coats are cured, remove trowel marks and roughness using method recommended by manufacturer.
H. Grout Coat: Apply grout coat, of type recommended by resinous flooring manufacturer, to fill voids in surface of final body coat.
I. Topcoats: Apply topcoats in number indicated for flooring system and at spreading rates recommended in writing by manufacturer and to produce wearing surface indicated.
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Material Sampling: Owner may, at any time and any number of times during resinous flooring application, require material samples for testing for compliance with requirements.
1. Owner will engage an independent testing agency to take samples of materials being used. Material samples will be taken, identified, sealed, and certified in presence of Contractor.
2. Testing agency will test samples for compliance with requirements, using applicable referenced testing procedures or, if not referenced, using testing procedures listed in manufacturer's product data.
3. If test results show applied materials do not comply with specified requirements, pay for testing, remove noncomplying materials, prepare surfaces coated with unacceptable materials, and reapply flooring materials to comply with requirements.
B. Core Sampling: At the direction of Owner and at locations designated by Owner, take one core sample per 1,000 sq. ft. of resinous flooring, or portion of, to verify thickness. For each sample that fails to comply with requirements, take two additional samples. Repair damage caused by coring. Correct deficiencies in installed flooring as indicated by testing.
3.4 PROTECTION
A. Protect resinous flooring from damage and wear during the remainder of construction period.
Use protective methods and materials, including temporary covering, recommended in writing by resinous flooring manufacturer.
END OF SECTION 096723
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Exterior Painting Renovation & Expansion Final Design 099113 - 1
100% Design Submittal
SECTION 099113 - EXTERIOR PAINTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Primers.
2. Finish coatings.
3. Floor sealers and paints.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 055000 "Metal Fabrications" for shop priming metal fabrications.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
1. Include preparation requirements and application instructions.
2. Indicate VOC content.
B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of topcoat product.
C. Product Schedule: Use same designations indicated on Drawings and in the Exterior Painting Schedule to cross-reference paint systems specified in this Section. Include color designations.
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Provide documentation demonstrating that all coatings comply with applicable local or regional air pollution control or air quality management district VOC regulations and CALGreen VOC limits.
1.5 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Paint Products: 5 percent, but not less than 1 gal. of each material and color applied. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Exterior Painting Renovation & Expansion Final Design 099113 - 2
100% Design Submittal
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well-ventilated areas with ambient temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45 deg F.
1. Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue.
2. Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily.
1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Apply paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and ambient air temperatures are between 50 and 95 deg F.
B. Do not apply paints in snow, rain, fog, or mist; when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at temperatures less than 5 deg F above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following:
1. Benjamin Moore & Company (BMC).
2. PPG Paints (PPG).
3. The Sherwin-Williams Company (SWC).
B. Source Limitations: Obtain each paint product from single source from single manufacturer.
2.2 PAINT PRODUCTS, GENERAL
A. Material Compatibility:
1. Provide materials for use within each paint system that are compatible with one another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by manufacturer based on testing and field experience.
2. For each coat in a paint system, provide products recommended in writing by topcoat manufacturer for use in paint system and on substrate indicated.
B. Colors: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
2.3 PRIMERS
A. Exterior, Latex Block Filler: Water-based, pigmented, high-solids, emulsion coating formulated to bridge and fill porous surfaces of exterior concrete masonry units in preparation for specified subsequent coatings.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Exterior Painting Renovation & Expansion Final Design 099113 - 3
100% Design Submittal
1. Minimum Solids Content: Manufacturer's standard percentage solids by volume.
B. Solvent-Based Bonding Primer: Pigmented, solvent-based primer formulated for exterior use and to seal substrates and promote adhesion of specified subsequent coatings.
C. Epoxy Metal Primer: Corrosion-resistant, solvent-based, two-component epoxy primer formulated for use on prepared, exterior ferrous- and galvanized-metal surfaces.
2.4 FINISH COATINGS
A. Exterior Latex Paint, Gloss: Water-based, pigmented, acrylic-copolymer-emulsion coating formulated for alkali, mold, microbial, scrub, blocking (sticking of two painted surfaces), and water resistance and for use on exterior, primed, wood and metal trim, sashes, frames, and doors.
1. Gloss Level: Manufacturer's standard gloss finish.
B. Exterior, High-Build Latex Paint: Water-based, high-build, pigmented, emulsion coating; highsolids content improves filling, uniformity, and film build on concrete masonry surfaces.
Formulated for abrasion, mold, microbial, and wind-driven rain resistance and for use on exterior masonry, concrete masonry unit, and concrete surfaces.
1. Gloss and Sheen Level: Manufacturer's standard low-gloss finish.
2. Minimum Solids Content: Manufacturer's standard percentage solids by volume.
C. High-Build Epoxy Paint, Low Gloss: High-solids, two-component epoxy; formulated for use on exterior concrete, masonry, and primed-metal surfaces.
1. Gloss and Sheen Level: Manufacturer's standard low-gloss finish.
2.5 FLOOR SEALERS AND PAINTS
A. Solvent-Based, Concrete-Floor Sealer: Clear, acrylic, solvent-based sealer formulated for oil, gasoline, alkali, and water resistance and for use on exterior, concrete traffic surfaces.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture meter as follows:
1. Concrete: 12 percent.
2. Masonry (Clay and Concrete Masonry Units): 12 percent.
3. Gypsum Board: 12 percent.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Exterior Painting Renovation & Expansion Final Design 099113 - 4
100% Design Submittal
C. Portland Cement Plaster Substrates: Verify that plaster is fully cured.
D. Exterior Gypsum Board Substrates: Verify that finishing compound is dry and sanded smooth.
E. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility, with finishes and primers.
F. Proceed with coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
1. Application of coating indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions applicable to substrates and paint systems indicated.
B. Remove hardware, covers, plates, and similar items already in place that are removable and are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and painting.
1. After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection.
C. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dust, dirt, oil, grease, and incompatible paints and encapsulants.
1. Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers or apply tie coat as required to produce paint systems specified in this Section.
D. Concrete Substrates: Remove release agents, curing compounds, efflorescence, and chalk. Do not paint surfaces if moisture content or alkalinity of surfaces to be painted exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions.
E. Masonry Substrates: Remove efflorescence and chalk. Do not paint surfaces if moisture content or alkalinity of surfaces or mortar joints exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions.
F. Shop-Primed Steel Substrates: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and areas where shop paint is abraded. Paint exposed areas with the same material as used for shop priming to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-primed surfaces.
G. Galvanized-Metal Substrates: Remove grease and oil residue from galvanized sheet metal by mechanical methods to produce clean, lightly etched surfaces that promote adhesion of subsequently applied paints.
H. Aluminum Substrates: Remove loose surface oxidation.
I. Plastic Trim Fabrication Substrates: Remove dust, dirt, and other foreign material that might impair bond of paints to substrates.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Exterior Painting Renovation & Expansion Final Design 099113 - 5
100% Design Submittal
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Apply paints in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Use applicators and techniques suited for paint and substrate indicated.
2. Paint surfaces behind movable items same as similar exposed surfaces. Before final installation, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed items with prime coat only.
3. Paint both sides and edges of exterior doors and entire exposed surface of exterior door frames.
4. Paint entire exposed surface of window frames and sashes.
5. Do not paint over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates.
6. Primers specified in the Exterior Painting Schedule may be omitted on items that are factory primed or factory finished if compatible with intermediate and topcoat coatings and acceptable to intermediate and topcoat paint manufacturers.
B. Tint undercoats same color as topcoat but tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate identification of each coat if multiple coats of same material are to be applied. Provide sufficient difference in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat.
C. If undercoats or other conditions show through topcoat, apply additional coats until cured film has a uniform paint finish, color, and appearance.
D. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color breaks.
E. Painting Fire Suppression, Plumbing, HVAC, Electrical, Communication, and Electronic Safety and Security Work:
1. Paint the following work where exposed to view:
a. Uninsulated metal piping.
b. Uninsulated plastic piping.
c. Pipe hangers and supports.
d. Metal conduit.
e. Plastic conduit.
f. Tanks that do not have factory-applied final finishes.
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Dry Film Thickness Testing: Owner may engage the services of a qualified testing and inspecting agency to inspect and test paint for dry film thickness.
1. Contractor shall touch up and restore painted surfaces damaged by testing.
2. If test results show that dry film thickness of applied paint does not comply with paint manufacturer's written instructions, Contractor shall pay for testing and apply additional coats as needed to provide dry film thickness that complies with paint manufacturer's written instructions.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Exterior Painting Renovation & Expansion Final Design 099113 - 6
100% Design Submittal
3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from Project site.
1. Do not clean equipment with free-draining water and prevent solvents, thinners, cleaners, and other contaminants from entering into waterways, sanitary and storm drain systems, and ground.
2. Dispose of contaminants in accordance with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
3. Allow empty paint cans to dry before disposal.
4. Collect waste paint by type and deliver to recycling or collection facility.
B. After completing paint application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paints by washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces.
C. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work of other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition.
D. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces.
3.6 EXTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE
A. Concrete Substrates, Nontraffic Surfaces:
1. High-Build Latex System: Dry film thickness of not less than 10 mils. a. Prime Coat: As recommended in writing by topcoat manufacturer. b. Intermediate Coat: As recommended in writing by topcoat manufacturer. c. Topcoat: Exterior, high-build latex paint.
B. Concrete Substrates, Traffic Surfaces:
1. Clear, Solvent-Based Sealer System:
a. Prime Coat: Matching topcoat.
b. Intermediate Coat: Matching topcoat.
c. Topcoat: Solvent-based, concrete-floor sealer.
C. Steel and Iron Substrates:
1. Alkyd System:
a. Prime Coat: Surface-tolerant metal primer.
b. Intermediate Coat: Matching topcoat.
c. Topcoat: Exterior alkyd enamel, semigloss.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Exterior Painting Renovation & Expansion Final Design 099113 - 7
100% Design Submittal
D. Aluminum Substrates:
1. Alkyd System:
a. Pretreatment Coat: Vinyl wash primer.
b. Prime Coat: Quick-drying aluminum primer.
c. Intermediate Coat: Matching topcoat.
d. Topcoat: Exterior alkyd enamel, semigloss.
E. Copper Substrates:
1. Alkyd System:
a. Pretreatment Coat: Vinyl wash primer.
b. Intermediate Coat: Matching topcoat.
c. Topcoat: Exterior alkyd enamel, semigloss.
F. Exterior Gypsum Board Substrates:
1. High-Build Latex System: Dry film thickness of not less than 10 mils. a. Prime Coat: As recommended in writing by topcoat manufacturer. b. Intermediate Coat: As recommended in writing by topcoat manufacturer. c. Topcoat: Exterior, high-build latex paint.
END OF SECTION 099113
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Exterior Painting Renovation & Expansion Final Design 099113 - 8
100% Design Submittal
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Interior Painting Renovation & Expansion Final Design 099123 - 1
100% Design Submittal
SECTION 099123 - INTERIOR PAINTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Primers.
2. Water-based finish coatings.
3. Solvent-based finish coatings.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 055000 "Metal Fabrications" for shop priming metal fabrications.
C. Surfaces not included as part of field-applied finish work, unless otherwise indicated:
1. Pre-finished Items: Do not include painting when factory-finishing or installer-finishing is specified for such items, such as but not limited to architectural woodwork and casework, metal roof edging systems, pre-finished partition systems, acoustic materials, toilet enclosures, elevator entrance doors, frames, and equipment, and mechanical and electrical equipment, including, fixtures, switchgear, distribution cabinets, and light fixtures.
2. Concealed Surfaces: Finishing of walls and ceilings in concealed and generally inaccessible areas, foundation spaces, furred areas, utility tunnels, pipe spaces, duct shafts and elevator shafts.
3. Finished Metal Surfaces: Metal surfaces of anodized aluminum, stainless steel, chromium plate, copper, bronze, and similar finished materials.
4. Operating Parts: Moving parts of operating units, mechanical and electrical parts, such as valve and damper operators, linkages, sensing devices, motors, and fan shafts.
5. Code-required Labels: Do not paint over Underwriters’ Laboratories, Warnock-Hershey or Factory Mutual labels, or any equipment identification, performance rating, name, or nomenclature plates.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. MPI Gloss Levels: Following define gloss levels according to ASTM D 523:
1. MPI Gloss Level 5 - Traditional Semi-Gloss Finish: 35 to 70 units at 60 degrees. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Interior Painting Renovation & Expansion Final Design 099123 - 2
100% Design Submittal
B. Paint: Various coating systems materials, including primers, emulsions, enamels, stains, sealers and fillers, and other applied materials, whether used as prime, intermediate or finish coats.
C. Finished Areas: Interior rooms, areas, and spaces in which exposed surfaces are finished by Work of this Section or other Sections. Non-exposed spaces above suspended ceilings are not to be included as part of painting Work, unless otherwise indicated.
D. Utility Areas: Exterior and interior rooms, areas, and spaces dedicated for plumbing, mechanical, electrical, communication, and safety equipment.
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include preparation requirements and application instructions.
1. Indicate.
2. VOC content.
B. Samples: For each type of topcoat product.
C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of topcoat product.
D. Samples for Verification: For each type of paint system and in each color and gloss of topcoat.
1. Submit Samples on rigid backing, 8 inches square.
2. Apply coats on Samples in steps to show each coat required for system.
3. Label each coat of each Sample.
4. Label each Sample for location and application area.
E. Product List: Cross-reference to paint system and locations of application areas. Use same designations indicated on Drawings and in schedules. Include color designations.
1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Provide documentation demonstrating that all coatings comply with applicable local or regional air pollution control or air quality management district VOC regulations and CALGreen VOC limits.
1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Coating Maintenance Manual: Upon conclusion of painting, Contractor, paint manufacturer, or supplier shall submit a coating maintenance manual, such as Sherwin-Williams “Custodian Project Color and Product Information” report or equal that includes:
1. Area Summary with finish schedule.
2. Area Detail designating where each product, color, and finish was used.
3. Product data pages and safety data sheets.
4. Care and cleaning instructions.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Interior Painting Renovation & Expansion Final Design 099123 - 3
100% Design Submittal
5. Touch-up procedures.
6. Color samples, 4 inches by 5 inches of each color and finish.
1.7 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish extra materials, from the same product run, that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Paint: 5 percent, but not less than 1 gal. of each material and color applied.
1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Mockups: Apply mockups of each paint system indicated and each color and finish selected to verify preliminary selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.
1. Engineer will select one surface to represent surfaces and conditions for application of each paint system.
a. Vertical and Horizontal Surfaces: Provide samples of at least 100 sq. ft. b. Other Items: Engineer will designate items or areas required.
2. Final approval of color selections will be based on mockups. a. If preliminary color selections are not approved, apply additional mockups of additional colors selected by Engineer at no added cost to Owner.
3. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Engineer specifically approves such deviations in writing.
4. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.
1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well-ventilated areas with ambient temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45 degrees F.
1. Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue.
2. Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily.
1.10 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Apply paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and ambient air temperatures are between 50 degrees and 95 degrees F.
B. Do not apply paints when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at temperatures less than 5 degrees F above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Interior Painting Renovation & Expansion Final Design 099123 - 4
100% Design Submittal
C. Lead Paint: It is not expected that lead paint will be encountered in the Work.
1. If suspected lead paint is encountered, do not disturb; immediately notify Engineer and Owner.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following:
1. Benjamin Moore & Company (BMC).
2. PPG Paints (PPG).
3. The Sherwin-Williams Company (SWC).
B. Source Limitations: Obtain paint materials from single source from single listed manufacturer.
1. Manufacturer's designations listed on a separate color schedule are for color reference only and do not indicate prior approval.
2.2 PAINT PRODUCTS, GENERAL
A. Material Compatibility:
1. Materials for use within each paint system shall be compatible with one another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.
2. For each coat in a paint system, products shall be recommended in writing by topcoat manufacturers for use in paint system and on substrate indicated.
B. Colors: As selected by Engineer from manufacturer's full range.
2.3 MIXING
A. Coatings: Ready mixed, except field catalyzed coatings. Process pigments to a soft paste consistency, capable of being readily and uniformly dispersed to a homogenous coating with good flow and brushing properties, and capable of drying or curing free of streaks or sags.
B. Mix and prepare painting materials in accordance with manufacturer's directions.
C. Maintain containers used in mixing and application of paint in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue.
D. Stir materials before application to produce a mixture of uniform density and stir during application. Do not stir surface film into material. Remove film and strain material before using.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Interior Painting Renovation & Expansion Final Design 099123 - 5
100% Design Submittal
E. Do not thin painting materials unless recommended by manufacturer. When paint thinning is required, comply with manufacturer's printed instructions; use only thinners approved by paint manufacturer.
2.4 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing of Paint Materials: Owner reserves the right to invoke the following procedure:
1. Owner will engage the services of a qualified testing agency to sample paint materials.
Contractor will be notified in advance and may be present when samples are taken. If paint materials have already been delivered to Project site, samples may be taken at Project site. Samples will be identified, sealed, and certified by testing agency.
2. Testing agency will perform tests for compliance with product requirements.
3. Owner may direct Contractor to stop applying paints if test results show materials being used do not comply with product requirements. Contractor shall remove noncomplying paint materials from Project site, pay for testing, and repaint surfaces painted with rejected materials. Contractor will be required to remove rejected materials from previously painted surfaces if, on repainting with complying materials, the two paints are incompatible.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
1. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions.
2. Where acceptability of substrate conditions is in question, apply samples and perform insitu testing to verify compatibility, adhesion, and film integrity of new paint application.
3. Report, in writing, conditions that may affect application, appearance, or performance of paint.
B. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture meter as follows:
1. Concrete: 12 percent.
2. Masonry (CMUs): 12 percent.
3. Gypsum Board: 12 percent.
C. Gypsum Board Substrates: Verify that finishing compound is sanded smooth.
D. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility, with existing finishes and primers.
1. Application of coating indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.
2. Repainting of Previously Painted Surfaces: Verify conditions and compatibility between new and existing painting products.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Interior Painting Renovation & Expansion Final Design 099123 - 6
100% Design Submittal
E. Proceed with coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
Application of coating indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Comply with paint manufacturer's written preparation instructions and recommendations applicable to substrates and paint systems indicated.
B. Remove hardware, covers, plates, and similar items already in place that are removable and are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and painting.
1. After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection if any.
C. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dust, dirt, oil, grease, rust, scale, and incompatible paints and encapsulants.
1. Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers or apply tie coat as required to produce paint systems indicated.
2. Remove mildew, efflorescence, deleterious films, and foreign material from surface by appropriate methods as recommended by manufacturer.
D. Concrete Substrates: Remove release agents, curing compounds, efflorescence, and chalk. Do not paint surfaces if moisture content or alkalinity of surfaces to be painted exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Concrete Floors: Remove oil, dust, grease, dirt, and other foreign materials. Comply with SSPC-SP-13/NACE 6 or ICRI 03732.
E. Masonry Substrates: Remove efflorescence and chalk. Do not paint surfaces if moisture content or alkalinity of surfaces or mortar joints exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions.
F. Steel Substrates: Remove rust, loose mill scale, and shop primer, if any. Clean using methods recommended in writing by paint manufacturer but not less than the following:
1. SSPC-SP 2, "Hand Tool Cleaning.”
2. SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning.”
3. SSPC-SP 7/NACE No. 4, "Brush-off Blast Cleaning.”
4. SSPC-SP 11, "Power Tool Cleaning to Bare Metal.”
G. Shop-Primed Steel Substrates: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and areas where shop paint is abraded. Paint exposed areas with the same material as used for shop priming to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-primed surfaces.
H. Galvanized-Metal Substrates: Remove grease and oil residue from galvanized sheet metal by mechanical methods to produce clean, lightly etched surfaces that promote adhesion of subsequently applied paints.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Interior Painting Renovation & Expansion Final Design 099123 - 7
100% Design Submittal
1. SSPC-SP 16, "Brush-Off Blast Cleaning of Coated and Uncoated Galvanized Steel, Stainless Steels, and Non-Ferrous Metals.”
I. Aluminum Substrates: Remove loose surface oxidation.
J. All Substrates: Remove foreign materials, dust, dirt, and other deleterious films that impairs bond of paints to substrates.
K. Previously Finished Surfaces: Comply with paint manufacturer’s specifications appropriate for substrate to be coated, for proper preparation of previously finished surfaces.
3.3 APPLICATION
A. Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Use applicators and techniques suited for paint and substrate indicated.
2. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar exposed surfaces.
Before final installation, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only.
3. Paint front and backsides of access panels, removable or hinged covers, and similar hinged items to match exposed surfaces.
4. Do not paint over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates.
5. Primers specified in painting schedules may be omitted on items that are factory primed or factory finished if acceptable to topcoat manufacturers.
6. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations for drying time required between succeeding coats.
B. Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate identification of each coat if multiple coats of same material are to be applied. Tint undercoats to match color of topcoat, but provide sufficient difference in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat.
C. If undercoats or other conditions show through topcoat, apply additional coats until cured film has a uniform paint finish, color, and appearance.
D. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color breaks.
E. Provide barrier coats over incompatible primers or remove and re-prime as required. Notify Engineer in writing of anticipated problems in using specified coating systems with substrates primed by others.
F. Painting Fire Suppression, Plumbing, HVAC, Electrical, Communication, and Electronic Safety and Security Work:
1. Paint the following work where exposed in equipment rooms:
a. Uninsulated metal piping.
b. Uninsulated plastic piping.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Interior Painting Renovation & Expansion Final Design 099123 - 8
100% Design Submittal
c. Pipe hangers and supports.
d. Metal conduit.
e. Plastic conduit.
f. Tanks that do not have factory-applied final finishes. g. Duct, equipment, and pipe insulation having cotton or canvas insulation covering or other paintable jacket material.
2. Paint the following work where exposed in occupied spaces:
a. Equipment, including panelboards.
b. Uninsulated metal piping.
c. Uninsulated plastic piping.
d. Pipe hangers and supports.
e. Metal conduit.
f. Plastic conduit.
g. Duct, equipment, and pipe insulation having cotton or canvas insulation covering or other paintable jacket material.
h. Other items as directed by Engineer.
3. Paint portions of internal surfaces of metal ducts, without liner, behind air inlets and outlets that are visible from occupied spaces.
G. Film Thickness: Apply paint in wet film thickness (WFT) recommended by paint manufacturer to achieve specified dry film thickness (DFT) for each coat of paint. Since DFT varies among manufacturers, this reference is not included in Article “Interior Painting Schedule.”
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Dry Film Thickness Testing: Owner may engage the services of a qualified testing and inspecting agency to inspect and test paint for dry film thickness.
1. Contractor shall touch up and restore painted surfaces damaged by testing.
2. If test results show that dry film thickness of applied paint does not comply with paint manufacturer's written recommendations, Contractor shall pay for testing and apply additional coats as needed to provide dry film thickness that complies with paint manufacturer's written recommendations.
3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from Project site.
1. Do not clean equipment with free-draining water and prevent solvents, thinners, cleaners, and other contaminants from entering into waterways, sanitary and storm drain systems, and ground.
2. Dispose of contaminants in accordance with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
3. Allow empty paint cans to dry before disposal.
4. Collect waste paint by type and deliver to recycling or collection facility. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Interior Painting Renovation & Expansion Final Design 099123 - 9
100% Design Submittal
B. After completing paint application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paints by washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces.
C. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work of other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Engineer, and leave in an undamaged condition.
D. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces.
3.6 INTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE
A. Paragraphs below identify specific painting materials and appropriate specified painting system to be used on a particular substrate; actual substrate material surfaces for this Project shall be as indicated in this Interior Painting Schedule and as indicated on Drawings.
B. Concrete Substrates, Nontraffic Surfaces.
1. Latex System - Walls and Ceilings:
a. Prime Coat: Alkali resistant acrylic latex:
1) SWC: Loxon Concrete & Masonry Primer/Sealer, LX02-50 Series. 2) PPG: Perma-Crete Interior/Exterior Alkali Resistant Primer 4-603XI. 3) BMC: Ultra Spec 500 Interior Latex Primer N534.
b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, matching topcoat.
c. Topcoat: Acrylic latex enamel, semi-gloss finish (MPI Gloss Level 5):
1) SWC: ProMar 200 Zero VOC Latex Semi-Gloss, B31-12650 Series. 2) PPG: Speedhide Zero Interior Zero VOC Latex Semi-Gloss 6-4510XI. 3) BMC: Ultra Spec 500 Interior Semi-Gloss Finish N539.
C. CMU Substrates.
1. Light Industrial Water Based System - Walls:
a. Block Filler: Acrylic latex, interior/exterior:
1) SWC: Heavy Duty Block Filler - B42W46.
2) PPG: Speedhide Int/Ext Hi Fill Acrylic Latex Block Filler 6-15XI. 3) BMC: Corotech Acrylic Block Filler V114.
b. Primer: Alkali resistant, latex, flat.
1) SWC: Loxon Concrete & Masonry Primer, LX-50 Series.
2) PPG: Perma-Crete Int/Ext Alkali Resistant Primer, 4-603XI. 3) BMC: Acrylic High-Build Masonry Primer, 609/K609.
c. Intermediate Coat: Latex, matching topcoat.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Interior Painting Renovation & Expansion Final Design 099123 - 10
100% Design Submittal
d. Topcoat: Acrylic latex enamel, semi-gloss finish (MPI Gloss Level 5):
1) SWC: Pro Industrial Pre-Catalyzed Waterbased Epoxy Semi-Gloss, K46- 1150 Series.
2) PPG: Pitt-Glaze WB1 Interior Semi-Gloss Pre-Catalyzed Water-Borne Acrylic Epoxy 16-510 Series.
3) BMC: Corotech Pre-Catalyzed Waterborne Epoxy Semi- Gloss V341.
D. Steel Substrates.
1. Light Industrial Water Based Alkyd System:
a. Prime Coat: Primer, rust-inhibitive, water-based:
1) SWC: Pro Industrial Pro-Cryl Universal Primer, B66-310 Series. 2) PPG: Pitt-Tech Int/Ext WB Acrylic Primer DTM Industrial Enamel 90-712. 3) BMC: Acrylic Metal Primer HP04.
b. Prime Coat: Primer, epoxy, anti-corrosive, for metal:
1) SWC: Kem Bond HS Metal Primer, B50WZ series.
2) PPG: Multiprime 4360 Int/Ext Alkyd Industrial Primer. 3) BMC: Corotech Epoxy Mastic V160.
c. Prime Coat: Shop primer specified in Section where substrate is specified. d. Intermediate Coat: Matching topcoat.
e. Topcoat: Waterbased alkyd, interior, light industrial, semi-gloss finish (MPI Gloss Level 5):
1) SWC: Pro Industrial Waterbased Alkyd Urethane Semi-Gloss, B53-1150 series.
2) PPG: Pitt-Tech Plus Int/Ext Semi-Gloss DTM Industrial Enamel 90-1210 Series.
3) BMC: Ultra Spec DTM Semi-Gloss HP29.
E. Galvanized-Metal Substrates:
1. Modified Alkyd System: Light Industrial Water Based Alkyd System. a. Prime Coat: Primer, galvanized, water-based:
1) SWC: Pro Industrial Pro-Cryl Universal Primer, B66-310 Series. 2) PPG: Pitt-Tech Plus 4020 WB Acrylic DTM Industrial Primer. 3) BMC: Latex Metal Primer HP04.
b. Intermediate Coat: Matching topcoat.
c. Topcoat: Water-based alkyd, interior, semi-gloss finish (MPI Gloss Level 5). 1) SWC: Pro Industrial Waterbased Alkyd Urethane Semi-Gloss, B53-1150. 2) PPG: Speedhide Interior/Exterior WB Alkyd Semi-Gloss Enamel 6-1510XI Series.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Interior Painting Renovation & Expansion Final Design 099123 - 11
100% Design Submittal
3) BMC: Advance Semi-Gloss Waterborne Alkyd 793.
F. Aluminum (Not Anodized or Otherwise Coated) Substrates:
1. Light Industrial Water Based Alkyd System:
a. Prime Coat: Primer, water-based for aluminum:
1) SWC: Pro Industrial Pro-Cryl Universal Primer, B66-310 Series. 2) PPG: Pitt-Tech Plus 4020 WB Acrylic DTM Industrial Primer. 3) BMC: Acrylic Latex Metal Primer HP04.
b. Intermediate Coat: Matching topcoat.
c. Topcoat: Water-based alkyd, interior, gloss finish (MPI Gloss Level 5):
1) SWC: Pro Industrial Waterbased Alkyd Urethane Gloss, B53-1050 series. 2) PPG: Speedhide Interior/Exterior WB Alkyd Gloss Enamel 6-1610XI Series.
3) BMC: Advance High Gloss Waterborne Alkyd N794.
G. Gypsum Board Substrates:
1. Latex over Latex Sealer System:
a. Prime Coat: Primer sealer, latex, interior.
1) SWC: ProMar 200 Zero VOC Latex Primer, B28-2600.
2) PPG: Speedhide Zero Interior ZERO VOC Latex Sealer 6-4900XI. 3) BMC: Ultra Spec 500 Interior Primer N534.
b. Intermediate Coat: Matching topcoat.
c. Topcoat: Latex, interior, semi-gloss finish (MPI Gloss Level 5):
1) SWC: ProMar 200 Zero VOC Interior Latex Semi-Gloss, B31-12650 Series. 2) PPG: Speedhide Zero Interior Zero VOC Latex Semi-Gloss 6-4510XI Series.
3) BMC: Ultra Spec 500 Interior Semi-Gloss Finish N539.
END OF SECTION 099123
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Interior Painting Renovation & Expansion Final Design 099123 - 12
100% Design Submittal
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
Division 10
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Room-Identification Panel Signage Renovation & Expansion Final Design 101423.16 - 1
100% Design Submittal
SECTION 101423.16 - ROOM-IDENTIFICATION PANEL SIGNAGE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes room-identification signs that are directly attached to the building.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 101413 “Panel Signage” for restrictive, warning, and hazardous materials identification signs.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Accessible: In accordance with the accessibility standard.
1.4 COORDINATION
A. Furnish templates for placement of sign-anchorage devices embedded in permanent construction by other installers.
B. Furnish templates for placement of electrical service embedded in permanent construction by other installers.
1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
B. Shop Drawings: For room-identification signs.
1. Include fabrication and installation details and attachments to other work.
2. Show sign mounting heights, locations of supplementary supports to be provided by other installers, and accessories.
3. Show message list, typestyles, graphic elements, including raised characters and Braille, and layout for each sign at least half size.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Room-Identification Panel Signage Renovation & Expansion Final Design 101423.16 - 2
100% Design Submittal
C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of sign assembly, exposed component, and exposed finish.
1. Include representative Samples of available typestyles and graphic symbols.
D. Samples for Verification: For each type of sign assembly showing all components and with the required finish(es), in manufacturer's standard size unless otherwise indicated and as follows:
1. Room-Identification Signs: Full-size Sample.
2. Variable Component Materials: 8-inch Sample of each base material, character (letter, number, and graphic element) in each exposed color and finish not included in Samples above.
3. Exposed Accessories: Full-size Sample of each accessory type.
E. Product Schedule: For room-identification signs. Use same designations indicated on Drawings or specified.
1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For manufacturer and Installer.
B. Sample Warranty: For special warranty.
1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Maintenance Data: For signs to include in maintenance manuals.
1.8 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish extra materials, from the same product run, that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Variable Component Materials: 12 replaceable text inserts and interchangeable characters (letters, numbers, and graphic elements) of each type.
2. Tools: One set(s) of specialty tools for assembling signs and replacing variable sign components.
1.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: An entity that employs installers and supervisors who are trained and approved by manufacturer.
1.10 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Verify locations of anchorage devices and electrical service embedded in permanent construction by other installers by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Room-Identification Panel Signage Renovation & Expansion Final Design 101423.16 - 3
100% Design Submittal
1.11 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of signs that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Deterioration of finishes beyond normal weathering.
b. Deterioration of embedded graphic image.
c. Separation or delamination of sheet materials and components.
2. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Accessibility Standard: Comply with applicable provisions in the USDOJ's "2010 ADA Standards for Accessible Design".
2.2 ROOM-IDENTIFICATION SIGNS
A. Room-Identification Sign: Sign system with smooth, uniform surfaces; with message and characters having uniform faces, sharp corners, and precisely formed lines and profiles; and as follows:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
a. ACE Sign Systems, Inc.
b. ASI Sign Systems, Inc.
c. Seton Identification Products; a Brady Corporation company.
2. Laminated-Sheet Sign: Photopolymer face sheet with raised graphics laminated over subsurface graphics to acrylic backing sheet to produce composite sheet. a. Composite-Sheet Thickness: Manufacturer's standard for size of sign. b. Surface-Applied Graphics: Applied photo image.
c. Color(s): Match Engineer's sample.
3. Sign-Panel Perimeter: Finish edges smooth.
a. Edge Condition at Vertical Edges at Horizontal Edges: Square cut. b. Corner Condition in Elevation: Square.
4. Frame: Entire perimeter.
a. Material: Aluminum.
b. Corner Condition in Elevation: Mitered.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Room-Identification Panel Signage Renovation & Expansion Final Design 101423.16 - 4
100% Design Submittal
c. Finish and Color: As selected by Engineer from manufacturer's full range.
5. Mounting: Manufacturer's standard method for substrates indicated with concealed anchors or magnetic tape.
6. Text and Typeface: Finish raised characters to contrast with background color, and finish Braille to match background color.
2.3 SIGN MATERIALS
A. Aluminum Sheet and Plate: ASTM B209, alloy and temper recommended by aluminum producer and finisher for type of use and finish indicated.
B. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B221, alloy and temper recommended by aluminum producer and finisher for type of use and finish indicated.
C. Acrylic Sheet: ASTM D4802, category as standard with manufacturer for each sign, Type UVF (UV filtering).
D. Paints and Coatings for Sheet Materials: Inks, dyes, and paints that are recommended by manufacturer for optimum adherence to surface and are UV and water resistant for colors and exposure indicated.
2.4 ACCESSORIES
A. Fasteners and Anchors: Manufacturer's standard as required for secure anchorage of signs, noncorrosive and compatible with each material joined, and complying with the following:
1. Use concealed fasteners and anchors unless indicated to be exposed.
2. For exterior exposure, furnish stainless-steel devices unless otherwise indicated.
3. Exposed Metal-Fastener Components, General:
a. Fabricated from same basic metal and finish of fastened sign unless otherwise indicated.
b. Fastener Heads: Use flathead or oval countersunk screws and bolts with tamperresistant Allen-head slots unless otherwise indicated.
4. Sign Mounting Fasteners:
a. Concealed Studs: Concealed (blind), threaded studs welded or brazed to back of sign material or screwed into back of sign assembly unless otherwise indicated. b. Through Fasteners: Exposed metal fasteners matching sign finish, with type of head indicated, and installed in predrilled holes.
B. Adhesive: As recommended by sign manufacturer.
C. Two-Face Tape: Manufacturer's standard high-bond, foam-core tape, 0.045 inch thick, with adhesive on both sides.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Room-Identification Panel Signage Renovation & Expansion Final Design 101423.16 - 5
100% Design Submittal
2.5 FABRICATION
A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard sign assemblies according to requirements indicated.
1. Preassemble signs and assemblies in the shop to greatest extent possible. Disassemble signs and assemblies only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and installation; apply markings in locations concealed from view after final assembly.
2. Mill joints to a tight, hairline fit. Form assemblies and joints exposed to weather to resist water penetration and retention.
3. Conceal connections if possible; otherwise, locate connections where they are inconspicuous.
4. Provide rabbets, lugs, and tabs necessary to assemble components and to attach to existing work. Drill and tap for required fasteners. Use concealed fasteners where possible; use exposed fasteners that match sign finish.
B. Subsurface-Applied Graphics: Apply graphics to back face of clear face-sheet material to produce precisely formed image. Ensure image is free of rough edges.
C. Subsurface-Etched Graphics: Reverse etch back face of clear face-sheet material. Fill resulting copy with manufacturer's standard enamel. Apply opaque manufacturer's standard background color coating over enamel-filled copy.
2.6 GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS
A. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.
B. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable.
Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.
2.7 ALUMINUM FINISHES
A. Color Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, Class I, 0.018 mm or thicker.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install signs using mounting methods indicated and according to manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Install signs level, plumb, true to line, and at locations and heights indicated, with sign surfaces free of distortion and other defects in appearance.
2. Install signs so they do not protrude or obstruct according to the accessibility standard.
3. Before installation, verify that sign surfaces are clean and free of materials or debris that would impair installation.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Room-Identification Panel Signage Renovation & Expansion Final Design 101423.16 - 6
100% Design Submittal
B. Accessibility: Install signs in locations on walls according to the accessibility standard.
C. Mounting Methods:
1. Adhesive: Clean bond-breaking materials from substrate surface and remove loose debris. Apply linear beads or spots of adhesive symmetrically to back of sign and of suitable quantity to support weight of sign after cure without slippage. Keep adhesive away from edges to prevent adhesive extrusion as sign is applied and to prevent visibility of cured adhesive at sign edges. Place sign in position and push to engage adhesive.
Temporarily support sign in position until adhesive fully sets.
3.2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Remove and replace damaged or deformed signs and signs that do not comply with specified requirements. Replace signs with damaged or deteriorated finishes or components that cannot be successfully repaired by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.
B. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as signs are installed.
C. On completion of installation, clean exposed surfaces of signs according to manufacturer's written instructions and touch up minor nicks and abrasions in finish. Maintain signs in a clean condition during construction and protect from damage until acceptance by Owner.
END OF SECTION 101423.16
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Toilet, Bath, and Laundry Accessories Renovation & Expansion Final Design 102800 - 1
100% Design Submittal
SECTION 102800 - TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Public-use washroom accessories.
2. Under lavatory guards.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 093013 "Ceramic Tiling" for ceramic toilet and bath accessories.
1.3 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate accessory locations with other work to prevent interference with clearances required for access by people with disabilities, and for proper installation, adjustment, operation, cleaning, and servicing of accessories.
B. Deliver inserts and anchoring devices set into concrete or masonry as required to prevent delaying the Work.
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes.
2. Include anchoring and mounting requirements, including requirements for cutouts in other work and substrate preparation.
3. Include electrical characteristics.
B. Samples: For each exposed product and for each finish specified, full size.
1. Approved full-size Samples will be returned and may be used in the Work. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Toilet, Bath, and Laundry Accessories Renovation & Expansion Final Design 102800 - 2
100% Design Submittal
C. Product Schedule: Indicating types, quantities, sizes, and installation locations by room of each accessory required.
1. Identify locations using room designations indicated.
2. Identify accessories using designations indicated.
1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Sample Warranty: For manufacturer's special warranties.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
B. Structural Performance: Design accessories and fasteners to comply with the following requirements:
1. Grab Bars: Installed units are able to resist 250 lbf concentrated load applied in any direction and at any point.
2.2 PUBLIC-USE WASHROOM ACCESSORIES
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by Bradley Corporation, comparable product by the following or equal:
1. Bobrick.
2. Bradley
B. Source Limitations: Obtain public-use washroom accessories from single source from single manufacturer.
C. Toilet Tissue (Roll) Dispenser:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following:
a. Bradley Washroom Equipment, Inc.
2. Description: Combination Unit: Bradley Model #5912.
3. Mounting: Surface mounted.
4. Operation: Eccentric-shaped, molded-plastic spindle revolves one-half revolution per dispensing operation for controlled delivery; core cannot be removed until roll is empty.
5. Capacity: Designed for 4-1/2- or 5-inch- diameter tissue rolls.
6. Material and Finish: Stainless steel, ASTM A480/A480M No. 4 finish (satin). ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Toilet, Bath, and Laundry Accessories Renovation & Expansion Final Design 102800 - 3
100% Design Submittal
D. Combination Towel (Folded) Dispenser/Waste Receptacle:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following:
a. Bradley Corporation.
2. Bradley Model #2291.
3. Description: Combination unit for dispensing C-fold or multifold towels, with removable waste receptacle.
4. Mounting: Recessed.
a. Designed for nominal 6-inch wall depth.
5. Minimum Towel-Dispenser Capacity: 600 C-fold or 800 multifold paper towels.
6. Minimum Waste-Receptacle Capacity: 4 gal.
7. Material and Finish: Stainless steel, ASTM A480/A480M No. 4 finish (satin).
8. Lockset: Tumbler type for towel-dispenser compartment.
E. Automatic Soap Dispenser:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following:
a. Bradley Corporation.
2. Bradley Model #6562.
3. Description: Automatic dispenser with infrared sensor to detect presence of hands; battery powered; designed for dispensing soap in liquid or lotion form.
4. Mounting: Surface wall mounted.
5. Capacity: 30 oz.
Materials: Stainless steel, No. 4 finish (satin).
6. Refill Indicator: LED indicator.
7. Low-Battery Indicator: LED indicator.
F. Grab Bar:
1. Mounting: Flanges with concealed fasteners.
2. Material: Stainless steel, 0.05 inch thick.
a. Finish: Smooth, ASTM A480/A480M No. 4 finish (satin) on ends and slipresistant texture in grip area.
3. Outside Diameter: 1-1/4 inches.
4. Configuration and Length: As indicated on Drawings.
G. Sanitary-Napkin Disposal Unit:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following:
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Toilet, Bath, and Laundry Accessories Renovation & Expansion Final Design 102800 - 4
100% Design Submittal
a. Bradley Corporation.
2. Mounting: Recessed.
3. Description: Model #591.
4. Door or Cover: Self-closing, disposal-opening cover.
5. Receptacle: Removable.
6. Material and Finish: Stainless steel, ASTM A480/A480M No. 4 finish (satin).
H. Seat-Cover Dispenser:
1. Mounting: Surface mounted.
2. Minimum Capacity: 500 seat covers.
3. Exposed Material and Finish: Stainless steel, ASTM A480/A480M No. 4 finish (satin).
4. Lockset: Tumbler type.
I. Mirror Unit:
1. Frame: Stainless steel channel.
a. Corners: Manufacturer's standard.
2. Size: As indicated on Drawings.
3. Hangers: Manufacturer's standard rigid, tamper and theft resistant.
J. Hook:
1. Description: Double-prong unit.
2. Mounting: Concealed.
3. Material and Finish: Stainless steel, ASTM A480/A480M No. 4 finish (satin).
K. Baby Changing Station:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following:
a. Koala Care.
2. Mounting: Surface mounted.
3. Description: KB310-SSWM.
2.3 UNDERLAVATORY GUARDS
A. Underlavatory Guard:
1. Description: Insulating pipe covering for supply and drain piping assemblies that prevents direct contact with and burns from piping; allow service access without removing coverings.
2. Material and Finish: Antimicrobial, molded plastic, white. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Toilet, Bath, and Laundry Accessories Renovation & Expansion Final Design 102800 - 5
100% Design Submittal
2.4 MATERIALS
A. Stainless Steel: ASTM A240/A240M or ASTM A666, Type 304, 0.031-inch- minimum nominal thickness unless otherwise indicated.
B. Brass: ASTM B19, flat products; ASTM B16/B16M, rods, shapes, forgings, and flat products with finished edges; or ASTM B30, castings.
C. Steel Sheet: ASTM A1008/A1008M, Designation CS (cold rolled, commercial steel), 0.036- inch- minimum nominal thickness.
D. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: ASTM A653/A653M, with G60 hot-dip zinc coating.
E. Galvanized-Steel Mounting Devices: ASTM A153/A153M, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication.
F. Fasteners: Screws, bolts, and other devices of same material as accessory unit, unless otherwise recommended by manufacturer or specified in this Section, and tamper and theft resistant where exposed, and of stainless or galvanized steel where concealed.
G. Chrome Plating: ASTM B456, Service Condition Number SC 2 (moderate service).
H. Mirrors: ASTM C1503, Mirror Glazing Quality, clear-glass mirrors, nominal 6.0 mm thick.
2.5 FABRICATION
A. General: Fabricate units with tight seams and joints, and exposed edges rolled. Hang doors and access panels with full-length, continuous hinges. Equip units for concealed anchorage and with corrosion-resistant backing plates.
B. Keys: Provide universal keys for internal access to accessories for servicing and resupplying.
Provide minimum of six keys to Owner's representative.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install accessories according to manufacturers' written instructions, using fasteners appropriate to substrate indicated and recommended by unit manufacturer. Install units level, plumb, and firmly anchored in locations and at heights indicated.
1. Remove temporary labels and protective coatings.
B. Grab Bars: Install to comply with specified structural-performance requirements.
3.2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Adjust accessories for unencumbered, smooth operation. Replace damaged or defective items. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Toilet, Bath, and Laundry Accessories Renovation & Expansion Final Design 102800 - 6
100% Design Submittal
B. Clean and polish exposed surfaces according to manufacturer's written instructions.
END OF SECTION 102800
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Toilet, Bath, and Laundry Accessories Renovation & Expansion Final Design 102800 - 7
100% Design Submittal
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Fire Protection Cabinets Renovation & Expansion Final Design 104413 - 1
100% Design Submittal
SECTION 104413 - FIRE PROTECTION CABINETS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Fire-protection cabinets for the following:
a. Portable fire extinguisher.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 104416 "Fire Extinguishers" for portable, hand-carried fire extinguishers accommodated by fire-protection cabinets
1.3 PREINSTALLATION CONFERENCE
A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
1. Review methods and procedures related to fire-protection cabinets, including, but not limited to, the following:
a. Schedules and coordination requirements.
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
1. Show door hardware, cabinet type, trim style, and panel style. Include roughing-in dimensions and details showing semi-recessed method and relationships of box and trim to surrounding construction.
B. Shop Drawings: For fire-protection cabinets.
1. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.
C. Samples: For each type of exposed finish required.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Fire Protection Cabinets Renovation & Expansion Final Design 104413 - 2
100% Design Submittal
D. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, prepared on samples 6 by 6 inches square.
E. Product Schedule: For fire-protection cabinets. Indicate semi-recessed. Coordinate final fireprotection cabinet schedule with fire-extinguisher schedule to ensure proper fit and function. Use same designations indicated on Drawings.
1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Maintenance Data: For fire-protection cabinets to include in maintenance manuals.
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate size of fire-protection cabinets to ensure that type and capacity of fire extinguishers indicated are accommodated.
B. Coordinate sizes and locations of fire-protection cabinets with wall depths.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Source Limitations: Obtain fire-protection cabinets, accessories, and fire extinguishers from single source from single manufacturer.
2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Fire-Rated Fire-Protection Cabinets: Listed and labeled to comply with requirements in ASTM E814 for fire-resistance rating of walls where they are installed.
2.3 FIRE-PROTECTION CABINET (FEC)
A. Cabinet Type: Suitable for fire extinguisher.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
a. Babcock-Davis.
b. JL Industries; Activar Construction Products Group, Inc. c. Larsen's Manufacturing Company.
B. Cabinet Construction: Nonrated.
C. Cabinet Material: Aluminum sheet.
1. Shelf: Same metal and finish as cabinet.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Fire Protection Cabinets Renovation & Expansion Final Design 104413 - 3
100% Design Submittal
D. Semi-Recessed Cabinet: One-piece combination trim and perimeter door frame overlapping surrounding wall surface, with exposed trim face and wall return at outer edge (backbend).
1. Square-Edge Trim: 1-1/4- to 1-1/2-inch backbend depth.
E. Cabinet Trim Material: Aluminum sheet and Same material and finish as door.
F. Door Material: Aluminum sheet.
G. Door Style: Center glass panel with frame.
H. Door Glazing: Tempered float glass (clear).
I. Door Hardware: Manufacturer's standard door-operating hardware of proper type for cabinet type, trim style, and door material and style indicated.
1. Provide manufacturer's standard.
2. Provide manufacturer's standard hinge, permitting door to open 180 degrees.
J. Accessories:
1. Mounting Bracket: Manufacturer's standard steel, designed to secure fire extinguisher to fire-protection cabinet, of sizes required for types and capacities of fire extinguishers indicated, with plated or baked-enamel finish.
2. Break-Glass Door Handle: Manufacturer's standard, integral to glass with the words "PULL TO BREAK GLASS" applied to handle.
3. Lettered Door Handle: One-piece, cast-iron door handle with the word "FIRE" embossed into face.
4. Door Lock: Cam lock that allows door to be opened during emergency by pulling sharply on door handle.
5. Identification: Lettering complying with authorities having jurisdiction for letter style, size, spacing, and location. Locate as indicated.
a. Identify fire extinguisher in fire-protection cabinet with the words "FIRE EXTINGUISHER."
1) Location: Applied to location indicated on Drawings. 2) Application Process: Pressure-sensitive vinyl letters. 3) Lettering Color: Red.
4) Orientation: Vertical.
6. Alarm: Manufacturer's standard alarm that actuates when fire-protection cabinet door is opened and that is powered by batteries.
K. Materials:
1. Aluminum: ASTM B221 for extruded shapes and aluminum sheet, with strength and durability characteristics of not less than Alloy 6063-T5 for aluminum sheet. a. Finish: Baked enamel or powder coat.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Fire Protection Cabinets Renovation & Expansion Final Design 104413 - 4
100% Design Submittal
b. Color: As selected by Engineer from full range of industry colors and color densities.
2. Tempered Float Glass: ASTM C1048, Kind FT, Condition A, Type I, Quality q3, 3 mm thick, Class 1 (clear).
2.4 FABRICATION
A. Fire-Protection Cabinets: Provide manufacturer's standard box (tub) with trim, frame, door, and hardware to suit cabinet type, trim style, and door style indicated.
1. Weld joints and grind smooth.
2. Miter corners and grind smooth.
3. Provide factory-drilled mounting holes.
4. Prepare doors and frames to receive locks.
5. Install door locks at factory.
B. Cabinet Doors: Fabricate doors according to manufacturer's standards, from materials indicated and coordinated with cabinet types and trim styles.
1. Fabricate door frames with tubular stiles and rails and hollow-metal design, minimum 1/2 inch thick.
2. Miter and weld perimeter door frames and grind smooth.
C. Cabinet Trim: Fabricate cabinet trim in one piece with corners mitered, welded, and ground smooth.
2.5 GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS
A. Comply with NAAMM's AMP 500, "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products," for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces of fire-protection cabinets from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.
C. Finish fire-protection cabinets after assembly.
D. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are unacceptable. Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine walls and partitions for suitable framing depth and blocking where semi-recessed cabinets will be installed.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Fire Protection Cabinets Renovation & Expansion Final Design 104413 - 5
100% Design Submittal
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Prepare recesses for semi-recessed fire-protection cabinets as required by type and size of cabinet and trim style.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install fire-protection cabinets in locations and at mounting heights indicated or, if not indicated, at heights acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Fire-Protection Cabinets: 60 inches above finished floor to top of fire extinguisher.
B. Fire-Protection Cabinets: Fasten cabinets to structure, square and plumb.
1. Provide inside latch and lock for break-glass panels.
2. Fasten mounting brackets to inside surface of fire-protection cabinets, square and plumb.
C. Identification:
1. Apply vinyl lettering at locations indicated.
2. Apply vinyl lettering on field-painted fire-protection cabinets after painting is complete.
3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as fire-protection cabinets are installed unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions.
B. Adjust fire-protection cabinet doors to operate easily without binding. Verify that integral locking devices operate properly.
C. On completion of fire-protection cabinet installation, clean interior and exterior surfaces as recommended by manufacturer.
D. Touch up marred finishes or replace fire-protection cabinets that cannot be restored to factoryfinished appearance. Use only materials and procedures recommended or furnished by fireprotection cabinet and mounting bracket manufacturers.
E. Replace fire-protection cabinets that have been damaged or have deteriorated beyond successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.
END OF SECTION 104413
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Fire Protection Cabinets Renovation & Expansion Final Design 104413 - 6
100% Design Submittal
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Fire Extinguishers Renovation & Expansion Final Design 104416 - 1
100% Design Submittal
SECTION 104416 - FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes portable, hand-carried fire extinguishers and mounting brackets for fire extinguishers.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 104413 "Fire Protection Cabinets."
1.3 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS
A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
1. Review methods and procedures related to fire extinguishers including, but not limited to, the following:
a. Schedules and coordination requirements.
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include rating and classification, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for fire extinguisher and mounting brackets.
B. Product Schedule: For fire extinguishers. Coordinate final fire-extinguisher schedule with fireprotection cabinet schedule to ensure proper fit and function. Use same designations indicated on Drawings.
1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Warranty: Sample of special warranty.
1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For fire extinguishers to include in maintenance manuals. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Fire Extinguishers Renovation & Expansion Final Design 104416 - 2
100% Design Submittal
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate type and capacity of fire extinguishers with fire-protection cabinets to ensure fit and function.
1.8 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace fire extinguishers that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Failure of hydrostatic test according to NFPA 10 when testing interval required by NFPA 10 is within the warranty period.
b. Faulty operation of valves or release levers.
2. Warranty Period: Six years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. NFPA Compliance: Fabricate and label fire extinguishers to comply with NFPA 10, "Portable Fire Extinguishers."
B. Fire Extinguishers: Listed and labeled for type, rating, and classification by an independent testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Provide fire extinguishers approved, listed, and labeled by FM Global.
2.2 PORTABLE, HAND-CARRIED FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
A. Fire Extinguishers: Type, size, and capacity for each fire-protection cabinet and mounting bracket indicated.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
a. Amerex Corporation.
b. JL Industries; Activar Construction Products Group, Inc. c. Larsen's Manufacturing Company.
2. Source Limitations: Obtain fire extinguishers, fire-protection cabinets, and accessories, from single source from single manufacturer.
3. Valves: Nickel-plated, polished-brass body.
4. Handles and Levers: Stainless steel.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Fire Extinguishers Renovation & Expansion Final Design 104416 - 3
100% Design Submittal
5. Instruction Labels: Include pictorial marking system complying with NFPA 10, Appendix B.
B. Multipurpose Dry-Chemical Type in Steel Container: UL-rated 4-A:80-B:C, 10-lb nominal capacity, with monoammonium phosphate-based dry chemical in enameled-steel container.
1. Clean-Agent Type in Steel Container: UL-rated 1-A:10-B:C, 10-lb nominal capacity, with HFC blend agent and inert material in enameled-steel container; with pressureindicating gage. All Fire Extinguishers indicated to be installed in Electrical Rooms or IT/Server Rooms are to be Clean-Agent Type.
2.3 MOUNTING BRACKETS
A. Mounting Brackets: Manufacturer's standard steel, designed to secure fire extinguisher to wall or structure, of sizes required for types and capacities of fire extinguishers indicated, with plated or black baked-enamel finish.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
a. Amerex Corporation.
b. JL Industries; Activar Construction Products Group, Inc. c. Larsen's Manufacturing Company.
2. Source Limitations: Obtain mounting brackets and fire extinguishers from single source from single manufacturer.
B. Identification: Lettering complying with authorities having jurisdiction for letter style, size, spacing, and location. Locate as indicated by Engineer.
1. Identify bracket-mounted fire extinguishers with the words "FIRE EXTINGUISHER" in red letter decals applied to mounting surface.
a. Orientation: Vertical.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine fire extinguishers for proper charging and tagging.
1. Remove and replace damaged, defective, or undercharged fire extinguishers.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Fire Extinguishers Renovation & Expansion Final Design 104416 - 4
100% Design Submittal
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install fire extinguishers and mounting brackets in locations indicated and in compliance with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Mounting Brackets: Top of fire extinguisher to be at 60 inches above finished floor.
B. Mounting Brackets: Fasten mounting brackets to surfaces, square and plumb, at locations indicated.
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Verify that each fire extinguisher is present at Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION 104416
Division 11
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Laboratory Equipment Renovation & Expansion Final Design 115300 - 1
100% Design Submittal
SECTION 115300 - LABORATORY EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Laboratory equipment.
2. Fume Extractor Arms (Snorkels).
3. Canopy Hoods.
4. Connections to Utilities.
5. Service Fittings and Outlets.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Laboratory Fume Hoods (Owner provided/Contractor Installed) owner shall provide fume hood manufacture data after contract award. Contractor shall install owner provided fume hoods.
2. Section 123553.13 “Metal Laboratory Casework” for base and wall mounted casework.
3. Various Sections in Division 22 “Plumbing,” Division 23 “Heating Ventilating and Air Conditioning,” and Division 26 “Electrical” for utilities required by laboratory equipment included in this Section.
1.3 ABBREVIATIONS
A. Owner Removed/Owner Reinstalled (OROR).
B. Owner Removed/Contractor Reinstalled (ORCR).
C. Contractor Removed/Contractor Reinstalled (CRCR).
D. Contractor Furnished/Contractor Installed (CFCI).
1.4 COORDINATION
A. Work in this Section requires close coordination with Work in electrical and mechanical sections. Coordinate Work to assure an orderly progress in the project, without removal of previously installed Work, and to prevent damage to finishes and products B. Leave building openings of sufficient size to permit transport of equipment to final position. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Laboratory Equipment Renovation & Expansion Final Design 115300 - 2
100% Design Submittal
1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
1. Submit equipment dimensions and construction, equipment capacities, physical dimensions, utility and service requirements and locations.
2. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, furnished specialties and accessories, finishes anchorage methods, desired clearances, and utility locations for each piece of laboratory equipment.
B. Shop Drawings: For each laboratory equipment and for special components not dimensioned or detailed in manufacturer's product data.
1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and attachment details.
2. Include details of equipment assemblies. Indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, locations, and sizes of each piece of equipment.
3. Indicate equipment access points and required space for equipment service and operation.
4. Include installation drawings indicating rough-ins for plumbing, wiring, piping, ventilating and service requirements.
5. Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.
C. Samples: Submit two samples of each type of specified finish and color range where applicable.
1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For Installer.
B. Product Certificates: For each type of laboratory equipment.
C. Field quality-control reports.
1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For laboratory equipment to include in operation and maintenance manuals.
B. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of concealed utility connections.
C. Operation and Maintenance Data:
1. Submit description of equipment operation, adjusting, and required testing.
2. Identify system maintenance requirements, servicing cycles, required lubrication types, and local spare-parts sources.
1.8 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this Section with minimum three years' documented experience.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Laboratory Equipment Renovation & Expansion Final Design 115300 - 3
100% Design Submittal
1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver each item in manufacturer's packaging and crating with contents clearly identified and properly marked.
B. Store and protect materials according to manufacturer instructions.
1. Protect finished surfaces during handling and installation with protective covering of polyethylene film or another suitable material. Use means necessary to protect equipment before, during, and after installation. Protect the installed Work and materials of other trades during installation of this Work.
2. Store and handle each item to prevent damage. Provide temporary skids under items weighing more than 150 pounds.
C. Inspection: Accept materials on Site in manufacturer's original packaging and inspect for damage.
D. In the event of damage, immediately make repairs or replacements necessary to satisfaction of Owner.
1.10 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Review surfaces and conditions under which equipment is to be installed. Verify measurement of space for equipment and means of access for installation. Verify that service rough ins and backing plates are in place.
B. Report to Owner's Representative in writing, items that may be detrimental to equipment or equipment operation.
1.11 WARRANTY
A. Manufacturer’s Warranty: Submit written warranty covering structural failure, warping, and finish integrity of materials and workmanship for warranty period.
1. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.
1.12 MAINTENANCE SERVICE
A. Cost of maintenance agreement shall be a separate line item and not factored into the cost of equipment. Vendor shall guarantee that Owner will receive no adverse treatment regarding parts if Owner chooses not to purchase maintenance service agreement.
B. Equipment supplier shall provide a technical response, actual presence or by telephone, within 4 hours or the service call will be provided without additional cost to Owner.
C. Equipment supplier shall provide diagnostic equipment necessary for maintenance.
D. Maintenance Service: Two years from Substantial Completion. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Laboratory Equipment Renovation & Expansion Final Design 115300 - 4
100% Design Submittal
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 Owner shall relocate laboratory equipment and reinstall after construction is complete.
2.2 LABORATORY EQUIPMENT, GENERAL
A. Provide equipment complete with necessary supports, anchorages, stands, gages, valves, parts, and accessories required for a complete operating installation.
B. Provide each item of equipment with internal electrical services necessary for proper operation including wiring, conduit, boxes, raceways, fittings, lamps, switches, device plates, etc., sized for single point connection to building services, complying with requirements of NEC and bearing UL labeling as required.
C. Provide each item of equipment with mechanical and plumbing services necessary for proper operation including piping, fittings, ductwork, troughs, accessories, and materials, installed for easy access and connection to respective building service.
D. Provide each item of equipment fully finished by manufacturer with no additional finish or painting required after installation.
E. Identified equipment shall be provided by Contractor. Refer to Drawings for equipment locations and equipment list.
2.3 FUME EXTRACTOR ARMS (SNORKELS)
A. Manufacturers: All snorkel fume extractors to be the products of a single manufacturer.
1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Movex Inc. “ME STD Extractor Arm.” Available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following:
a. Airflow Systems, Inc.
b. Alsident System, distributed by Laboratory Enterprises, Inc. c. Enviroflex International Inc.
d. Nederman Inc.
e. Plymovement Corporation.
B. Construction: Polypropylene joints and thin-wall anodized aluminum tubes. Hinged, selfsupporting air extractor arm assembly. Arm to consist of 360-degree swivel elbow, support flange, internal support, pre-set joints with adjustable wear discs and flange for exhaust duct.
C. Airflow: 125 CFM.
D. Hose Diameter: 4 inches.
E. Accessories: Ceiling mounting bracket with transparent dome hood and cover plate for use in suspended ceilings.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Laboratory Equipment Renovation & Expansion Final Design 115300 - 5
100% Design Submittal
2.4 CANOPY HOODS
A. Manufacturers: All canopy hoods to be the products of a single manufacturer.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following:
a. Fisher Scientific.
b. Hamilton Laboratory Solutions, LLC.
c. Kewaunee Scientific Corporation.
d. Labconco.
e. Mott Manufacturing, Ltd.
B. Construction: Canopy hoods to be constructed with all-welded, liquid-tight joints, flat back and sides, flat vertical front edge sloping back to a flat top with integral duct collar for attachment to exhaust systems shown on the HVAC drawings and as specified in Division 23.
C. Material: Steel Sheet: Cold-rolled, commercial steel (CS) sheet, 0.048 inch thick, complying with ASTM A1008/A1008M; matte finish; suitable for exposed applications.
D. Mounting: Wall-mounted at the rear face with integral attachment points along the front for stainless steel threaded rods which will be supported from structure above.
E. Accessories:
1. LED light fixture.
a. LED module and driver combination for 5,900 lumens at 4,000 k color temperature.
b. Efficiency of fixture to be 120 lumens per watt.
c. Life expectancy of 50,000 hours.
F. Finish: Manufacturer’s standard baked-on or powder coated finish.
1. Colors for Canopy Hood Finish: As selected by Engineer from manufacturer’s full range to match existing canopy hoods.
2.5 ACCESSORIES
A. Rough-in Equipment: Furnish frames, anchors, supports, accessories, and closure trim for scheduled equipment.
2.6 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate laboratory equipment according to manufacturer’s standard processes; however, make modifications from standard product where necessary to comply with project requirements. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Laboratory Equipment Renovation & Expansion Final Design 115300 - 6
100% Design Submittal
2.7 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Equipment may be inspected by Owner's Representative at manufacturer's plant prior to shipment. Equipment found not to be in accordance with Specifications and approved drawings may be rejected. Rejected equipment shall be corrected or replaced with new products.
B. Furnish shop inspection for equipment items.
C. Certificate of Compliance:
1. If fabricator is approved by authorities having jurisdiction, submit certificate of compliance indicating Work performed at fabricator's facility conforms to Contract Documents.
2. Specified shop tests are not required for Work performed by approved fabricator.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, clearances, service rough-ins, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B. Examine walls, floors, and chutes for suitable conditions where each laboratory equipment will be installed.
C. Verify measurement of space for equipment and means of access for installation. Verify that service rough-ins and backing plates are in place.
D. Verify that rough-in frames, anchors, and supports are accurately placed.
E. Prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work.
F. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install each laboratory equipment according to manufacturer’s written instructions.
B. Set laboratory equipment square, level, plumb, properly aligned, and securely in place. Anchor as required for secure operation.
C. Install equipment in accordance with accepted submittals, as necessary for the intended function, and as a complete operating system.
1. According to standards required by authorities having jurisdiction.
2. Install per manufacturer’s engineered seismic anchorage details. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Laboratory Equipment Renovation & Expansion Final Design 115300 - 7
100% Design Submittal
3. Prepare for final connection of equipment to mechanical and electrical Work by others, unless otherwise noted.
4. Install in locations shown on Drawings.
D. Sequence installation to accommodate required utility connections.
E. Touch up surfaces with minor damage caused during installation and replace damaged components.
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform manufacturer’s standard tests and inspections with the assistance of a factoryauthorized service representative to verify compliance with performance requirements.
B. A laboratory equipment will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.
C. Prepare test and inspection reports.
3.4 ADJUSTING, CLEANING, AND PROTECTION
A. Adjust equipment and services to operate correctly and smoothly without warp or bind.
Lubricate operating parts as recommended by manufacturer.
B. Clean and polish exposed surfaces in accordance with manufacturer's instruction.
C. Touch up and restore any factory finishes partially damaged or defaced during delivery, relocation, and installation. Repair or remove and replace defective work with new equipment as approved by Owner's Representative.
D. Protect installed equipment after installation and during remainder of construction.
3.5 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING
A. Provide a hands-on, start-up session, and operation and maintenance training sessions with supplier, 6 maintenance personnel, and 6 end users in lab spaces where installation took place.
B. Training Session Time: Minimum of 8 hours of instruction, questions, and answers.
C. Owner is permitted to videotape various training sessions for their own use.
3.6 CANOPY HOOD SCHEDULE
A. Extraction Hood LB-CHV-03:
1. Length: 13 feet 6 inches.
2. Width: 4 feet 0 inches.
3. Height: As indicated on Drawings.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Laboratory Equipment Renovation & Expansion Final Design 115300 - 8
100% Design Submittal
END OF SECTION 115300
Division 12
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Metal Laboratory Casework Renovation & Expansion Final Design 123553.13 - 1
100% Design Submittal
SECTION 123553.13 - METAL LABORATORY CASEWORK
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Metal laboratory casework.
2. Utility-space framing at backs of base cabinets.
3. Filler and closure panels.
4. Laboratory casework system that includes support and utility-space framing, filler and closure panels, and modular countertops.
5. Laboratory countertops.
6. Tables.
7. Shelves.
8. Laboratory sinks.
9. Laboratory accessories.
10. Water, laboratory gas, and electrical service fittings.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 061000 "Rough Carpentry" for wood blocking for anchoring laboratory casework.
2. Section 092216 "Non-Structural Metal Framing" for reinforcements in metal-framed partitions for anchoring laboratory casework.
3. Section 096500 "Resilient Flooring" for resilient rubber base applied to laboratory casework.
4. Various Division 22 Sections and plumbing fixture schedules on Drawings for plumbing utilities, fixtures, and accessories to be mounted on laboratory casework.
5. Various Division 26 Sections and electrical fixture schedules on Drawings for electrical utilities, fixtures, and accessories to be mounted on laboratory casework.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. Scientific Equipment & Furniture Association (SEFA):
1. SEFA 1 Laboratory Fume Hoods.
2. SEFA 2.3 Scientific Laboratory Furniture and Equipment.
3. SEFA 3 Work surfaces.
4. SEFA 7 Laboratory and Hospital Fixtures.
5. SEFA 8 Laboratory Furniture-Casework-Shelving and Tables – Recommended Practices. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Metal Laboratory Casework Renovation & Expansion Final Design 123553.13 - 2
100% Design Submittal
B. ASTM International (ASTM):
1. A240-Heat Resistant Chromium and Chromium – Nickel Stainless Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip for pressure Vessels.
2. A312-Seamless and Welded Austenitic Stainless-Steel Pipe.
C. Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association (BHMA).
D. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA).
E. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 30 Flammable Liquid Storage.
F. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 70 Electrical Components, Devices and Accessories.
G. Underwriters Laboratory (UL): UL962 Certification.
H. CDC 21-1112 (2009) Biosafety in Microbiological and Biomedical Laboratories, 5th Edition.
1.4 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS
A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
B. Keying Conference: Conduct conference at Project site . Incorporate keying conference decisions into final keying requirements.
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of framing and reinforcements for support of laboratory casework.
B. Coordinate installation of laboratory casework with installation of laboratory equipment.
1.6 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
B. Shop Drawings: For laboratory casework.
1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and attachments to other work including blocking and reinforcements required for installation.
2. Indicate types and sizes of casework.
3. Indicate manufacturer's catalog numbers for casework.
4. Show fabrication details, including types and locations of hardware.
5. Indicate locations and types of service fittings.
6. Include details of utility spaces showing supports for conduits and piping.
7. Include details of support framing system.
8. Include details of exposed conduits, if required, for service fittings. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Metal Laboratory Casework Renovation & Expansion Final Design 123553.13 - 3
100% Design Submittal
9. Indicate locations of and clearances from adjacent walls, doors, windows, other building components, and laboratory equipment.
10. Include coordinated dimensions for laboratory equipment specified in other Sections.
C. Keying Schedule: Include schematic keying diagram and index each key set to unique designations that are coordinated with the Contract Documents.
D. Samples for Initial Selection: For casework finishes and materials requiring color selection.
E. Samples for Verification: For each type of casework, exposed-hardware, and countertopmaterial finish, in 6-inch square samples.
1.7 DELEGATED DESIGN
A. Calculations and Details: Submit structural calculations and details by a licensed structural engineer for seismic anchorage of casework systems as required by local authority having jurisdiction.
1.8 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For manufacturer.
B. Product Test Reports:
1. Casework: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, indicating compliance of laboratory casework with requirements of specified product standard and system structural performance specified in "Performance Requirements" Article.
2. Countertop Surface Material: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, indicating compliance of laboratory countertop surface material with requirements specified for chemical and physical resistance.
1.9 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish complete touchup kit for each type and color of casework finish provided. Include fillers, primers, paints, and other materials necessary to perform permanent repairs to damaged laboratory casework finish.
B. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Cabinet Mounting Clips and Related Hardware: Quantity equal to 5 percent of amount installed, but no fewer than 20 of each type.
2. Modular Countertop Units: Two extra units of each length and material installed. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Metal Laboratory Casework Renovation & Expansion Final Design 123553.13 - 4
100% Design Submittal
1.10 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer that produces casework of types indicated for this Project that has been tested for compliance with SEFA 8 M.
B. Installer Qualifications: An entity that employs installers and supervisors who are trained and approved by manufacturer. The installer must demonstrate and prove their ability to produce and install projects of similar sizes and scope.
C. Engineer Qualifications: Licensed structural engineer registered in State where project is located.
D. Testing: Laboratory casework manufacturer to provide in their initial submittals, certified test reports indicating compliance of their laboratory casework finish and work surface materials with requirements specified for chemical and physical resistance, and confirmation of load performance for movable tables. Perform material test reports by an independent testing agency qualified for testing indicated, as documented according to ASTM E548.
E. Though products may be manufactured by different manufacturers, obtain and install all casework, including work surfaces, sinks, service fittings and accessories, and fume hoods through one source from a single Laboratory Furniture Contractor.
1.11 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Protect finished surfaces during handling and installation with protective covering of polyethylene film or other suitable material.
1.12 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Established Dimensions: Where laboratory casework is indicated to fit to other construction, establish dimensions for areas where casework is to fit. Provide allowance for trimming at site, and coordinate construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions.
B. Field Measurements: Where laboratory casework is indicated to fit to existing construction, verify dimensions of existing construction by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Provide fillers and scribes to allow for trimming and fitting.
C. Locate concealed framing, blocking, and reinforcements that support casework by field measurements before enclosing them and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Metal Laboratory Casework Renovation & Expansion Final Design 123553.13 - 5
100% Design Submittal
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Alpha Adaptable casework system by Kewaunee Scientific Corporation or a comparable product by one of the following:
1. Hamilton Laboratory Solutions, LLC.
2. Lab Crafters, Inc.
3. Mott Manufacturing Ltd.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain laboratory casework from single source from single manufacturer unless otherwise indicated.
C. Product Designations: Drawings indicate sizes and configurations of laboratory casework by referencing designated manufacturer's catalog numbers. Other manufacturers' laboratory casework of similar sizes and similar door and drawer configurations and complying with Specifications may be considered.
2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. System Structural Performance: Ensure laboratory casework and support framing system withstands the effects of the following gravity loads and stresses without permanent deformation, excessive deflection, or binding of drawers and doors:
1. Support Framing System: 600 lb/ft.
2. Suspended Base Cabinets (Internal Load): 160 lb/ft.
3. Work Surfaces (Including Tops of Suspended Base Cabinets): 160 lb/ft.
4. Wall Cabinets (Upper Cabinets): 160 lb/ft.
5. Shelves: 40 lb/sq. ft.
B. Seismic Performance: Ensure laboratory casework installation withstands the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7.
1. Design earthquake spectral response acceleration, short period (Sds) for Project is indicated on Drawings.
2. Component Importance Factor: 1.5.
3. Base Cabinet Load (Including Countertop and Load on Countertop): 320 lb/ft.
4. Wall Cabinet (Upper Cabinet) Load: 160 lb/ft.
5. Shelves: 40 lb/ft.
2.3 CASEWORK, GENERAL
A. Casework Product Standard: Comply with SEFA 8 M, "Laboratory Grade Metal Casework." B. Flammable Liquid Storage: Where cabinets are indicated for solvent or flammable liquid storage, provide units that are listed and labeled as complying with requirements in NFPA 30 by ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Metal Laboratory Casework Renovation & Expansion Final Design 123553.13 - 6
100% Design Submittal
a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, meeting O.S.H.A.
Standard 1910-106(d)(3), and be UL 1275 certified.
1. Make cabinets of 18-gauge thick cold rolled steel with double wall construction with fireproof insulation in walls, floor, and top. Make floor of galvanized steel and be recessed 2 inches below front opening of cabinet. Weld four corners to form a liquid-tight well.
2. Equip cabinets with four 5/16-inch diameter threaded bolt type steel levelers as on standard base cabinets.
3. Supply back of each cabinet with two 1-1/2-inch fire baffle vents.
4. Equip each cabinet with an adjustable galvanized 16 gage steel shelf at 2-inch increments.
5. Label each cabinet "FLAMMABLE - KEEP FIRE AWAY" for clear identification.
6. Provide doors that overlap cabinet frame and having a full-length piano hinge with a fireresistant gasket around entire door opening for a tight closing. Include handle having a three-point locking mechanism.
C. Acid Storage Cabinets: Provide cabinets having same construction as standard base cabinets.
1. Acid Storage-Cabinet Lining: One-piece white chemical resistant 3/8-inch-thick, polyethylene, polypropylene, or epoxy lining material and meet OSHA standards for secondary containment.
2. Air Grills: Provide at top and bottom of each door for air circulation.
3. Each unit comes with an adjustable double-wall white chemical resistant polyethylene (HDPE) perforated shelf with stainless steel hat channel reinforcement.
4. Label each cabinet "ACIDS - DANGER" or “CORROSIVES - DANGER” for clear identification.
5. Make hardware of stainless steel.
6. Vent each cabinet with a 1-1/2-inch diameter vent pipe having a positive airflow directly into fume hood exhaust system.
D. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
2.4 METAL CASEWORK MATERIALS
A. Steel Sheet: Cold-rolled, commercial steel (CS) sheet, complying with ASTM A1008/A1008M; matte finish; suitable for exposed applications.
B. Nominal Metal Thickness:
1. Sides, Ends, Fixed Backs, Bottoms, Tops, Soffits, and Items Not Otherwise Indicated:
0.048 inch. Except for flammable liquid storage cabinets, bottoms may be 0.036 inchif reinforced.
2. Back Panels, Doors, Drawer Fronts and Bodies, and Shelves: 0.036 inchexcept 0.048 inch for back panels and doors of flammable liquid storage cabinets and for unreinforced shelves more than 36 incheslong.
3. Intermediate Horizontal Rails, Table Aprons and Cross Rails, Center Posts, and Top Gussets: 0.060 inch.
4. Drawer Runners, Sink Supports, and Hinge Reinforcements: 0.075 inch. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Metal Laboratory Casework Renovation & Expansion Final Design 123553.13 - 7
100% Design Submittal
5. Leveling and Corner Gussets: 0.105 inch.
C. Stainless Steel Sheet: ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 316L with #4 satin finishes.
2.5 AUXILIARY CABINET MATERIALS
A. Tempered Glass for Glazed Doors: Clear tempered glass complying with ASTM C1048, Kind FT, Condition A, Type I, Class 1, Quality-Q3; not less than 5.0 mm thick.
2.6 CABINET HARDWARE
A. General: Provide laboratory casework manufacturer's standard, commercial-quality, heavy-duty hardware complying with requirements indicated for each type.
B. Hinges: Stainless steel, five-knuckle hinges complying with BHMA A156.9, Grade 1, with antifriction bearings and rounded tips. Provide two for doors 48 incheshigh or less and three for doors more than 48 incheshigh.
C. Hinged-Door and Drawer Pulls: Solid stainless steel, back-mounted pulls; provide two pulls for drawers more than 24 incheswide.
1. Design: Wire pulls.
2. Overall Size: 1-3/8 by 5-1/2 inches.
D. Drawer Slides: ANSI/BHMA A156.9.
1. Manufacturer's standard.
2. Heavy Duty (Grade 1HD-100): Side mount.
a. Type: Full overtravel extension.
b. Material: Epoxy-coated polymer slides.
c. Motion Feature: Soft close dampener.
3. General-purpose drawers; provide 100 lb load capacity.
4. File drawers; provide 150 lb load capacity.
E. Locks: Cam or half-mortise type, brass with chrome-plated finish; complying with BHMA A156.11, Type E07281, Type E07111, or Type E07021.
1. Tumbler: Disc.
2. Lock Locations: Provide where indicated on drawers and doors.
3. Keying: Key locks alike within each room; key each room separately. a. Master key for up to 225 key changes.
4. Key Quantity: Minimum of two keys per lock.
5. Master Key System: Key locks to be operable by master key. a. Master Keys: Provide two.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Metal Laboratory Casework Renovation & Expansion Final Design 123553.13 - 8
100% Design Submittal
F. Sliding-Door Hardware Sets: Laboratory casework manufacturer's standard, to suit type and size of sliding-door units.
2.7 COUNTERTOP AND SINK MATERIALS
A. Epoxy: Factory-molded, modified epoxy-resin formulation with smooth, nonspecular finish.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following or equal:
a. American Epoxy Scientific LLC.
b. Durcon; a Wilsonart Company.
2. Physical Properties:
a. Flexural Strength: Not less than 10,000 psi.
b. Modulus of Elasticity: Not less than 2,000,000 psi.
c. Hardness (Rockwell M): Not less than 100.
d. Water Absorption (24 Hours): Not more than 0.02 percent. e. Heat Distortion Point: Not less than 260 deg F.
3. Chemical Resistance: Epoxy-resin material has the following ratings when tested with indicated reagents according to NEMA LD 3, Test Procedure 3.4.5:
a. No Effect: Acetic acid (98 percent), acetone, ammonium hydroxide (28 percent), benzene, carbon tetrachloride, dimethyl formamide, ethyl acetate, ethyl alcohol, ethyl ether, methyl alcohol, nitric acid (70 percent), phenol, sulfuric acid (60 percent), and toluene.
b. Slight Effect: Chromic acid (60 percent) and sodium hydroxide (50 percent).
4. Color: Black.
5. Thickness: 1 inch.
6. Back and Side Splashes: Supplied loose, cut to size for field applications in the same material and thickness as countertops. Bond backsplash and end splash curbs to countertops at jobsite with epoxy resin adhesive.
2.8 SHELVING MATERIALS
A. Phenolic Composite: Solid, high-pressure decorative laminate, complying with NEMA LD 3, Grade CGS, and SEFA 3-2010.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
a. Duracon.
b. Fundermax.
c. Trespa North America.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Metal Laboratory Casework Renovation & Expansion Final Design 123553.13 - 9
100% Design Submittal
2. Chemical Resistance: Composite countertop material has the following ratings when tested with indicated reagents according to NEMA LD 3, Test Procedure 3.4.5 and SEFA 3-2010:
a. No Effect: Acetic acid (98 percent), acetone, ammonium hydroxide (28 percent), ethyl acetate, ethyl alcohol, formaldehyde (37 percent), furfural, phosphoric acid (85 percent), sulfuric acid (33 percent), toluene, benzene, carbon tetrachloride, dimethyl formamide, hydrochloric acid (37 percent), hydrofluoric acid (48 percent), nitric acid (30 percent), sodium hydroxide (20 percent), and zinc chloride.
3. Color: Black.
4. Thickness: 3/4 inch.
5. Edges and Corners: Exposed work surface edges and corners with 1/8-inch machined beveled top edge with blended bevel corners.
B. Shelving Wall Hanging System:
1. Basis-of-Design: 1-inch Alpha Wall Hanging System as manufactured by Kewaunee Scientific Corporation.
2. Provide complete system that is fully adjustable and includes following as a minimum:
a. Vertical Uprights: Double-slotted face with slots on 1-inch centers. b. Support Rails: Notch on 6-inch centers to accepted vertical upright. c. Support Rail Covers: Provide in pairs to match vertical upright spacing. d. System Height: Countertop height, manufacturer’s standard. e. Shelves: Manufacturer’s standard gage painted steel, 9-inch depth by 36-inch length with optional locking tab.
2.9 METAL CABINETS AND TABLES
A. Fabrication: Assemble and finish units at point of manufacture. Use precision dies for interchangeability of like-size drawers, doors, and similar parts. Perform assembly on precision jigs to provide units that are square. Reinforce units with angles, gussets, and channels. Except where otherwise specified, integrally frame and weld cabinet bodies to form dirt- and verminresistant enclosures. Where applicable, reinforce base cabinets for sink support. Maintain uniform clearance around door and drawer fronts of 1/16 to 3/32 inch.
1. Provide minimum metal gauges used in casework fabrication of following as per recognized North American standards.
a. Top front rails of the cabinets: 11 gauge.
b. Leveling devices and drawer suspension tracks: 14 gauge. c. Drawer boxes, drawer front’s interior and exterior panels, and door interior panels:
20 gauge.
d. Other cabinet components including cabinet frames, doors, and shelves: 18 gauge.
B. Flush Doors: Outer and inner pans that nest into box formation, with full-height channel reinforcements at center of door. Fill doors with noncombustible, sound-deadening material. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Metal Laboratory Casework Renovation & Expansion Final Design 123553.13 - 10
100% Design Submittal
C. Glazed Doors: Hollow-metal stiles and rails of similar construction as flush doors, with glass held in resilient channels or gasket material.
D. Hinged Doors: Mortise for hinges and reinforce with angles welded inside inner pans at hinge edge.
E. Drawers: Fronts made from outer and inner pans that nest into box formation, without raw metal edges at top. Sides, back, and bottom fabricated in one piece with rolled or formed top of sides for stiffening and comfortable grasp for drawer removal. Provide drawers with rubber bumpers, polymer roller slides, and positive stops to prevent metal-to-metal contact or accidental removal.
F. Adjustable Shelves: Front, back, and ends formed down, with edges returned horizontally at front and back to form reinforcing channels.
G. Toe Space: Fully enclosed, 4 incheshigh by 3 inchesdeep, with no open gaps or pockets.
H. Tables: Welded tubing legs, not less than 2 inchessquare with channel stretchers as needed to comply with product standard. Weld or bolt stretchers to legs and cross-stretchers, and bolt legs to table aprons. Provide leveling device welded to bottom of each leg.
1. Leg Shoes: Satin-finished, stainless steel, open-bottom, slip-on type.
I. Utilities: Provide space, cutouts, and holes for pipes, conduits, and fittings in cabinet bodies to accommodate utility services and their support-strut assemblies.
1. Provide base cabinets with removable backs for access to utility space.
J. Utility-Space Framing: Steel framing units consisting of two steel slotted channels complying with MFMA-4, not less than 1-5/8 inchessquare by 0.105-inchnominal thickness, that are connected at top and bottom by U-shaped brackets made from 1-1/4-by-1/4-inchsteel flat bars.
Framing units may be made by welding channel material into rectangular frames instead of using U-shaped brackets.
K. Filler and Closure Panels: Provide where indicated and as needed to close spaces between casework and walls, ceilings, and equipment. Fabricate from same material and with same finish as casework and with hemmed or flanged edges unless otherwise indicated.
1. Provide knee-space panels (modesty panels) at spaces between base cabinets, where cabinets are not installed against a wall or where space is not otherwise closed. Fabricate from back-to-back panels or of hollow construction to eliminate exposed hemmed or flanged edges.
2. Provide utility-space closure panels at spaces between base cabinets where utility space would otherwise be exposed, including spaces below countertops.
3. Provide closure panels at ends of utility spaces where utility space would otherwise be exposed.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Metal Laboratory Casework Renovation & Expansion Final Design 123553.13 - 11
100% Design Submittal
2.10 MOBILE TABLES
A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Altus Table system by Mott Manufacturing Ltd. or a comparable product by one of the following:
1. Hamilton Laboratory Solutions, LLC.
2. Lab Crafters, Inc.
3. Kewaunee Scientific Corporation
B. Modular system to be made of tubular style framing combined with rectangular formed steel uprights.
1. Nominal table assembly dimensions:
a. MB-1: 120 inches.
b. MB-2: 96 inches.
C. Tubular frames and table supports to be adjustable height in 1 inch increments and complete with levelers.
1. Height adjustable from 29 to 36 inches, not including work surface.
D. Rear frame to be used for carrying services and electrical conduit.
1. Rear upright supports to be equipped with slots for adjustable shelving and levelers.
2. All services supplied with hose and quick disconnect to reach service fitting supplies.
E. Assembled frame to be self-supporting without being anchored to building.
F. Wire management tray to be under countertop.
1. Refer to countertop article for material.
G. Service Fixtures:
1. Side upright structure to support maximum of three service fixtures on each side.
2. Fixtures to be needle valve style with single serrated hose.
3. Combustible gas tubing to be stainless steel.
4. Service fixtures to have additional 4 feet of length to reach service fitting supplies.
5. Arrange plumbing so services cannot be intermixed.
2.11 LABORATORY CASEWORK SYSTEM
A. Provide casework manufacturer's standard integrated system that includes support framing, suspended modular cabinets, filler and closure panels, undercabinet task-lighting fixtures, countertops, and fittings needed to assemble system. System includes hardware and fasteners for securing support framing to permanent construction.
1. Cabinets can be removed and reinstalled without use of special tools for relocation within system.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Metal Laboratory Casework Renovation & Expansion Final Design 123553.13 - 12
100% Design Submittal
2. Base cabinets can be removed without providing temporary support for, or removing, countertops.
3. Sinks are supported independent of base cabinets.
4. Support framing has provision for fastening pipe supports at utility space in not more than 1-inch increments.
5. System includes filler and closure panels to close spaces between support framing, cabinets, shelves, countertops, floors, and walls unless otherwise indicated. Fabricate panels from same material and with same finish as metal cabinets and with hemmed or flanged edges.
B. Support Framing: Casework manufacturer's standard system consisting of vertical supports and connecting braces and rails as follows:
1. Cabinets, shelves, and countertops are supported from vertical supports except where floor-supported base cabinets are indicated. Vertical positioning of supported cabinets, shelves, and countertops can be varied in 1-inch increments through full height of supports.
2. Vertical supports rest on adjustable leveling bases and are secured to floor with metal clips fastened to floor.
3. Vertical supports are installed with braces and rails, connecting them to each other and to permanent building walls to create a stable, rigid structure with framed utility spaces where indicated.
C. Undercabinet Task-Light Luminaires:
1. Lamp Type: LED with switch and heavy-duty cord and plug.
2. Finish: Baked enamel.
3. Diffusers: Virgin acrylic with high resistance to yellowing and other changes from aging, heat, and UV radiation.
D. Countertops: Provide in modular lengths indicated, without seams.
2.12 METAL CABINET FINISH
A. General: Prepare, treat, and finish welded assemblies after assembling. Prepare, treat, and finish components that are to be assembled with mechanical fasteners before assembling. Prepare, treat, and finish concealed surfaces same as exposed surfaces.
B. Preparation: After assembly, clean surfaces of mill scale, rust, oil, and other contaminants. After cleaning, apply a conversion coating suited to organic coating to be applied over it.
C. Chemical-Resistant Finish: Immediately after cleaning and pretreating, apply laboratory casework manufacturer's standard two-coat, chemical-resistant, baked-on finish consisting of prime coat and thermosetting topcoat. Comply with coating manufacturer's written instructions for applying and baking to achieve a minimum dry film thickness of 2 mils.
1. Chemical and Physical Resistance of Finish System: Finish complies with acceptance levels of cabinet surface finish tests in SEFA 8 M. Verify acceptance level for chemical spot test is no more than for Level 3 conditions.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Metal Laboratory Casework Renovation & Expansion Final Design 123553.13 - 13
100% Design Submittal
2. Colors for Metal Laboratory Casework Finish: As selected by Engineer from manufacturer's full range.
2.13 COUNTERTOPS, TABLETOPS, SHELVES, AND SINKS
A. Countertops, General: Provide units with smooth surfaces in uniform plane, free of defects.
Make exposed edges and corners straight and uniformly beveled. Provide front and end overhang of 1 inch.
B. Sinks, General: Provide sizes indicated or laboratory casework manufacturer's closest standard size of equal or greater volume, as approved by Engineer.
1. Outlets: Provide with strainers and tailpieces, NPS 1-1/2, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Overflows: For each sink except cup sinks, provide overflow of standard beehive or open-top design with separate strainer. Height 2 inchesless than sink depth. Provide in same material as strainer.
C. Epoxy Countertops, Tabletops, and Sinks:
1. Countertop Fabrication: Fabricate with factory cutouts for sinks, holes for service fittings and accessories, and butt joints assembled with epoxy adhesive and concealed metal splines.
a. Flat Configuration: 1 inch thick with continuous drip groove on underside 1/2 inch from overhang edge.
1) Edges and Corners: Beveled.
2) Backsplash: Applied.
b. Construction: Uniform throughout full thickness.
2. Sink Fabrication: Molded in one piece with smooth surfaces, coved corners, and bottom sloped to outlet; 1/2-inch minimum thickness.
a. Provide with polypropylene strainers and tailpieces. b. Provide integral sinks in epoxy countertops, bonded to countertops with invisible joint line.
c. Provide epoxy resin sinks for drop-in installation in countertops with 1/4-inchthick lip around perimeter of sink. d. Provide manufacturer's recommended adjustable support system for table- and cabinet-type installations.
D. Phenolic-Composite Shelves:
1. Shelf Configuration: Flat, 3/4 inch thick.
a. Edges and Corners: Beveled.
E. Cup Sinks, “CS-1”: Provide in material indicated, 3-by-6-inch oval.
1. Epoxy Cup Sinks: Provide with polypropylene strainers and integral tailpieces. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Metal Laboratory Casework Renovation & Expansion Final Design 123553.13 - 14
100% Design Submittal
2.14 LABORATORY ACCESSORIES
A. Reagent Shelves: Provide as indicated, fabricated from same material as adjacent countertop unless otherwise indicated.
B. Burette Rods: Aluminum or stainless steel rods, 1/2 inch in diameter and 18 inches long, threaded on one end to fit tapered plug adapter for flush socket receptacle. Provide with tapered plug adapter and receptacle.
C. Upright Rod Assembly and Metal Crossbar: Aluminum or stainless steel. Two vertical rods and one horizontal crossbar, 3/4 inch in diameter and 36 inches long unless otherwise indicated; two flush socket receptacles and two crossbar clamps. Ends of vertical rods are tapered to fit receptacles; other rod ends are rounded.
D. Greenlaw Arm Assembly: Aluminum or stainless steel vertical rod, tapered on one end to fit flush socket receptacle. Adjustable crossbar of hardwood with black, acid-resistant finish, secured to upright with adjustable clamp. Provide with receptacle.
E. Lattice Assembly: Aluminum or stainless steel, vertical and horizontal rod lattice assembly with 3/4-inch-diameter rods at approximately 12 inches o.c. with two flush socket receptacles for mounting.
1. Size: 36 inches wide by 24 inches high.
F. Stainless Steel Pegboards: Stainless steel pegboards with removable polypropylene pegs and stainless steel drip troughs with drain outlet.
G. Surface-mounted paper towel dispenser and waste receptacle: stainless steel with all-welded construction. Exposed surfaces to have satin finish.
2.15 WATER AND LABORATORY GAS SERVICE FITTINGS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
1. Broen A/S.
2. Chicago Faucets; Geberit Group.
3. WaterSaver Faucet Co.
B. Service Fittings: Provide units that comply with SEFA 7, "Recommended Practices for Fixtures." Provide fittings complete with washers, locknuts, nipples, and other installation accessories. Include wall and deck flanges, escutcheons, handle extension rods, and similar items.
1. Provide units that comply with "Vandal-Resistant Faucets and Fixtures" recommendations in SEFA 7.
C. Materials: Fabricated from cast or forged red brass unless otherwise indicated.
1. Reagent-Grade Water Service Fittings: Polypropylene, PVC, or PVDF for parts in contact with water.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Metal Laboratory Casework Renovation & Expansion Final Design 123553.13 - 15
100% Design Submittal
D. Finish: Acid- and solvent-resistant powder coating complying with requirements in SEFA 7 for corrosion-resistant finishes.
1. Provide chemical-resistant powder coating in laboratory casework manufacturer's standard metallic brown, aluminum, white, or other color as approved by Engineer.
E. Water Valves and Faucets: Provide units complying with ASME A112.18.1, with renewable seats, designed for working pressure up to 80 psig.
1. Vacuum Breakers: Provide ASSE 1035 vacuum breakers on water fittings with serrated outlets.
2. Aerators: Provide aerators on water fittings that do not have serrated outlets.
3. Self-Closing Valves: Provide self-closing valves where indicated.
F. Ball Valves: Chrome-plated ball and PTFE seals. Handle requires no more than 5 lbfto operate.
Provide units designed for working pressure up to 75 psig, with serrated outlets.
1. Locking Safety Handles: Where ball valves are indicated for fuel-gas use, provide handles that must be pushed in or pulled up before being turned on.
G. Needle Valves: Provide units with renewable, self-centering, floating cones and renewable seats of stainless steel or Monel metal, with removable serrated outlets.
1. Provide units designed for working pressure up to 100 psig.
H. Hand of Fittings: Furnish right-hand fittings unless fitting designation is followed by "L." I. Remote-Control Valves: Provide needle valves, straight-through or angle type as indicated for fume hoods and where indicated.
J. Handles: Provide three- or four-wing, molded-plastic or powder-coated-metal handles for valves unless otherwise indicated.
1. Provide lever-type handles for ball valves unless otherwise indicated. Lever handle aligns with outlet when valve is closed and is perpendicular to outlet when valve is fully open.
2. Provide knurled, molded-plastic handles for needle valves.
3. Provide wrist blade handles on accessible fitting locations.
K. Service-Outlet Identification: Provide color-coded plastic discs with embossed identification, secured to each service-fitting handle to be tamper resistant. Comply with SEFA 7 for colors and embossed identification.
2.16 ELECTRICAL AND COMMUNICATION SERVICE FITTINGS
A. Service Fittings, General: Provide units complete with metal housings, receptacles, switches, pilot lights, data communication outlets, cover plates, accessories, and gaskets required for mounting on laboratory casework.
B. Electrical Wiring Devices: Comply with requirements in Section 262726 "Wiring Devices" for receptacles, switches, pilot lights, cover plates, and accessories. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Metal Laboratory Casework Renovation & Expansion Final Design 123553.13 - 16
100% Design Submittal
C. Receptacles:
1. Duplex Convenience Receptacles: 125 V, 20 A; NEMA WD 6, Configuration 5-20R. a. Standards: Comply with NEMA WD 1, UL 498, and FS W-C-596.
2. Hospital-Grade, Duplex Convenience Receptacles: 125 V, 20 A; NEMA WD 6, Configuration 5-20R.
a. Standards: Comply with NEMA WD 1, UL 498 Supplement sd, and FS W-C-596.
3. Isolated-Ground, Duplex Convenience Receptacles: 125 V, 20 A; NEMA WD 6, Configuration 5-20R.
a. Standards: Comply with NEMA WD 1, UL 498, and FS W-C-596.
4. Tamper-Resistant, USB Charger Receptacles: 12 V dc, 2.0 A, USB Type A. a. Standards: Comply with NEMA WD 1, UL 498, UL 1310, and FS W-C-596. b. USB Receptacles: Dual, Type A.
5. Hospital-Grade, USB Charger Receptacles: 12 V dc, 2.0 A, USB Type A. a. Standards: Comply with NEMA WD 1, UL 498 Supplement sd, UL 1310, and FS W-C-596.
b. Marking: Labeled and complying with NFPA 70, "Health Care Facilities" Article, "Pediatric Locations" Section.
6. USB Receptacles: Dual, Type A.
7. Duplex GFCI Convenience Receptacles: 125 V, 20 A; NEMA WD 6, Configuration 5- 20R; feed-through type with integral LED indicator light. a. Standards: Comply with NEMA WD 1, UL 498, UL 943 Class A, and FS W-C596.
8. Hospital-Grade, Duplex GFCI Convenience Receptacles: 125 V, 20 A; NEMA WD 6, Configuration 5-20R; feed-through type with integral LED indicator light. a. Standards: Comply with NEMA WD 1, UL 498 Supplement sd, UL 943 Class A, and FS W-C-596.
9. Duplex SPD Convenience Receptacles: 125 V, 20 A; NEMA WD 6, Configuration 5- 20R; with LED indicator light and integral SPD in line to ground, line to neutral, and neutral to ground.
a. Standards: Comply with NEMA WD 1, UL 498, UL 1449, and FS W-C-596.
10. Isolated-Ground, Duplex SPD Convenience Receptacles: 125 V, 20 A; NEMA WD 6, Configuration 5-20R; with LED indicator light and integral SPD in line to ground, line to neutral, and neutral to ground.
a. Standards: Comply with NEMA WD 1, UL 498, UL 1449, and FS W-C-596. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Metal Laboratory Casework Renovation & Expansion Final Design 123553.13 - 17
100% Design Submittal
11. Hospital-Grade, Duplex SPD Convenience Receptacles: 125 V, 20 A; NEMA WD 6, Configuration 5-20R; with integral SPD in line to ground, line to neutral, and neutral to ground.
a. Standards: Comply with NEMA WD 1, UL 498 Supplement sd, UL 1449, and FS W-C-596.
12. Isolated-Ground, Hospital-Grade, Duplex SPD Convenience Receptacles: 125 V, 20 A; NEMA WD 6, Configuration 5-20R; with integral SPD in line to ground, line to neutral, and neutral to ground.
a. Standards: Comply with NEMA WD 1, UL 498 Supplement sd, UL 1449, and FS W-C-596.
13. Color of Receptacles: Ivory unless otherwise indicated or required by NFPA 70.
D. Switches:
1. Single-Pole Switches: 120/277 V, 20 A.
a. Standards: Comply with NEMA WD 1, UL 20, and FS W-S-896.
2. Two-Pole Switches: 120/277 V, 20 A.
a. Comply with NEMA WD 1, UL 20, and FS W-S-896.
3. Pilot-Light Switches, Single Pole: 120/277 V, 20 A, with LED-lighted handle, illuminated when switch is off.
a. Standards: Comply with NEMA WD 1, UL 20, and FS W-S-896.
4. Key-Operated Switches: 120/277 V, 20 A; single pole, with factory-supplied key in lieu of switch handle.
a. Standards: Comply with NEMA WD 1, UL 20, and FS W-S-896.
5. Color of Switches: Ivory unless otherwise indicated or required by NFPA 70.
E. Data Communication Outlets: Two RJ-45 jacks for terminating 100-ohm, balanced, four-pair twisted-pair cabling complying with TIA-568-C.1; complying with Category 6. Comply with UL 1863.
F. Cover Plates: Provide satin-finish, Type 304, stainless steel cover plates with formed, beveled edges.
G. Cover-Plate Identification: Use 1/4-inch- high letters unless otherwise indicated. For stainless steel or chrome-plated metal, stamp or etch plate and fill in letters with black enamel.
1. Provide at every cover plate.
a. Receptacles other than standard 125-V duplex, grounding type. b. Switches and thermal-overload switches.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Metal Laboratory Casework Renovation & Expansion Final Design 123553.13 - 18
100% Design Submittal
c. Pilot lights when located remotely from associated equipment or switch, where function is not obvious.
d. Receptacles, switches, and other locations indicated.
2. Provide the following information:
a. Voltage and phase for receptacles other than standard 125-V duplex, grounding type.
b. Indicate equipment being controlled by switches and thermal-overload switches. c. Indicate equipment being controlled for pilot lights when located remotely from associated equipment or switch, where function is not obvious. d. Number of the breaker in panelboard that controls device.
H. Pedestal-Type Fittings: Cast-aluminum housings with sloped single face or two faces, as indicated, with neoprene gasket under base and with concealed mounting holes in base for attaching to laboratory casework. Provide holes tapped for conduits.
I. Line-Type Fittings: Provide with cast-metal boxes with threaded holes for mounting on rigid steel conduit. Provide cover plates same size as boxes.
J. Recessed-Type Fittings: Provide with galvanized-steel boxes.
K. Finishes for Service-Fitting Components: Provide housings or boxes for pedestal- and line-type fittings with manufacturer's standard baked-on, chemical-resistant enamel in color as selected by Engineer from manufacturer's full range.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, location of reinforcements, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION OF CABINETS
A. Comply with installation requirements in SEFA 2. Install level, plumb, and true in line; shim as required using concealed shims. Where laboratory casework abuts other finished work, apply filler strips and scribe for accurate fit, with fasteners concealed where practical. Do not exceed the following tolerances:
1. Variation of Tops of Base Cabinets from Level: 1/16 inch in 10 feet.
2. Variation of Bottoms of Upper Cabinets from Level: 1/8 inch in 10 feet.
3. Variation of Faces of Casework from a True Plane: 1/8 inch in 10 feet.
4. Variation of Adjacent Surfaces from a True Plane (Lippage): 1/32 inch.
5. Variation in Alignment of Adjacent Door and Drawer Edges: 1/16 inch. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Metal Laboratory Casework Renovation & Expansion Final Design 123553.13 - 19
100% Design Submittal
B. Utility-Space Framing: Secure to floor with two fasteners at each frame. Fasten to partition framing, wood blocking, or metal reinforcements in partitions and to base cabinets.
C. Base Cabinets: Fasten cabinets to utility-space framing, partition framing, wood blocking, or reinforcements in partitions, with fasteners spaced not more than 16 inches o.c. Bolt adjacent cabinets together with joints flush, tight, and uniform.
1. Where base cabinets are installed away from walls, fasten to floor at toe space at not more than 24 inches o.c. and at sides of cabinets with not less than two fasteners per side.
D. Wall Cabinets: Fasten to hanging strips, masonry, partition framing, blocking, or reinforcements in partitions. Fasten each cabinet through back, near top, at not less than 16 inches o.c.
E. Install hardware uniformly and precisely.
F. Adjust operating hardware so doors and drawers align and operate smoothly without warp or bind and contact points meet accurately. Lubricate operating hardware as recommended by manufacturer.
3.3 INSTALLATION OF COUNTERTOPS
A. Comply with installation requirements in SEFA 2. Abut top and edge surfaces true in plane with flush hairline joints and with internal supports placed to prevent deflection. Locate joints where indicated on Shop Drawings.
B. Field Jointing: Where possible, make in same manner as shop-made joints, using dowels, splines, fasteners, adhesives, and sealants recommended by manufacturer. Shop prepare edges for field-made joints.
C. Fastening:
1. Secure countertops, except for epoxy countertops, to cabinets with Z-type fasteners or equivalent, using two or more fasteners at each cabinet front, end, and back.
2. Secure epoxy countertops to cabinets with epoxy cement, applied at each corner and along perimeter edges at not more than 48 inches o.c.
3. Where necessary to penetrate countertops with fasteners, countersink heads approximately 1/8 inch and plug hole flush with material equal to countertop in chemical resistance, hardness, and appearance.
D. Provide holes and cutouts required for service fittings.
E. Provide scribe moldings for closures at junctures of countertop, curb, and splash with walls as recommended by manufacturer for materials involved. Match materials and finish to adjacent laboratory casework. Use chemical-resistant, permanently elastic sealing compound where recommended by manufacturer.
F. Dress joints smooth, remove surface scratches, and clean entire surface. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Metal Laboratory Casework Renovation & Expansion Final Design 123553.13 - 20
100% Design Submittal
3.4 INSTALLATION OF SINKS
A. Comply with installation requirements in SEFA 2.
B. Underside Installation of Epoxy Sinks: Use laboratory casework manufacturer's recommended adjustable support system for table- and cabinet-type installations. Set top edge of sink unit in sink and countertop manufacturers' recommended chemical-resistant sealing compound or adhesive, and firmly secure to produce a tight and fully leakproof joint. Adjust sink and securely support to prevent movement. Remove excess sealant or adhesive while still wet and finish joint for neat appearance.
C. Drop-in Installation of Epoxy Cup Sinks: Rout groove in countertop to receive sink rim if not shop prepared. Set sink in adhesive and fill remainder of groove with sealant or adhesive. Use procedures and products recommended by sink and countertop manufacturers. Remove excess adhesive and sealant while still wet and finish joint for neat appearance.
3.5 INSTALLATION OF LABORATORY CASEWORK ACCESSORIES
A. Install accessories in accordance with Shop Drawings, installation requirements in SEFA 2, and manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Securely fasten adjustable shelving supports, stainless steel shelves, and pegboards to partition framing, wood blocking, or reinforcements in partitions.
C. Install shelf standards plumb and at heights to align shelf brackets for level shelves. Install shelving level and straight, closely fitted to other work where indicated.
3.6 INSTALLATION OF SERVICE FITTINGS
A. Comply with requirements in other Sections for installing water and laboratory gas service fittings and electrical devices.
B. Install fittings in accordance with Shop Drawings, installation requirements in SEFA 2, and manufacturer's written instructions. Set bases and flanges of sink- and countertop-mounted fittings in sealant recommended by manufacturer of sink or countertop material. Securely anchor fittings to laboratory casework unless otherwise indicated.
3.7 CLEANING AND PROTECTING
A. Clean finished surfaces, touch up as required, and remove or refinish damaged or soiled areas to match original factory finish, as approved by Engineer.
B. Protect countertop surfaces during construction with 6-mil plastic or other suitable waterresistant covering. Tape to underside of countertop at a minimum of 48 inches o.c. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Metal Laboratory Casework Renovation & Expansion Final Design 123553.13 - 21
100% Design Submittal
3.8 SERVICE-FITTING SCHEDULE
A. Water Service Fitting, Type WF-1:
1. Fitting Type: Swing-spout gooseneck mixing faucet with wrist blade handles.
2. Outlet: Vacuum breaker and removable serrated outlet.
3. Mounting: Deck mounted.
4. Basis of Design Model: WaterSaver L412VB-BH.
5. Location: At laboratory sinks.
B. Water Service Fitting, Type WS-2:
1. Fitting Type: Rigid, gooseneck with wrist blade handle.
2. Outlet: Vacuum breaker and serrated outlet.
3. Mounting: Deck mounted (right- and left-hand configurations).
4. Basis of Design Model: WaterSaver L611VB-BH.
5. Location: At cup sinks
C. Laboratory Gas Service Fitting, Type GF-1:
1. Service: Vacuum.
2. Fitting Type: Turret.
3. Outlets: One.
4. Outlet Type: Straight.
5. Valve Type: Needle valve.
6. Basis of Design Model: WaterSaver Colortech CT5180FT-325.
D. Laboratory Gas Service Fitting, Type GF-2:
1. Service: Carbon Dioxide.
2. Fitting Type: Turret.
3. Outlets: Two at 90 degrees.
4. Outlet Type: Straight.
5. Valve Type: Needle valve.
6. Basis of Design Model: WaterSaver Colortech CT3180-141FT.
E. Laboratory Gas Service Fitting, Type GF-3:
1. Service: Vacuum.
2. Fitting Type: Flange Type.
3. Outlets: One.
4. Outlet Type: Straight.
5. Valve Type: Needle valve.
6. Basis of Design Model: WaterSaver Colortech CT5180F-225WSA.
F. Laboratory Gas Service Fitting, Type GF-4:
1. Service: Argon.
2. Fitting Type: Turret, integral to mobility tables MB-1 and MB-2.
3. Outlets: One.
4. Outlet Type: Straight.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Metal Laboratory Casework Renovation & Expansion Final Design 123553.13 - 22
100% Design Submittal
5. Valve Type: Needle valve.
6. Basis of Design Model: WaterSaver Colortech CT2880.
G. Laboratory Gas Service Fitting, Type GF-5:
1. Service: 95 percent Argon and 5 percent Hydrogen mixture.
2. Fitting Type: Turret, integral to mobility table MB-1.
3. Outlets: One.
4. Outlet Type: Straight.
5. Valve Type: Needle valve.
6. Basis of Design Model: WaterSaver Colortech CT2880.
H. Laboratory Gas Service Fitting, Type GF-6:
1. Service: Acetylene.
2. Fitting Type: Turret, integral to mobility table MB-2.
3. Outlets: One.
4. Outlet Type: Straight.
5. Valve Type: Needle valve.
6. Basis of Design Model: WaterSaver Colortech CT2880.
I. Laboratory Gas Service Fitting, Type GF-7:
1. Service: Nitrous Oxide.
2. Fitting Type: Turret, integral to mobility table MB-2.
3. Outlets: One.
4. Outlet Type: Straight.
5. Valve Type: Needle valve.
6. Basis of Design Model: WaterSaver Colortech CT2880.
J. Electrical Service Fitting, Type EF-1:
1. Fitting Type: Recessed.
2. Device: One duplex receptacle.
K. Electrical Service Fitting, Type EF-2:
1. Fitting Type: Recessed.
2. Device: Two duplex receptacles.
L. Electrical Service Fitting, Type EF-3:
1. Fitting Type: Recessed.
2. Device: One switched receptacle.
M. Electrical Service Fitting, Type EF-4:
1. Fitting Type: Recessed.
2. Device: 120V, single phase, 30A.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Metal Laboratory Casework Renovation & Expansion Final Design 123553.13 - 23
100% Design Submittal
N. Electrical Service Fitting, Type EF-5:
1. Fitting Type: Recessed.
2. Device: 208V, single phase, 30A.
3.9 LABORATORY SINK SCHEDULE
A. Laboratory Sink: Type SK-1:
1. Basis of Design: Durcon U51.
2. Epoxy undermount.
3. 24 inches L x 16 inches W x 10 inches D.
B. Laboratory Sink: Type SK-2:
1. Basis of Design: Durcon U30U-CR.
2. Epoxy undermount, double bowl.
3. 15 inches L x 18 inches W x 11 inches D.
C. Laboratory Sink: Type SK-3:
1. Basis of Design: Durcon U24C.
2. Epoxy undermount.
3. 18 inches L x 14 inches W x 10.5 inches D.
3.10 LABORATORY ACCESSORY SCHEDULE
A. Pegboard: Type PB-1:
1. Basis of Design: Mott Manufacturing SPB2430.
2. Stainless steel with 4-inch-deep trough.
3. 24 inches W x 30 inches H.
B. Combination Towel (Folded) Dispenser/Waste Receptacle R-1:
1. Basis of Design: Bobrick Model B-3699.
2. Description: Combination unit for dispensing C-fold or multifold towels with removable waste receptacle.
3. Mounting: Surface mounted.
4. Minimum Towel-Dispenser Capacity: 350 C-fold or 475 multifold paper towels.
5. Minimum Waste Receptacle Capacity: 2 gal.
6. Material and Finish: Stainless steel, ASTM A480/A480M, No. 4 finish (satin).
END OF SECTION 123553.13
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Metal Laboratory Casework Renovation & Expansion Final Design 123553.13 - 24
100% Design Submittal
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Solid Surfacing Countertops Renovation & Expansion Final Design 123661.16 - 1
100% Design Submittal
SECTION 123661.16 - SOLID SURFACING COUNTERTOPS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Solid surface material countertops.
2. Solid surface material backsplashes.
3. Solid surface material end splashes.
4. Stainless-steel countertops.
5. Section includes stone countertops.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 079200 "Joint Sealants" for joint sealants.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For countertop materials.
B. Shop Drawings: For countertops. Show materials, finishes, edge and backsplash profiles, methods of joining, and cutouts for plumbing fixtures.
1. Show locations and details of joints.
2. Show direction of directional pattern, if any.
3. For countertops, show locations and sizes of cutouts and holes for items installed in metal countertops.
C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of material exposed to view.
D. Samples for Verification: For the following products:
1. Countertop material, 6 inches square.
1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver products only after casework and supports on which they will be installed has been completed in installation areas.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Solid Surfacing Countertops Renovation & Expansion Final Design 123661.16 - 2
100% Design Submittal
B. Keep finished surfaces of products covered with polyethylene film or other protective covering during handling and installation.
1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For fabricator.
1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Maintenance Data: For solid surface material countertops to include in maintenance manuals.
Include Product Data for care products used or recommended by Installer and names, addresses, and telephone numbers of local sources for products.
1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that employs skilled workers who custom-fabricate countertops similar to that required for this Project, and whose products have a record of successful inservice performance.
B. Installer Qualifications: Fabricator of countertops.
C. Mockups: Build mockups to demonstrate aesthetic effects and to set quality standards for fabrication and execution.
1. Build mockup of typical countertop as shown on Drawings.
2. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.
1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Verify dimensions of countertops by field measurements after base cabinets are installed but before countertop fabrication is complete. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work.
1.9 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate locations of utilities that will penetrate countertops or backsplashes.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SOLID SURFACE COUNTERTOP MATERIALS
A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide LG Hausys, Ltd.; Hi-Macs Series, Classic Collection or a comparable product by one of the following:
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Solid Surfacing Countertops Renovation & Expansion Final Design 123661.16 - 3
100% Design Submittal
1. DuPont; DuPont de Nemours, Inc.
2. Wilsonart LLC.
3. PSA Laboratory Furniture LLC.
B. Countertops: Provide front and end overhang of 1 inch over the base cabinets.
C. Solid Surface Material: Homogeneous-filled plastic resin complying with ICPA SS-1.
1. Type: Provide Standard type unless Special Purpose type is indicated.
2. Colors and Patterns: As indicated by manufacturer's designations As selected by Engineer from manufacturer's full range.
2.2 SOLID SURFACE COUNTERTOP FABRICATION
A. Fabricate countertops according to solid surface material manufacturer's written instructions and to the AWI/AWMAC/WI's "Architectural Woodwork Standards."
1. Grade: Custom.
B. Configuration:
1. Front: Straight, slightly eased at top.
2. Backsplash: Radius edge with 3/8-inch radius.
3. End Splash: Matching backsplash.
C. Countertops: 1/2-inch- thick, solid surface material with front edge built up with same material.
D. Backsplashes: 1/2-inch- thick, solid surface material.
E. Fabricate tops with shop-applied edges unless otherwise indicated. Comply with solid surface material manufacturer's written instructions for adhesives, sealers, fabrication, and finishing.
1. Fabricate with loose backsplashes for field assembly.
F. Joints: Fabricate countertops in sections for joining in field, with joints at locations indicated on Shop Drawings.
1. Minimize number of joints by fabricating countertops in longest possible lengths according to industry standards and for ease of product handling.
2. Joint Locations: Not within 18 inches of a sink or cooktop and not where a countertop section less than 36 inches long would result, unless unavoidable.
3. Splined Joints: Accurately cut kerfs in edges at joints for insertion of metal splines to maintain alignment of surfaces at joints. Make width of cuts slightly more than thickness of splines to provide snug fit. Provide at least three splines in each joint.
G. Cutouts and Holes:
1. Counter-Mounted Plumbing Fixtures: Prepare countertops in shop for field cutting openings for counter-mounted fixtures. Mark tops for cutouts and drill holes at corners of cutout locations. Make corner holes of largest radius practical. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Solid Surfacing Countertops Renovation & Expansion Final Design 123661.16 - 4
100% Design Submittal
2. Fittings: Drill countertops in shop for plumbing fittings, undercounter soap dispensers, and similar items.
H. Adhesive: Product recommended by solid surface material manufacturer.
I. Sealant for Countertops: Comply with applicable requirements in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants."
1. Mildew-resistant silicone sealant, clear.
2.3 STAINLESS-STEEL COUNTERTOP FABRICATIONS
A. Countertops: Fabricate from 0.062-inch- thick, stainless-steel sheet. Provide smooth, clean exposed tops and edges in uniform plane, free of defects. Provide front and end overhang of 1 inch over the base cabinets.
1. Joints: Fabricate countertops without field-made joints.
2. Weld shop-made joints.
3. Material: Stainless steel sheet T304.
4. Finish: Satin Finish No. 4
5. L-shaped, Countertops and Sinks are designed to accommodate the construction plans.
6. Provide fixture holes at sinks; indicate locations in shop drawings.
7. Sound deaden the undersurface with heavy-build mastic coating.
8. Extend the top down to provide a 1-inch- thick edge with a 1/2-inch return flange.
9. Form the backsplash coved to and integral with top surface, with a 1/2-inch- thick top edge and 1/2-inch return flange.
2.4 STAINLESS-STEEL COUNTERTOP MATERIALS
A. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A240/A240M, Type 304.
B. Sealant for Countertops: Manufacturer's standard sealant that complies with applicable requirements in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants" and the following:
1. Mildew-Resistant Joint Sealant
2. Joint Sealant: Latex Single component, nonsag, neutral curing, silicone; Class 25.
3. Color: Clear.
2.5 STAINLESS-STEEL FINISH
A. Grind and polish surfaces to produce uniform, directional satin finish matching No. 4 finish, with no evidence of welds and free of cross scratches. Run grain with long dimension of each piece. When polishing is completed, passivate and rinse surfaces. Remove embedded foreign matter and leave surfaces clean.
2.6 GRANITE COUNTERTOPS
A. Material Standard: Comply with ASTM C615/C615M.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Solid Surfacing Countertops Renovation & Expansion Final Design 123661.16 - 5
100% Design Submittal
B. Cut stone from contiguous, matched slabs in which natural markings occur.
C. Finish: Polished.
D. Match existing granite counter for color, finish, and other stone characteristics relating to aesthetic effects.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates to receive solid surface material countertops and conditions under which countertops will be installed, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of countertops.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
C. Prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of stone countertops.
3.2 CONSTRUCTION TOLERANCES STONE COUNTERTOPS
A. Variation from Level: Do not exceed 1/8 inch in 96 inches, 1/4 inch maximum.
B. Variation in Joint Width: Do not vary joint thickness more than one-fourth of nominal joint width.
C. Variation in Plane at Joints (Lipping): Do not exceed 1/64-inch difference between planes of adjacent units.
D. Variation in Line of Edge at Joints (Lipping): Do not exceed 1/64-inch difference between edges of adjacent units, where edge line continues across joint.
3.3 INSTALLATION SOLID SURFACE COUNTERTOP
A. Install countertops level to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 8 feet, 1/4 inch maximum. Do not exceed 1/64-inch difference between planes of adjacent units.
B. Fasten countertops by screwing through corner blocks of base units into underside of countertop. Predrill holes for screws as recommended by manufacturer. Align adjacent surfaces and, using adhesive in color to match countertop, form seams to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Carefully dress joints smooth, remove surface scratches, and clean entire surface.
C. Fasten subtops to cabinets by screwing through subtops into corner blocks of base cabinets.
Shim as needed to align subtops in a level plane.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Solid Surfacing Countertops Renovation & Expansion Final Design 123661.16 - 6
100% Design Submittal
D. Secure countertops to subtops with adhesive according to solid surface material manufacturer's written instructions. Align adjacent surfaces and, using adhesive in color to match countertop, form seams to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Carefully dress joints smooth, remove surface scratches, and clean entire surface.
E. Bond joints with adhesive and draw tight as countertops are set. Mask areas of countertops adjacent to joints to prevent adhesive smears.
1. Install metal splines in kerfs in countertop edges at joints. Fill kerfs with adhesive before inserting splines and remove excess immediately after adjoining units are drawn into position.
2. Clamp units to temporary bracing, supports, or each other to ensure that countertops are properly aligned and joints are of specified width.
F. Install backsplashes and end splashes by adhering to wall and countertops with adhesive. Mask areas of countertops and splashes adjacent to joints to prevent adhesive smears.
G. Install aprons to backing and countertops with adhesive. Mask areas of countertops and splashes adjacent to joints to prevent adhesive smears. Fasten by screwing through backing. Predrill holes for screws as recommended by manufacturer.
H. Complete cutouts not finished in shop. Mask areas of countertops adjacent to cutouts to prevent damage while cutting. Make cutouts to accurately fit items to be installed, and at right angles to finished surfaces unless beveling is required for clearance. Ease edges slightly to prevent snipping.
1. Seal edges of cutouts in particleboard subtops by saturating with varnish.
I. Apply sealant to gaps at walls; comply with Section 079200 "Joint Sealants."
3.4 INSTALLATION STAINLESS-STEEL COUNTERTOP
A. Install metal countertops level, plumb, and true; shim as required, using concealed shims.
B. Field Jointing: Where possible, make field jointing in the same manner as shop jointing; use fasteners recommended by manufacturer. Prepare edges to be joined in shop so Project-site processing of top and edge surfaces is not required. Locate field joints where shown on Shop Drawings.
C. Secure countertops to cabinets with Z- or L-type fasteners or equivalent; use two or more fasteners at each front, end, and back.
D. Abut top and edge surfaces in one true plane, with internal supports placed to prevent deflection.
E. Seal junctures of countertops, splashes, and walls with sealant for countertops.
F. Wall-Mounted Shelves: Fasten to supporting construction through upturned back edge at not less than 24 inches o.c.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Solid Surfacing Countertops Renovation & Expansion Final Design 123661.16 - 7
100% Design Submittal
1. For framed construction, fasten through wall or partition finishes directly to framing, blocking, or reinforcements.
3.5 INSTALLATION OF STONE COUNTERTOPS
A. Fasten subtops to cabinets by screwing through subtops into cornerblocks of base cabinets.
Shim as needed to align subtops in a level plane.
B. Install countertops over subtops with full spread of water-cleanable epoxy adhesive.
C. Do not cut stone in field unless otherwise indicated. If stone countertops or splashes require additional fabrication not specified to be performed at Project site, return to fabrication shop for adjustment.
D. Set stone to comply with requirements indicated. Shim and adjust stone to locations indicated, with uniform joints of widths indicated and with edges and faces aligned according to established relationships and indicated tolerances. Install anchors and other attachments indicated or necessary to secure stone countertops in place.
E. Bond joints with stone adhesive and draw tight as countertops are set. Mask areas of countertops adjacent to joints to prevent adhesive smears.
1. Install metal splines in kerfs in stone edges at joints. Fill kerfs with stone adhesive before inserting splines and remove excess immediately after adjoining units are drawn into position.
2. Clamp units to temporary bracing, supports, or each other to ensure that countertops are properly aligned and joints are of specified width.
F. Complete cutouts not finished in shop. Mask areas of countertops adjacent to cutouts to prevent damage while cutting. Use power saws with diamond blades to cut stone. Make cutouts to accurately fit items to be installed, and at right angles to finished surfaces unless beveling is required for clearance. Ease edges slightly to prevent snipping.
G. Install backsplashes and end splashes by adhering to wall with water-cleanable epoxy adhesive.
Leave 1/16-inch gap between countertop and splashes for filling with sealant. Use temporary shims to ensure uniform spacing.
H. Grout joints to comply with ANSI A108.10. Remove temporary shims before grouting. Tool grout uniformly and smoothly with plastic tool.
I. Apply sealant to joints and gaps specified for filling with sealant; comply with Section 079200 "Joint Sealants." Remove temporary shims before applying sealant.
3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Repair or remove and replace defective work as directed on completion of installation.
B. Clean finished surfaces. Remove and replace damaged products or touch up and refinish damaged areas to match original factory finish, as approved by Engineer. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Solid Surfacing Countertops Renovation & Expansion Final Design 123661.16 - 8
100% Design Submittal
C. Protection: Provide 6-mil plastic or other suitable water-resistant covering over countertop surfaces. Tape to underside of countertop at a minimum of 48 inches o.c. Remove protection at Substantial Completion.
D. In-Progress Cleaning: Clean stone countertops as work progresses. Remove adhesive, grout, mortar, and sealant smears immediately.
E. Remove and replace stone countertops of the following description:
1. Broken, chipped, stained, or otherwise damaged stone. Stone may be repaired if methods and results are approved by Engineer.
2. Defective countertops.
3. Defective joints, including misaligned joints.
4. Interior stone countertops and joints not matching approved Samples and mockups.
5. Interior stone countertops not complying with other requirements indicated.
F. Replace in a manner that results in stone countertops matching approved Samples and mockups, complying with other requirements, and showing no evidence of replacement.
G. Clean stone countertops no fewer than six days after completion of sealant installation, using clean water and soft rags. Do not use wire brushes, acid-type cleaning agents, cleaning compounds with caustic or harsh fillers, or other materials or methods that may damage stone.
H. Sealer Application stone countertop: Apply stone sealer to comply with stone producer's and sealer manufacturer's written instructions.
END OF SECTION 123661.16
Division 21
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Fire-Suppression Piping Renovation & Expansion Final Design 210517 - 1
100% Design Submittal
SECTION 210517 - SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Sleeves.
2. Stack-sleeve fittings.
3. Sleeve-seal systems.
4. Sleeve-seal fittings.
5. Grout.
6. Silicone sealants.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Field quality-control reports.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SLEEVES
A. Cast-Iron Pipe Sleeves: Cast or fabricated of cast or ductile iron and equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe, with plain ends and integral waterstop.
B. Steel Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, anticorrosion coated or galvanized, with plain ends and integral welded waterstop collar.
C. Galvanized-Steel Sheet Sleeves: 0.0239-inch minimum thickness; round tube closed with welded longitudinal joint.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Fire-Suppression Piping Renovation & Expansion Final Design 210517 - 2
100% Design Submittal
2.2 STACK-SLEEVE FITTINGS
A. Description: Manufactured, Dura-coated or Duco-coated or galvanized cast-iron sleeve with integral clamping flange for use in waterproof floors and roofs. Include clamping ring, bolts, and nuts for membrane flashing.
1. Underdeck Clamp: Clamping ring with setscrews.
2.3 SLEEVE-SEAL SYSTEMS
A. Description:
1. Modular sealing-element unit, designed for field assembly, for filling annular space between piping and sleeve.
2. Designed to form a hydrostatic seal of 20 psig minimum.
3. Sealing Elements: EPDM-rubber interlocking links shaped to fit surface of pipe. Include type and number required for pipe material and size.
4. Pressure Plates: Carbon steel or Composite plastic.
5. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel, with corrosion-resistant coating, ASTM B 633 of length required to secure pressure plates to sealing elements.
2.4 SLEEVE-SEAL FITTINGS
A. Description: Manufactured plastic, sleeve-type, waterstop assembly made for imbedding in concrete slab or wall.
B. Plastic or rubber waterstop collar with center opening to match piping OD.
2.5 GROUT
A. Description: Nonshrink, for interior and exterior sealing openings in non-fire-rated walls or floors.
B. Standard: ASTM C 1107/C 1107M, Grade B, post-hardening and volume-adjusting, dry, hydraulic-cement grout.
C. Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength.
D. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.
2.6 SILICONE SEALANTS
A. Silicone, S, NS, 25, NT: Single-component, nonsag, plus 25 percent and minus 25 percent movement capability, nontraffic-use, neutral-curing silicone joint sealant, ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT.
B. Silicone, S, P, 25, T, NT: Single-component, pourable, plus 25 percent and minus 25 percent movement capability, traffic- and nontraffic-use, neutral-curing silicone joint sealant; ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Fire-Suppression Piping Renovation & Expansion Final Design 210517 - 3
100% Design Submittal
ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade P, Class 25, Uses T and NT. Grade P Pourable (self-leveling) formulation is for opening in floors and other horizontal surfaces that are not fire rated.
C. Silicone Foam: Multicomponent, silicone-based liquid elastomers that, when mixed, expand and cure in place to produce a flexible, nonshrinking foam.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 SLEEVE INSTALLATION
A. Install sleeves for piping passing through penetrations in floors, partitions, roofs, and walls.
B. For sleeves that will have sleeve-seal system installed, select sleeves of size large enough to provide 1-inch annular clear space between piping and concrete slabs and walls.
1. Sleeves are not required for core-drilled holes.
C. Install sleeves in concrete floors, concrete roof slabs, and concrete walls as new slabs and walls are constructed.
1. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces. a. Exception: Extend sleeves installed in floors of mechanical equipment areas or other wet areas 2 inches above finished floor level.
2. Using grout or silicone sealant, seal space outside of sleeves in slabs and walls without sleeve-seal system.
D. Install sleeves for pipes passing through interior partitions.
1. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces.
2. Install sleeves that are large enough to provide 1/4-inch annular clear space between sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation.
3. Seal annular space between sleeve and piping or piping insulation; use joint sealants appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint.
E. Fire-Resistance-Rated Penetrations, Horizontal Assembly Penetrations, and Smoke Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire or smoke rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with fire- and smoke-stop materials. Comply with requirements for firestopping and fill materials specified in Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping."
3.2 STACK-SLEEVE-FITTING INSTALLATION
A. Install stack-sleeve fittings in new slabs as slabs are constructed.
1. Install fittings that are large enough to provide 1/4-inch annular clear space between sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Fire-Suppression Piping Renovation & Expansion Final Design 210517 - 4
100% Design Submittal
2. Secure flashing between clamping flanges for pipes penetrating floors with membrane waterproofing. Comply with requirements for flashing specified in Section 076200 "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim."
3. Install section of cast-iron soil pipe to extend sleeve to 2 inches above finished floor level.
4. Extend cast-iron sleeve fittings below floor slab as required to secure clamping ring if ring is specified.
5. Use silicone sealant to seal around the outside of stack-sleeve fittings.
B. Fire-Resistance-Rated Penetrations, Horizontal Assembly Penetrations, and Smoke Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire or smoke rating of floors at pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with fire- or smoke-stop materials. Comply with requirements for firestopping specified in Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping."
3.3 SLEEVE-SEAL-SYSTEM INSTALLATION
A. Install sleeve-seal systems in sleeves in exterior concrete walls and slabs-on-grade at service piping entries into building.
B. Select type, size, and number of sealing elements required for piping material and size and for sleeve ID or hole size. Position piping in center of sleeve. Center piping in penetration, assemble sleeve-seal system components, and install in annular space between piping and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make a watertight seal.
3.4 SLEEVE-SEAL-FITTING INSTALLATION
A. Install sleeve-seal fittings in new walls and slabs as they are constructed.
B. Assemble fitting components of length to be flush with both surfaces of concrete slabs and walls. Position waterstop flange to be centered in concrete slab or wall.
C. Secure nailing flanges to concrete forms.
D. Use grout or silicone sealant, to seal the space around outside of sleeve-seal fittings.
3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform the following tests and inspections:
1. Leak Test: After allowing for a full cure, test sleeves and sleeve seals for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist.
B. Sleeves and sleeve seals will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.
C. Prepare test and inspection reports.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Fire-Suppression Piping Renovation & Expansion Final Design 210517 - 5
100% Design Submittal
3.6 SLEEVE AND SLEEVE-SEAL SCHEDULE
A. Use sleeves and sleeve seals for the following piping-penetration applications:
1. Exterior Concrete Walls above Grade:
a. Piping Smaller Than NPS 6: Cast-iron pipe sleeves Steel pipe sleeves. b. Piping NPS 6 and Larger: Cast-iron pipe sleeves Steel pipe sleeves.
2. Exterior Concrete Walls below Grade:
a. Piping Smaller Than NPS 6: Cast-iron pipe sleeves with sleeve-seal system Steel pipe sleeves with sleeve-seal system.
1) Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between piping and sleeve for installing sleeve-seal system.
b. Piping NPS 6 and Larger: Cast-iron pipe sleeves with sleeve-seal system Steel pipe sleeves with sleeve-seal system.
1) Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between piping and sleeve for installing sleeve-seal system.
3. Concrete Slabs-on-Grade:
a. Piping Smaller Than NPS 6: Cast-iron pipe sleeves with sleeve-seal system Galvanized steel pipe sleeves with sleeve-seal system.
1) Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between piping and sleeve for installing sleeve-seal system.
b. Piping NPS 6 and Larger: Cast-iron pipe sleeves with sleeve-seal system Galvanized steel pipe sleeves with sleeve-seal system.
1) Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between piping and sleeve for installing sleeve-seal system.
4. Concrete Slabs above Grade:
a. Piping Smaller Than NPS 6: Steel pipe sleeves PVC pipe sleeves Molded-PVC sleeves.
b. Piping NPS 6 and Larger: Steel pipe sleeves PVC pipe sleeves.
5. Interior Partitions:
a. Piping Smaller Than NPS 6: Steel pipe sleeves PVC pipe sleeves. b. Piping NPS 6 and Larger: Galvanized-steel sheet sleeves.
END OF SECTION 210517
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Fire-Suppression Piping Renovation & Expansion Final Design 210517 - 6
100% Design Submittal
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Escutcheons for Fire-Suppression Piping Renovation & Expansion Final Design 210518 - 1
100% Design Submittal
SECTION 210518 - ESCUTCHEONS FOR FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Escutcheons.
2. Floor plates.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Existing Piping to Remain: Existing piping that is not to be removed and that is not otherwise indicated to be removed, removed and salvaged, or removed and reinstalled.
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 ESCUTCHEONS
A. One-Piece, Steel Type: With polished, chrome-plated finish and setscrew fastener.
B. One-Piece, Stainless Steel Type: With polished stainless steel finish.
C. One-Piece, Cast-Brass Type: With polished, chrome-plated finish and setscrew fastener.
D. One-Piece, Deep-Pattern Type: Deep-drawn, box-shaped steel with polished, chrome-plated finish and spring-clip fasteners.
E. One-Piece, Stamped-Steel Type: With polished, chrome-plated finish and spring-clip fasteners.
F. Split-Plate, Stamped-Steel Type: With polished, chrome-plated finish; concealed and exposedrivet hinge; and spring-clip fasteners. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Escutcheons for Fire-Suppression Piping Renovation & Expansion Final Design 210518 - 2
100% Design Submittal
2.2 FLOOR PLATES
A. Split Floor Plates: Steel with concealed hinge.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and finished floors.
B. Install escutcheons with ID to closely fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of piping and with OD that completely covers opening.
1. Escutcheons for New Piping and Relocated Existing Piping:
a. Piping with Fitting or Sleeve Protruding from Wall: One-piece, deep pattern. b. Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece steel with polished, chrome-plated finish.
c. Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece stainless steel with polished stainless steel finish.
d. Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece steel with polished, chrome-plated finish.
e. Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece stainless steel with polished stainless steel finish.
f. Bare Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: One-piece steel with polished, chromeplated finish. g. Bare Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: One-piece stamped steel or split-plate, stamped steel with concealed hinge or split-plate, stamped steel with exposed-rivet hinge with polished, chrome-plated finish.
h. Bare Piping in Equipment Rooms: One-piece steel with polished, chrome-plated finish.
i. Bare Piping in Equipment Rooms: One-piece stamped steel or split-plate, stamped steel with concealed hinge or split-plate, stamped steel with exposed-rivet hinge with polished, chrome-plated finish.
2. Escutcheons for Existing Piping to Remain:
a. Chrome-Plated Piping: Split-plate, stamped steel with concealed or exposed-rivet hinge with polished, chrome-plated finish.
b. Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: Split-plate, stamped steel with concealed or exposed-rivet hinge with polished, chrome-plated finish.
c. Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: Split-plate, stamped steel with concealed or exposed-rivet hinge with polished, chrome-plated finish. d. Bare Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: Split-plate, stamped steel with concealed or exposed-rivet hinge with polished, chrome-plated finish. e. Bare Piping in Equipment Rooms: Split-plate, stamped steel with concealed or exposed-rivet hinge with polished, chrome-plated finish. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Escutcheons for Fire-Suppression Piping Renovation & Expansion Final Design 210518 - 3
100% Design Submittal
C. Install floor plates for piping penetrations of equipment-room floors.
D. Install floor plates with ID to closely fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of piping and with OD that completely covers opening.
1. New Piping and Relocated Existing Piping: One-piece, floor plate.
2. Existing Piping: Split floor plate.
3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Using new materials, replace broken and damaged escutcheons and floor plates.
END OF SECTION 210518
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Escutcheons for Fire-Suppression Piping Renovation & Expansion Final Design 210518 - 4
100% Design Submittal
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Hangers and Supports for Fire Suppression Piping and Equipment Renovation & Expansion Final Design 210529 - 1
100% Design Submittal
SECTION 210529 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION PIPING AND
EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Metal pipe hangers and supports.
2. Trapeze pipe hangers.
3. Metal framing systems.
4. Fastener systems.
5. Equipment supports.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 055000 "Metal Fabrications" for structural-steel shapes and plates for trapeze hangers for pipe and equipment supports.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
B. Shop Drawings: Signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer. Show fabrication and installation details and include calculations for the following:
1. Trapeze pipe hangers.
2. Metal framing systems.
3. Equipment supports.
C. Delegated-Design Submittal: For trapeze hangers indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.
1. Detail fabrication and assembly of trapeze hangers.
2. Include design calculations for designing trapeze hangers.
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Welding certificates.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Hangers and Supports for Fire Suppression Piping and Equipment Renovation & Expansion Final Design 210529 - 2
100% Design Submittal
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Structural-Steel Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M.
B. Pipe Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and operators according to 2015 ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section IX.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements," to design trapeze pipe hangers and equipment supports.
B. Structural Performance: Ensure hangers and supports for fire-suppression piping and equipment withstand the effects of gravity loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated according to ASCE/SEI 7.
1. Design supports for multiple pipes, including pipe stands, capable of supporting combined weight of supported systems, system contents, and test water.
2. Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of supported equipment and connected systems and components.
3. Design seismic-restraint hangers and supports for piping and equipment and obtain approval from authorities having jurisdiction.
C. NFPA Compliance: Comply with NFPA 13.
D. UL Compliance: Comply with UL 203.
2.2 METAL PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. Carbon-Steel Pipe Hangers and Supports:
1. Description: Factory-fabricated components, NFPA approved, UL listed, or FM approved for fire-suppression piping support.
2. Galvanized Metallic Coatings: Pregalvanized or hot-dip galvanized.
3. Hanger Rods: Continuous-thread rod, nuts, and washer made of carbon steel or stainless steel.
2.3 TRAPEZE PIPE HANGERS
A. Description: MSS SP-58, Type 59, shop- or field-fabricated pipe-support assembly, made from structural-carbon-steel shapes, with NFPA-approved, UL-listed, or FM-approved carbon-steel hanger rods, nuts, saddles, and U-bolts.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Hangers and Supports for Fire Suppression Piping and Equipment Renovation & Expansion Final Design 210529 - 3
100% Design Submittal
2.4 METAL FRAMING SYSTEMS
A. MFMA Manufacturer Metal Framing Systems:
1. Description: Shop- or field-fabricated pipe-support assembly, made of steel channels, accessories, fittings, and other components for supporting multiple parallel pipes.
2. Standard: Comply with MFMA-4, factory-fabricated components for field assembly.
3. Channels: Continuous slotted carbon-steel channel with inturned lips.
4. Channel Width: Selected for applicable load criteria.
5. Channel Nuts: Formed or stamped nuts or other devices designed to fit into channel slot and, when tightened, prevent slipping along channel.
6. Hanger Rods: Continuous-thread rod, nuts, and washer made of carbon steel.
7. Metallic Coating: Pregalvanized G90 Electroplated zinc Hot-dip galvanized.
8. Paint Coating: Green epoxy, acrylic, or urethane.
B. Non-MFMA Manufacturer Metal Framing Systems:
1. Description: Shop- or field-fabricated pipe-support assembly, made of steel channels, accessories, fittings, and other components for supporting multiple parallel pipes.
2. Standard: Comply with MFMA-4, factory-fabricated components for field assembly.
3. Channels: Continuous slotted carbon-steel channel with inturned lips.
4. Channel Width: Select for applicable load criteria.
5. Channel Nuts: Formed or stamped nuts or other devices designed to fit into channel slot and, when tightened, prevent slipping along channel.
6. Hanger Rods: Continuous-thread rod, nuts, and washer made of carbon steel.
7. Metallic Coating: Pregalvanized G90 Hot-dip galvanized.
8. Paint Coating: Green epoxy, acrylic, or urethane.
2.5 FASTENER SYSTEMS
A. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: NFPA-approved, UL-listed, or FM-approved threaded-steel stud, for use in hardened Portland cement concrete, with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.
B. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: NFPA-approved, UL-listed, or FM-approved, insert-wedgetype anchors, for use in hardened Portland cement concrete; with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.
1. Indoor Applications: Zinc-coated or Stainless steel.
2. Outdoor Applications: Stainless steel.
2.6 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS
A. Description: NFPA-approved, UL-listed, or FM-approved, welded, shop- or field-fabricated equipment support, made from structural-carbon-steel shapes. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Hangers and Supports for Fire Suppression Piping and Equipment Renovation & Expansion Final Design 210529 - 4
100% Design Submittal
2.7 MATERIALS
A. Aluminum: ASTM B 221.
B. Carbon Steel: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M.
C. Structural Steel: ASTM A 36/A 36M, carbon-steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized.
D. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 240/A 240M.
E. Grout: ASTM C 1107/C 1107M, factory-mixed and -packaged, dry, hydraulic-cement, nonshrink and nonmetallic grout, suitable for interior and exterior applications.
1. Properties: Nonstaining, noncorrosive, and nongaseous.
2. Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 APPLICATION
A. Comply with requirements in Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping" for firestopping materials and installation, for penetrations through fire-rated walls, ceilings, and assemblies.
B. Strength of Support Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of components, so strength will be adequate to carry present and future static loads within specified loading limits.
Minimum static design load used for strength determination is weight of supported components (water-filled piping) plus 250 lb.
3.2 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION
A. Metal Pipe-Hanger Installation: Comply with installation requirements of approvals and listings. Install hangers, supports, clamps, and attachments as required to properly support piping from building structure.
B. Metal Trapeze Pipe-Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-58. Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of horizontal piping, and support together on field-fabricated trapeze pipe hangers.
1. Pipes of Various Sizes: Support together and space trapezes for smallest pipe size, or install intermediate supports for smaller-diameter pipes as specified for individual pipe hangers.
2. Field fabricate from ASTM A 36/A 36M carbon-steel shapes selected for loads being supported. Weld steel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M.
C. Metal Framing System Installation: Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of piping, and support together on field-assembled metal strut systems.
D. Thermal Hanger-Shield Installation: Install in pipe hanger or shield for insulated piping. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Hangers and Supports for Fire Suppression Piping and Equipment Renovation & Expansion Final Design 210529 - 5
100% Design Submittal
E. Fastener System Installation:
1. Install powder-actuated fasteners for use in lightweight concrete or concrete slabs less than 4 inches thick in concrete, after concrete is placed and completely cured. Use operators that are licensed by powder-actuated tool manufacturer. Install fasteners according to powder-actuated tool manufacturer's operating manual. Install in accordance with approvals and listings.
2. Install mechanical-expansion anchors in concrete, after concrete is placed and completely cured. Install fasteners according to manufacturer's written instructions. Install in accordance with approvals and listings.
F. Install hangers and supports complete with necessary attachments, inserts, bolts, rods, nuts, washers, and other accessories.
G. Equipment Support Installation: Fabricate from welded-structural-steel shapes.
H. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled thermal and seismic movement of piping systems, to permit freedom of movement between pipe anchors, and to facilitate action of expansion joints, expansion loops, expansion bends, and similar units.
I. Install lateral bracing with pipe hangers and supports to prevent swaying.
J. Install building attachments within concrete slabs or attach to structural steel. Install additional attachments at concentrated loads, including valves, flanges, and strainers, NPS 2-1/2 and larger and at changes in direction of piping. Install concrete inserts before concrete is placed; fasten inserts to forms and install reinforcing bars through openings at top of inserts.
K. Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports, so that piping live and dead loads and stresses from movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment.
L. Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes and to not exceed maximum pipe deflections allowed by ASME B31.9 for building services piping.
3.3 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS
A. Fabricate structural-steel stands to suspend equipment from structure overhead or to support equipment above floor.
B. Grouting: Place grout under supports for equipment and make bearing surface smooth.
C. Provide lateral bracing, to prevent swaying, for equipment supports.
3.4 METAL FABRICATIONS
A. Cut, drill, and fit miscellaneous metal fabrications for trapeze pipe hangers and equipment supports.
B. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. Field weld connections that cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Hangers and Supports for Fire Suppression Piping and Equipment Renovation & Expansion Final Design 210529 - 6
100% Design Submittal
C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M procedures for shielded, metal arc welding; appearance and quality of welds; and methods used in correcting welding work; and with the following:
1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals.
2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
3. Remove welding flux immediately.
4. Finish welds at exposed connections, so no roughness shows after finishing and so contours of welded surfaces match adjacent contours.
3.5 ADJUSTING
A. Hanger Adjustments: Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments and to achieve indicated slope of pipe.
B. Trim excess length of continuous-thread hanger and support rods to 1-1/2 inches.
3.6 PAINTING
A. Touchup: Clean field welds and abraded, shop-painted areas. Paint exposed areas immediately after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as those used for shop painting. Comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces.
1. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils.
B. Touchup: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded, shoppainted areas on miscellaneous metal are specified in Section 099113 "Exterior Painting." Section 099123 "Interior Painting." Section 099600 "High-Performance Coatings." C. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas, and apply galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780/A 780M.
3.7 HANGER AND SUPPORT SCHEDULE
A. Specific hanger and support requirements are in Sections specifying piping systems and equipment.
B. Comply with NFPA requirements for pipe-hanger selections and applications that are not specified in piping system Sections.
C. Use hangers and supports with galvanized metallic coatings for piping and equipment that will not have field-applied finishes.
D. Use nonmetallic coatings on attachments for electrolytic protection where attachments are in direct contact with copper tubing.
E. Use carbon-steel pipe hangers and supports metal trapeze pipe hangers and metal framing systems and attachments for general service applications. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Hangers and Supports for Fire Suppression Piping and Equipment Renovation & Expansion Final Design 210529 - 7
100% Design Submittal
F. Use stainless steel pipe hangers and stainless steel or corrosion-resistant attachments for hostile environment applications.
G. Horizontal-Piping Hangers and Supports: Comply with NFPA requirements. Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:
1. Adjustable, Steel Clevis Hangers (MSS Type 1): For suspension of noninsulated or insulated, stationary pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 30.
2. Steel Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 4): For suspension of NPS 1/2 to NPS 24 if little or no insulation is required.
3. Adjustable, Swivel-Ring Band Hangers (MSS Type 10): For suspension of noninsulated, stationary pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 8.
4. Split Pipe Ring with or without Turnbuckle Hangers (MSS Type 11): For suspension of noninsulated, stationary pipes NPS 3/8 to NPS 8.
5. Extension Hinged or Two-Bolt Split Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 12): For suspension of noninsulated, stationary pipes NPS 3/8 to NPS 3.
6. U-Bolts (MSS Type 24): For support of heavy pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 30.
7. Pipe Saddle Supports (MSS Type 36): For support of pipes NPS 4 to NPS 36, with steelpipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange or carbon-steel plate.
8. Pipe Stanchion Saddles (MSS Type 37): For support of pipes NPS 4 to NPS 36, with steel-pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange or carbon-steel plate, and with U-bolt to retain pipe.
9. Adjustable Pipe Saddle Supports (MSS Type 38): For stanchion-type support for pipes NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 36 if vertical adjustment is required, with steel-pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange.
H. Vertical-Piping Clamps: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:
1. Extension Pipe or Riser Clamps (MSS Type 8): For support of pipe risers NPS 3/4 to NPS 24.
2. Carbon- or Alloy-Steel Riser Clamps (MSS Type 42): For support of pipe risers NPS 3/4 to NPS 24 if longer ends are required for riser clamps.
I. Hanger-Rod Attachments: Comply with NFPA requirements.
J. Building Attachments: Comply with NFPA requirements. Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:
1. Steel or Malleable-Concrete Inserts (MSS Type 18): For upper attachment to suspend pipe hangers from concrete ceiling.
2. C-Clamps (MSS Type 23): For structural shapes.
3. Side-Beam Brackets (MSS Type 34): For sides of steel or wooden beams.
K. Saddles and Shields: Comply with NFPA requirements. Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:
1. Steel-Pipe-Covering Protection Saddles (MSS Type 39): To fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation.
2. Protection Shields (MSS Type 40): Of length recommended in writing by manufacturer to prevent crushing insulation.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Hangers and Supports for Fire Suppression Piping and Equipment Renovation & Expansion Final Design 210529 - 8
100% Design Submittal
3. Thermal Hanger-Shield Inserts: For supporting insulated pipe.
L. Comply with NFPA requirements for trapeze pipe-hanger selections and applications that are not specified in piping system Sections.
M. Comply with MFMA-103 for metal framing system selections and applications that are not specified in piping system Sections.
N. Use powder-actuated fasteners or mechanical-expansion anchors instead of building attachments where required in concrete construction.
END OF SECTION 210529
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Identification for Fire-Suppression Piping and Equipment Renovation & Expansion Final Design 210553 - 1
100% Design Submittal
SECTION 210553 - IDENTIFICATION FOR FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING AND EQUIPMENT PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Equipment labels.
2. Warning signs and labels.
3. Pipe labels.
4. Valve tags.
5. Warning tags.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
B. Samples: For color, letter style, and graphic representation required for each identification material and device.
C. Equipment-Label Schedule: Include a listing of all equipment to be labeled and the proposed content for each label.
D. Valve Schedules: Valve numbering scheme.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 EQUIPMENT LABELS
A. Metal Labels for Equipment:
1. Material and Thickness: stainless steel, 0.025 inch or anodized aluminum, 0.032 inch thick, with predrilled holes for attachment hardware.
2. Letter Color: Black Red.
3. Background Color: White.
4. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than 2-1/2 by 3/4 inch.
5. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24 inches, 1/2 inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger lettering ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Identification for Fire-Suppression Piping and Equipment Renovation & Expansion Final Design 210553 - 2
100% Design Submittal
for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths the size of principal lettering.
6. Fasteners: Stainless steel rivets or self-tapping screws.
7. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate.
B. Plastic Labels for Equipment:
1. Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical engraving, 1/16 inch thick, with predrilled holes for attachment hardware.
2. Letter Color: Black Red.
3. Background Color: White.
4. Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures up to 160 deg F.
5. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than 2-1/2 by 3/4 inch.
6. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24 inches, 1/2 inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths the size of principal lettering.
7. Fasteners: Stainless steel rivets or self-tapping screws.
8. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate.
C. Label Content: Include equipment's Drawing designation or unique equipment number, Drawing numbers where equipment is indicated (plans, details, and schedules), and the Specification Section number and title where equipment is specified.
D. Equipment-Label Schedule: For each item of equipment to be labeled, on 8-1/2-by-11-inch bond paper. Tabulate equipment identification number and identify Drawing numbers where equipment is indicated (plans, details, and schedules) and the Specification Section number and title where equipment is specified. Equipment schedule included in operation and maintenance data.
2.2 WARNING SIGNS AND LABELS
A. Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical engraving, 1/16 inch thick, with predrilled holes for attachment hardware.
B. Letter Color: Red White.
C. Background Color: Red White.
D. Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures up to 160 deg F.
E. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than 2-1/2 by 3/4 inch.
F. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24 inches, 1/2 inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths the size of principal lettering.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Identification for Fire-Suppression Piping and Equipment Renovation & Expansion Final Design 210553 - 3
100% Design Submittal
G. Fasteners: Stainless steel rivets or self-tapping screws.
H. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate.
I. Label Content: Include caution and warning information, plus emergency notification instructions.
2.3 PIPE LABELS
A. General Requirements for Manufactured Pipe Labels: Preprinted, color-coded, with lettering indicating service and showing flow direction according to ASME A13.1.
B. Pretensioned Pipe Labels: Precoiled, semirigid plastic formed to partially cover circumference of pipe and to attach to pipe without fasteners or adhesive.
C. Self-adhesive Pipe Labels: Printed plastic with contact-type, permanent-adhesive backing.
D. Pipe-Label Contents: Include identification of piping service using same designations or abbreviations as used on Drawings, pipe size, and an arrow indicating flow direction.
1. Flow-Direction Arrows: Integral with piping-system service lettering to accommodate both directions; or as separate unit on each pipe label to indicate flow direction.
2. Lettering Size: At least 1/2 inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances.
E. Pipe-Label Colors:
1. Background Color: Safety Red.
2. Letter Color: White.
2.4 VALVE TAGS
A. Description: Stamped or engraved with 1/4-inch letters for piping-system abbreviation and 1/2- inch numbers.
1. Tag Material: Brass, 0.032 inch stainless steel, 0.025 inch or anodized aluminum, 0.032 inch thick, with predrilled holes for attachment hardware.
2. Fasteners: Brass wire-link chain beaded chain.
3. Valve-Tag Color: Safety Red.
4. Letter Color: White.
B. Valve Schedules: For each piping system, on 8-1/2-by-11-inch bond paper. Tabulate valve number, piping system, system abbreviation (as shown on valve tag), location of valve (room or space), normal-operating position (open, closed, or modulating), and variations for identification. Mark valves for emergency shutoff and similar special uses.
1. Valve-tag schedule included in operation and maintenance data. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Identification for Fire-Suppression Piping and Equipment Renovation & Expansion Final Design 210553 - 4
100% Design Submittal
2.5 WARNING TAGS
A. Description: Preprinted or partially preprinted, accident-prevention tags, of plasticized card stock with matte finish suitable for writing.
1. Size: Approximately 4 by 7 inches.
2. Fasteners: Brass grommet and wire.
3. Nomenclature: Large-size primary caption such as "DANGER," "CAUTION," or "DO NOT OPERATE."
4. Color: Safety Yellow background with black lettering.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Clean piping and equipment surfaces of incompatible primers, paints, and encapsulants, as well as dirt, oil, grease, release agents, and other substances that could impair bond of identification devices.
3.2 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of surfaces where devices are to be installed.
B. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with locations of access panels and doors.
C. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment.
3.3 EQUIPMENT LABEL INSTALLATION
A. Install or permanently fasten labels on each major item of mechanical equipment.
B. Locate equipment labels where accessible and visible.
3.4 PIPE LABEL INSTALLATION
A. Piping: Painting of piping is specified in Section 099123 "Interior Painting." Section 099600 "High-Performance Coatings."
B. Pipe-Label Locations: Locate pipe labels where piping is exposed or above accessible ceilings in finished spaces; machine rooms; accessible maintenance spaces such as shafts, tunnels, and plenums; and exterior exposed locations as follows:
1. Near each valve and control device.
2. Near each branch connection excluding short takeoffs. Where flow pattern is not obvious, mark each pipe at branch.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Identification for Fire-Suppression Piping and Equipment Renovation & Expansion Final Design 210553 - 5
100% Design Submittal
3. Near penetrations and on both sides of through walls, floors, ceilings, and inaccessible enclosures.
4. At access doors, manholes, and similar access points that permit a view of concealed piping.
5. Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination.
6. Spaced at maximum intervals of 50 feet along each run. Reduce intervals to 25 feet in areas of congested piping and equipment.
7. On piping above removable acoustical ceilings. Omit intermediately spaced labels.
C. Directional Flow Arrows: Use arrows to indicate direction of flow in pipes including pipes where flow is allowed in both directions.
3.5 VALVE-TAG INSTALLATION
A. Install tags on valves and control devices in fire-suppression piping systems. List tagged valves in a valve-tag schedule.
B. Valve-Tag Application Schedule: Tag valves according to size, shape, and with captions similar to those indicated in "Valve-Tag Size and Shape" Subparagraph below:
1. Valve-Tag Size and Shape:
a. Wet-Pipe Sprinkler System: 2 inches, round.
3.6 WARNING-TAG INSTALLATION
A. Write required message on, and attach warning tags to, equipment and other items where required.
END OF SECTION 210553
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Identification for Fire-Suppression Piping and Equipment Renovation & Expansion Final Design 210553 - 6
100% Design Submittal
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Wet-Pipe Sprinkler Systems Renovation & Expansion Final Design 211313 - 1
100% Design Submittal
SECTION 211313 - WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Pipes, fittings, and specialties.
2. Specialty valves.
3. Sprinklers.
4. Alarm devices.
5. Pressure gages.
6. Delegated Design.
B. Related Requirements:
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Standard-Pressure Sprinkler Piping: Wet-pipe sprinkler system piping designed to operate at working pressure of 175-psig maximum.
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
1. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories.
B. Shop Drawings: For wet-pipe sprinkler systems.
1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and attachment details.
1.5 DELEGATED DESIGN SUBMITTALS
A. For wet-pipe sprinkler systems indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Wet-Pipe Sprinkler Systems Renovation & Expansion Final Design 211313 - 2
100% Design Submittal
1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Coordination Drawings: Sprinkler systems, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved:
1. Domestic water piping.
2. Compressed air piping.
3. HVAC hydronic piping.
4. Items penetrating finished ceiling include the following:
a. Lighting fixtures.
b. Air outlets and inlets.
B. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer.
C. Design Data:
1. Approved Sprinkler Piping Drawings: Working plans, prepared according to NFPA 13, that have been approved by authorities having jurisdiction, including hydraulic calculations for expanded and existing areas as indicated on the supplied plans.
D. Welding certificates.
E. Field Test Reports:
1. Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance requirements and as described in NFPA 13. Include "Contractor's Material and Test Certificate for Aboveground Piping."
2. Fire-hydrant flow test report.
F. Field quality-control reports.
1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For wet-pipe sprinkler systems and specialties to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.
1.8 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Sprinkler Cabinets: Finished, wall-mounted, steel cabinet with hinged cover, and with space for minimum of six spare sprinklers plus sprinkler wrench. Include number of sprinklers required by NFPA 13 and sprinkler wrench. Include separate cabinet with sprinklers and wrench for each type of sprinkler used on Project. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Wet-Pipe Sprinkler Systems Renovation & Expansion Final Design 211313 - 3
100% Design Submittal
1.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications:
1. Installer's responsibilities include designing, fabricating, and installing sprinkler systems and providing professional engineering services needed to assume engineering responsibility. Base calculations on results of fire-hydrant flow test. a. Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of working plans, calculations, and field test reports by a qualified professional engineer.
B. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and operators according to 2010 ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.
1.10 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Interruption of Existing Sprinkler Service: Do not interrupt sprinkler service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary sprinkler service according to requirements indicated:
1. Notify Engineer and Owner no fewer than two days in advance of proposed interruption of sprinkler service.
2. Do not proceed with interruption of sprinkler service without Engineer's and Owner's written permission.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Verify sprinkler system equipment, specialties, accessories, installation, and testing comply with the following:
1. NFPA 13.
B. Standard-Pressure Piping System Component: Listed for 175-psig minimum working pressure.
C. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements," to design wet-pipe sprinkler systems.
1. Available fire-hydrant flow test records indicate the following conditions:
a. Date: 10/30/2024.
b. Time: 9:25 a.m.
c. Performed by: Robert Foye of Hedrick Fire Protection. d. Location of Residual Fire Hydrant R: 1950 N Nevada Street, Redland, CA_ Gauge Hydrant.
e. Location of Flow Fire Hydrant F: 1950 N Nevada Street, Redland, CA_ Flow Hydrant.
f. Static Pressure at Residual Fire Hydrant R: 56 psi.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Wet-Pipe Sprinkler Systems Renovation & Expansion Final Design 211313 - 4
100% Design Submittal
g. Measured Flow at Flow Fire Hydrant F: 1,456 gpm.
h. Residual Pressure at Residual Fire Hydrant R: 39.5 psi. i. Device Used: Big Boy Hose Monster
j. Flow at 20 psi: 2,219.8 gpm
2. Ensure sprinkler system design approved by authorities having jurisdiction. a. Margin of Safety for Available Water Flow and Pressure: 10 percent, including losses through water-service piping, valves, and backflow preventers. b. Sprinkler Occupancy Hazard Classifications:
1) Building Service Areas: Ordinary Hazard, Group 1.
2) Electrical Equipment Rooms: Ordinary Hazard, Group 1. 3) General Storage Areas: Ordinary Hazard, Group 1.
4) Library Stack Areas: Ordinary Hazard, Group 2.
5) Mechanical Equipment Rooms: Ordinary Hazard, Group 1. 6) Office and Public Areas: Light Hazard.
7) Lab Rooms: Ordinary Hazard, Group 1
3. Minimum Density for Automatic-Sprinkler Piping Design:
a. Laboratories: 0.15 gpm over 1,500-sq. ft.
b. Light-Hazard Occupancy: 0.10 gpm over 1500-sq. ft. area. c. Ordinary-Hazard, Group 1 Occupancy: 0.15 gpm over 1500-sq. ft. area. d. Ordinary-Hazard, Group 2 Occupancy: 0.20 gpm over 1500-sq. ft. area.
4. Maximum Protection Area per Sprinkler: NFPA 13 and UL listings. a. Office Spaces: 225 sq. ft..
b. Storage Areas: 130 sq. ft..
c. Mechanical Equipment Rooms: 130 sq. ft..
d. Electrical Equipment Rooms: 130 sq. ft..
e. Laboratories: 130 sq. ft.
D. Seismic Performance: Ensure sprinkler piping withstands the effects of earthquake motions determined according to NFPA 13 and ASCE/SEI 7.
2.2 STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS
A. Standard-Weight, Galvanized- and Black-Steel Pipe: ASTM A53/A53M, Type E, Grade B. Pipe ends may be factory or field formed to match joining method.
B. Schedule 10, Black-Steel Pipe: ASTM A135/A135M or ASTM A795/A795M, Schedule 10 in NPS 2.5 and larger; and NFPA 13-specified wall thickness in NPS 6 to NPS 10, plain end.
C. Galvanized- and Black-Steel Pipe Nipples: ASTM A733, made of ASTM A53/A53M, standardweight, seamless steel pipe with threaded ends.
D. Galvanized- and Uncoated-Steel Couplings: ASTM A865/A865M, threaded. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Wet-Pipe Sprinkler Systems Renovation & Expansion Final Design 211313 - 5
100% Design Submittal
E. Galvanized and Uncoated, Gray-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.4, Class 125, standard pattern.
F. Malleable- or Ductile-Iron Unions: UL 860.
G. Cast-Iron Flanges: ASME 16.1, Class 125.
H. Steel Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.5, Class 150.
1. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: ASME B16.21, nonmetallic and asbestos free or EPDM rubber gasket.
a. Class 125 and Class 250, Cast-Iron, Flat-Face Flanges: Full-face gaskets. b. Class 150 and Class 300, Ductile-Iron or -Steel, Raised-Face Flanges: Ring-type gaskets.
2. Metal, Pipe-Flange Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel unless otherwise indicated.
I. Steel Welding Fittings: ASTM A234/A234M and ASME B16.9.
1. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12M/D10.12 for welding materials appropriate for wall thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded.
J. Grooved-Joint, Steel-Pipe Appurtenances:
1. Pressure Rating: 175-psig minimum.
2. Galvanized or Painted Grooved-End Fittings for Steel Piping: ASTM A47/A47M, malleable-iron casting or ASTM A536, ductile-iron casting, with dimensions matching steel pipe.
3. Grooved-End-Pipe Couplings for Steel Piping: AWWA C606 and UL 213 rigid pattern, unless otherwise indicated, for steel-pipe dimensions. Include ferrous housing sections, EPDM-rubber gasket, and bolts and nuts.
2.3 SPECIALTY VALVES
A. Listed in UL's "Fire Protection Equipment Directory" or FM Global's "Approval Guide." B. Pressure Rating:
1. Standard-Pressure Piping Specialty Valves: 175-psig minimum.
C. Body Material: Cast or ductile iron.
D. Size: Same as connected piping.
E. End Connections: Flanged or grooved.
2.4 SPRINKLER PIPING SPECIALTIES
A. Branch Outlet Fittings:
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Wet-Pipe Sprinkler Systems Renovation & Expansion Final Design 211313 - 6
100% Design Submittal
1. Standard: UL 213.
2. Pressure Rating: 175-psig minimum.
3. Body Material: Ductile-iron housing with EPDM seals and bolts and nuts.
4. Type: Mechanical-tee and -cross fittings.
5. Configurations: Snap-on and strapless, ductile-iron housing with branch outlets.
6. Size: Of dimension to fit onto sprinkler main and with outlet connections as required to match connected branch piping.
7. Branch Outlets: Grooved, plain-end pipe, or threaded.
B. Branch Line Testers:
1. Standard: UL 199.
2. Pressure Rating: 175 psig.
3. Body Material: Brass.
4. Size: Same as connected piping.
5. Inlet: Threaded.
6. Drain Outlet: Threaded and capped.
7. Branch Outlet: Threaded, for sprinkler.
C. Adjustable Drop Nipples:
1. Standard: UL 1474.
2. Pressure Rating: 250-psig minimum.
3. Body Material: Steel pipe with EPDM-rubber O-ring seals.
4. Size: Same as connected piping.
5. Length: Adjustable.
6. Inlet and Outlet: Threaded.
D. Flexible Sprinkler Hose Fittings:
1. Standard: UL 2443.
2. Type: Flexible hose for connection to sprinkler, and with bracket for connection to ceiling grid.
3. Pressure Rating: 175-psig minimum.
4. Size: Same as connected piping, for sprinkler.
2.5 SPRINKLERS
A. Listed in UL's "Fire Protection Equipment Directory" or FM Global's "Approval Guide." B. Pressure Rating for Automatic Sprinklers: 175-psig minimum.
C. Automatic Sprinklers with Heat-Responsive Element:
1. Nonresidential Applications: UL 199.
2. Characteristics: Nominal 1/2-inch orifice with Discharge Coefficient K of 5.6, and for "Ordinary" temperature classification rating unless otherwise indicated or required by application.
D. Sprinkler Finishes: Chrome plated.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Wet-Pipe Sprinkler Systems Renovation & Expansion Final Design 211313 - 7
100% Design Submittal
E. Special Coatings: Wax, PTFE, or corrosion-resistant factory coating.
F. Sprinkler Escutcheons: Materials, types, and finishes for the following sprinkler mounting applications. Escutcheons for concealed, flush, and recessed-type sprinklers are specified with sprinklers.
1. Ceiling Mounting: Chrome-plated steel, one piece, flat Chrome-plated steel, two piece, with 1-inch vertical adjustment Plastic, chrome-plated or white finish, one piece, flat.
2. Sidewall Mounting: Chrome-plated steel or Plastic, white finish, one piece, flat.
G. Sprinkler Guards:
1. Standard: UL 199.
2. Type: Wire cage with fastening device for attaching to sprinkler.
H. Valve Supervisory Switches:
1. Standard: UL 346.
2. Type: Electrically supervised.
3. Components: Single-pole, double-throw switch with normally closed contacts.
4. Design: Signals that controlled valve is in other than fully open position.
5. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
2.6 PRESSURE GAGES
A. Standard: UL 393.
B. Dial Size: 3-1/2- to 4-1/2-inch diameter.
C. Pressure Gage Range: 0 to 300 psig.
D. Label: Include "WATER" label on dial face.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 WATER-SUPPLY CONNECTIONS
A. Connect sprinkler piping to building's interior water-distribution piping. Comply with requirements for interior piping in Section 221116 "Domestic Water Piping." B. Replace the existing backflow and install a new device per local code requirements and as indicated on the supplied plans (Watts 774DCDA) together with tamper switches, and other required accessories in water-distribution piping.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Wet-Pipe Sprinkler Systems Renovation & Expansion Final Design 211313 - 8
100% Design Submittal
3.2 PIPING INSTALLATION
A. Locations and Arrangements: Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping. Install piping as indicated on approved working plans.
1. Deviations from approved working plans for piping require written approval from authorities having jurisdiction. File written approval with Engineer before deviating from approved working plans.
2. Coordinate layout and installation of sprinklers with other construction that penetrates ceilings, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, and partition assemblies.
B. Piping Standard: Comply with NFPA 13 requirements for installation of sprinkler piping.
C. Install seismic restraints on piping. Comply with NFPA 13 requirements for seismic-restraint device materials and installation.
D. Use listed fittings to make changes in direction, branch takeoffs from mains, and reductions in pipe sizes.
E. Install unions adjacent to each valve in pipes NPS 2 and smaller.
F. Install flanges, flange adapters, or couplings for grooved-end piping on valves, apparatus, and equipment having NPS 2-1/2 and larger end connections.
G. Install sprinkler piping with drains for complete system drainage.
H. Install (or replace the existing) automatic (ball drip) drain valve at each check valve for firedepartment connection, to drain piping between fire-department connection and check valve.
Install drain piping to and spill over floor drain or to outside building.
I. Install hangers and supports for sprinkler system piping according to NFPA 13. Comply with requirements for hanger materials in NFPA 13. Provide seismic bracing, clearance, restraints, and control system per NFPA 13 and local and state requirements.
J. Fill sprinkler system piping with water.
K. Install sleeves for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements for sleeves specified in Section 210517 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Fire-Suppression Piping." L. Install sleeve seals for piping penetrations of concrete walls and slabs. Comply with requirements for sleeve seals specified in Section 210517 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for FireSuppression Piping." M. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements for escutcheons specified in Section 210518 "Escutcheons for Fire-Suppression Piping."
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Wet-Pipe Sprinkler Systems Renovation & Expansion Final Design 211313 - 9
100% Design Submittal
3.3 JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A. Install couplings, flanges, flanged fittings, unions, nipples, and transition and special fittings that have finish and pressure ratings same as or higher than system's pressure rating for aboveground applications unless otherwise indicated.
B. Install unions adjacent to each valve in pipes NPS 2 and smaller.
C. Install flanges, flange adapters, or couplings for grooved-end piping on valves, apparatus, and equipment having NPS 2-1/2 and larger end connections.
D. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.
E. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipes, tubes, and fittings before assembly.
F. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material in size, type, and thickness suitable for water service. Join flanges with gasket and bolts according to ASME B31.9.
G. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:
1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads.
2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or damaged.
H. Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12M/D10.12, using qualified processes and welding operators according to "Quality Assurance" Article.
1. Shop weld pipe joints where welded piping is indicated. Do not use welded joints for galvanized-steel pipe.
I. Steel-Piping, Roll-Grooved Joints: Roll rounded-edge groove in end of pipe according to AWWA C606. Assemble coupling with housing, gasket, lubricant, and bolts. Join steel pipe and grooved-end fittings according to AWWA C606 for steel-pipe grooved joints.
J. Dissimilar-Material Piping Joints: Make joints using adapters compatible with materials of both piping systems.
3.4 INSTALLATION OF COVER SYSTEM FOR SPRINKLER PIPING
A. Install cover system, brackets, and cover components for sprinkler piping according to manufacturer's "Installation Manual" and NFPA 13 for supports.
3.5 VALVE AND SPECIALTIES INSTALLATION
A. Install listed fire-protection valves, trim and drain valves, specialty valves and trim, controls, and specialties according to NFPA 13 and authorities having jurisdiction. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Wet-Pipe Sprinkler Systems Renovation & Expansion Final Design 211313 - 10
100% Design Submittal
B. Install listed fire-protection shutoff valves supervised open, located to control sources of water supply except from fire-department connections. Install permanent identification signs indicating portion of system controlled by each valve.
C. Install check valve in each water-supply connection. Install backflow preventers instead of check valves in potable-water-supply sources.
3.6 SPRINKLER INSTALLATION
A. Install sprinklers in suspended ceilings in center of narrow dimension of acoustical ceiling panels.
B. Install sprinklers into flexible, sprinkler hose fittings, and install hose into bracket on ceiling grid.
3.7 IDENTIFICATION
A. Install labeling and pipe markers on equipment and piping according to requirements in NFPA 13.
B. Identify system components, wiring, cabling, and terminals. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."
3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform the following tests and inspections:
1. Leak Test: After installation, charge systems and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist.
2. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.
3. Flush, test, and inspect sprinkler systems according to NFPA 13, "Systems Acceptance" Chapter.
4. Energize circuits to electrical equipment and devices.
5. Coordinate with fire-alarm tests. Operate as required.
6. Verify that equipment hose threads are same as local fire department equipment.
B. Sprinkler piping system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.
C. Prepare test and inspection reports.
3.9 CLEANING
A. Clean dirt and debris from sprinklers.
B. Only sprinklers with their original factory finish are acceptable. Remove and replace any sprinklers that are painted or have any other finish than their original factory finish. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Wet-Pipe Sprinkler Systems Renovation & Expansion Final Design 211313 - 11
100% Design Submittal
3.10 DEMONSTRATION
A. Train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain specialty valves.
3.11 PIPING SCHEDULE
A. Sprinkler specialty fittings may be used, downstream of control valves, instead of specified fittings.
B. Standard-pressure, wet-pipe sprinkler system, NPS 2 and smaller, are one of the following:
1. Standard-weight, black-steel pipe with threaded ends; uncoated, gray-iron threaded fittings; and threaded joints.
2. Standard-weight, galvanized-steel pipe with threaded ends; galvanized, gray-iron threaded fittings; and threaded joints.
3. Standard-weight, black-steel pipe with roll-grooved ends; uncoated, grooved-end fittings for steel piping; grooved-end-pipe couplings for steel piping; and grooved joints.
4. Standard-weight or Schedule 30, black-steel pipe with plain ends; steel welding fittings; and welded joints.
C. Standard-pressure, wet-pipe sprinkler system, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 6, are one of the following:
1. Standard-weight or Schedule 30, black-steel pipe with threaded ends; uncoated, gray-iron threaded fittings; and threaded joints.
2. Standard-weight or Schedule 30, galvanized-steel pipe with threaded ends; galvanized, gray-iron threaded fittings; and threaded joints.
3. Standard-weight or Schedule 30, black-steel pipe with cut- or roll-grooved ends; uncoated, grooved-end fittings for steel piping; grooved-end-pipe couplings for steel piping; and grooved joints.
4. Standard-weight or Schedule 30, galvanized-steel pipe with cut-grooved ends; galvanized, grooved-end fittings for steel piping; grooved-end-pipe couplings for steel piping; and grooved joints.
5. Standard-weight or Schedule 30, black-steel pipe with plain ends; steel welding fittings; and welded joints.
6. Thin wall Schedule 10 black-steel pipe with roll-grooved ends; uncoated, grooved-end fittings for steel piping; grooved-end-pipe couplings for steel piping; and grooved joints.
7. Thin wall Schedule 10 black-steel pipe with plain ends; welding fittings; and welded joints.
3.12 SPRINKLER SCHEDULE
A. Use sprinkler types in subparagraphs below for the following applications:
1. Rooms without Ceilings: Upright sprinklers.
2. Rooms with Suspended Ceilings: Pendent, recessed, flush, and concealed sprinklers as indicated.
3. Wall Mounting: Sidewall sprinklers.
4. Spaces Subject to Freezing: Upright, pendent, dry sprinklers; and sidewall, dry sprinklers as indicated.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Wet-Pipe Sprinkler Systems Renovation & Expansion Final Design 211313 - 12
100% Design Submittal
5. Special Applications: Extended-coverage, and quick-response sprinklers where indicated Attic sprinklers Combustible concealed space sprinklers.
B. Provide sprinkler types in subparagraphs below with finishes indicated.
1. Concealed Sprinklers: Rough brass, with factory-painted white cover plate.
2. Flush Sprinklers: Bright chrome, with painted white or consistent with ceiling color escutcheon.
3. Recessed Sprinklers: Bright chrome, with bright chrome escutcheon.
4. Upright Pendent and Sidewall Sprinklers: Chrome plated in finished spaces exposed to view; rough bronze in unfinished spaces not exposed to view; wax coated where exposed to acids, chemicals, or other corrosive fumes.
END OF SECTION 211313
Division 22
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Plumbing Piping Renovation & Expansion Final Design 220517 - 1
100% Design Submittal
SECTION 220517 - SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR PLUMBING PIPING PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Sleeves.
2. Stack-sleeve fittings.
3. Sleeve-seal systems.
4. Grout.
5. Silicone sealants.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SLEEVES
A. Cast-Iron Pipe Sleeves: Cast or fabricated of cast or ductile iron and equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe, with plain ends and integral waterstop collar.
B. Steel Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, anticorrosion coated galvanized, with plain ends and integral welded waterstop collar.
C. Galvanized-Steel Sheet Sleeves: 0.0239-inch minimum thickness; round tube closed with welded longitudinal joint.
2.2 STACK-SLEEVE FITTINGS
A. Description: Manufactured, galvanized cast-iron sleeve with integral clamping flange for use in waterproof floors and roofs. Include clamping ring, bolts, and nuts for membrane flashing.
1. Underdeck Clamp: Clamping ring with setscrews.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Plumbing Piping Renovation & Expansion Final Design 220517 - 2
100% Design Submittal
2.3 SLEEVE-SEAL SYSTEMS
A. Description:
1. Modular sealing-element unit, designed for field assembly, for filling annular space between piping and sleeve.
2. Designed to form a hydrostatic seal of 20 psig minimum.
3. Sealing Elements: EPDM-rubber interlocking links shaped to fit surface of pipe. Include type and number required for pipe material and size of pipe.
4. Pressure Plates: Stainless steel.
5. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Stainless steel, Type 316 of length required to secure pressure plates to sealing elements.
2.4 GROUT
A. Description: Nonshrink, for interior and exterior sealing openings in non-fire-rated walls or floors.
B. Standard: ASTM C 1107/C 1107M, Grade B, post-hardening and volume-adjusting, dry, hydraulic-cement grout.
C. Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength.
D. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.
2.5 SILICONE SEALANTS
A. Silicone, S, NS, 25, NT: Single-component, nonsag, plus 25 percent and minus 25 percent movement capability, nontraffic-use, neutral-curing silicone joint sealant, ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT.
B. Silicone, S, P, 25, T, NT: Single-component, pourable, plus 25 percent and minus 25 percent movement capability, traffic- and nontraffic-use, neutral-curing silicone joint sealant; ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade P, Class 25, Uses T and NT. Grade P Pourable (self-leveling) formulation is for opening in floors and other horizontal surfaces that are not fire rated.
C. Silicone Foam: Multicomponent, silicone-based liquid elastomers that, when mixed, expand and cure in place to produce a flexible, nonshrinking foam.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 SLEEVE INSTALLATION
A. Install sleeves for piping passing through penetrations in floors, partitions, roofs, and walls.
B. For sleeves that will have sleeve-seal system installed, select sleeves of size large enough to provide 1-inch annular clear space between piping and concrete slabs and walls. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Plumbing Piping Renovation & Expansion Final Design 220517 - 3
100% Design Submittal
1. Sleeves are not required for core-drilled holes.
C. Install sleeves in concrete floors, concrete roof slabs, and concrete walls as new slabs and walls are constructed.
1. Permanent sleeves are not required for holes in slabs formed by molded-PE or -PP sleeves.
2. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces. a. Exception: Extend sleeves installed in floors of mechanical equipment areas or other wet areas 2 inches above finished floor level.
3. Using grout or silicone sealant, seal the space outside of sleeves in slabs and walls without sleeve-seal system.
D. Install sleeves for pipes passing through interior partitions.
1. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces.
2. Install sleeves that are large enough to provide 1/4-inch annular clear space between sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation.
3. Seal annular space between sleeve and piping or piping insulation; use joint sealants appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint.
E. Fire-Resistance-Rated Penetrations, Horizontal Assembly Penetrations, and Smoke Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire or smoke rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with fire- and smoke-stop materials. Comply with requirements for firestopping and fill materials specified in Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping."
3.2 STACK-SLEEVE-FITTING INSTALLATION
A. Install stack-sleeve fittings in new slabs as slabs are constructed.
1. Install fittings that are large enough to provide 1/4-inch annular clear space between sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation.
2. Secure flashing between clamping flanges for pipes penetrating floors with membrane waterproofing. Comply with requirements for flashing specified in Section 076200 "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim."
3. Install section of cast-iron soil pipe to extend sleeve to 2 inches above finished floor level.
4. Extend cast-iron sleeve fittings below floor slab as required to secure clamping ring if ring is specified.
5. Use silicone sealant to seal the space around outside of stack-sleeve fittings.
B. Fire-Resistance-Rated Penetrations, Horizontal Assembly Penetrations, and Smoke Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire or smoke rating of floors at pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with fire- and smoke-stop materials. Comply with requirements for firestopping specified in Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping." ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Plumbing Piping Renovation & Expansion Final Design 220517 - 4
100% Design Submittal
3.3 SLEEVE-SEAL-SYSTEM INSTALLATION
A. Install sleeve-seal systems in sleeves in exterior concrete walls and slabs-on-grade at service piping entries into building.
B. Select type, size, and number of sealing elements required for piping material and size and for sleeve ID or hole size. Position piping in center of sleeve. Center piping in penetration, assemble sleeve-seal system components, and install in annular space between piping and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make a watertight seal.
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform the following tests and inspections:
1. Leak Test: After allowing for a full cure, test sleeves and sleeve seals for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist.
B. Sleeves and sleeve seals will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.
C. Prepare test and inspection reports.
3.5 SLEEVE AND SLEEVE-SEAL SCHEDULE
A. Use sleeves and sleeve seals for the following piping-penetration applications:
1. Exterior Concrete Walls above Grade:
a. Piping Smaller Than NPS 6: Steel pipe sleeves.
b. Piping NPS 6 and Larger: Steel pipe sleeves.
2. Exterior Concrete Walls below Grade:
a. Piping Smaller Than NPS 6: Cast-iron pipe sleeves with sleeve-seal system. 1) Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between piping and sleeve for installing sleeve-seal system.
b. Piping NPS 6 and Larger: Cast-iron pipe sleeves with sleeve-seal system. 1) Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between piping and sleeve for installing sleeve-seal system.
3. Concrete Slabs-on-Grade:
a. Piping Smaller Than NPS 6: Cast-iron pipe sleeves with sleeve-seal system. 1) Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between piping and sleeve for installing sleeve-seal system.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Plumbing Piping Renovation & Expansion Final Design 220517 - 5
100% Design Submittal
b. Piping NPS 6 and Larger: Cast-iron pipe sleeves with sleeve-seal system. 1) Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between piping and sleeve for installing sleeve-seal system.
4. Interior Partitions:
a. Piping Smaller Than NPS 6: Steel pipe sleeves.
b. Piping NPS 6 and Larger: Galvanized-steel sheet sleeves.
END OF SECTION 220517
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Plumbing Piping Renovation & Expansion Final Design 220517 - 6
100% Design Submittal
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Escutcheons for Plumbing Piping Renovation & Expansion Final Design 220518 - 1
100% Design Submittal
SECTION 220518 - ESCUTCHEONS FOR PLUMBING PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Escutcheons.
2. Floor plates.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Existing Piping to Remain: Existing piping that is not to be removed and that is not otherwise indicated to be removed and salvaged, or removed and reinstalled.
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following or equal:
1. BrassCraft Manufacturing Co.; a Masco company.
2. Jones Stephens Corp.
3. Keeney Manufacturing Company (The).
2.2 ESCUTCHEONS
A. One-Piece, Stainless Steel Type: With polished stainless steel finish.
2.3 FLOOR PLATES
A. Split Floor Plates: Cast brass with concealed hinge. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Escutcheons for Plumbing Piping Renovation & Expansion Final Design 220518 - 2
100% Design Submittal
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and finished floors.
B. Install floor plates for piping penetrations of equipment-room floors.
C. Install floor plates with ID to closely fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of piping and with OD that completely covers opening.
1. New Piping and Relocated Existing Piping: One-piece, floor plate.
2. Existing Piping: Split floor plate.
3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Using new materials, replace broken and damaged escutcheons and floor plates.
END OF SECTION 220518
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment Renovation & Expansion Final Design 220529 - 1
100% Design Submittal
SECTION 220529 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Metal pipe hangers and supports.
2. Trapeze pipe hangers.
3. Metal framing systems.
4. Thermal hanger-shield inserts.
5. Fastener systems.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
B. Shop Drawings: Signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer. Show fabrication and installation details and include calculations for the following:
1. Trapeze pipe hangers.
2. Metal framing systems.
C. Delegated-Design Submittal: For trapeze hangers indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.
1. Detail fabrication and assembly of trapeze hangers.
2. Include design calculations for designing trapeze hangers.
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Welding certificates.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Structural-Steel Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment Renovation & Expansion Final Design 220529 - 2
100% Design Submittal
B. Pipe Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and operators according to 2015 ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section IX.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements," to design trapeze pipe hangers and equipment supports.
B. Structural Performance: Ensure hangers and supports for plumbing piping and equipment withstands the effects of gravity loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated according to ASCE/SEI 7.
1. Design supports for multiple pipes, including pipe stands, capable of supporting combined weight of supported systems, system contents, and test water.
2. Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of supported equipment and connected systems and components.
3. Design seismic-restraint hangers and supports for piping and equipment and obtain approval from authorities having jurisdiction.
2.2 METAL PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. Carbon-Steel Pipe Hangers and Supports:
1. Description: MSS SP-58, Types 1 through 58, factory-fabricated components.
2. Galvanized Metallic Coatings: Pre-galvanized, hot-dip galvanized, or electro-galvanized.
3. Nonmetallic Coatings: Plastic coated or epoxy powder coated.
4. Padded Hangers: Hanger with fiberglass or other pipe insulation pad or cushion to support bearing surface of piping.
5. Hanger Rods: Continuous-thread rod, nuts, and washer made of stainless steel.
B. Stainless Steel Pipe Hangers and Supports:
1. Description: MSS SP-58, Types 1 through 58, factory-fabricated components.
2. Padded Hangers: Hanger with fiberglass or other pipe insulation pad or cushion to support bearing surface of piping.
3. Hanger Rods: Continuous-thread rod, nuts, and washer made of stainless steel.
2.3 TRAPEZE PIPE HANGERS
A. Description: MSS SP-58, Type 59, shop- or field-fabricated pipe-support assembly, made from structural-carbon-steel shapes, with MSS SP-58 carbon-steel hanger rods, nuts, saddles, and Ubolts. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment Renovation & Expansion Final Design 220529 - 3
100% Design Submittal
2.4 METAL FRAMING SYSTEMS
A. MFMA Manufacturer Metal Framing Systems:
1. Description: Shop- or field-fabricated pipe-support assembly, made of steel channels, accessories, fittings, and other components for supporting multiple parallel pipes.
2. Standard: Comply with MFMA-4, factory-fabricated components for field assembly.
3. Channels: Continuous slotted stainless steel, Type 304 channel with inturned lips.
4. Channel Width: Selected for applicable load criteria.
5. Channel Nuts: Formed or stamped nuts or other devices designed to fit into channel slot and, when tightened, prevent slipping along channel.
6. Hanger Rods: Continuous-thread rod, nuts, and washer made of stainless steel.
B. Non-MFMA Manufacturer Metal Framing Systems:
1. Description: Shop- or field-fabricated pipe-support assembly, made of steel channels, accessories, fittings, and other components for supporting multiple parallel pipes.
2. Standard: Comply with MFMA-4, factory-fabricated components for field assembly.
3. Channels: Continuous slotted stainless steel channel with inturned lips.
4. Channel Width: Select for applicable load criteria.
5. Channel Nuts: Formed or stamped nuts or other devices designed to fit into channel slot and, when tightened, prevent slipping along channel.
6. Hanger Rods: Continuous-thread rod, nuts, and washer made of stainless steel.
2.5 THERMAL HANGER-SHIELD INSERTS
A. Insulation-Insert Material for Cold Piping: ASTM C552, Type II cellular glass with 100-psig minimum compressive strength and vapor barrier.
B. Insulation-Insert Material for Hot Piping: Water-repellent-treated, ASTM C533, Type I calcium silicate with 100-psig minimum compressive strength.
C. For Trapeze or Clamped Systems: Verify insert and shield cover entire circumference of pipe.
D. For Clevis or Band Hangers: Verify insert and shield cover lower 180 degrees of pipe.
E. Insert Length: Extend 2 inches beyond sheet metal shield for piping operating below ambient air temperature.
2.6 FASTENER SYSTEMS
A. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Threaded-steel stud, for use in hardened portland cement concrete, with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.
B. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type anchors, for use in hardened portland cement concrete, with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.
1. Indoor Applications: stainless steel.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment Renovation & Expansion Final Design 220529 - 4
100% Design Submittal
2. Outdoor Applications: Stainless steel.
2.7 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS
A. Description: Welded, shop- or field-fabricated equipment support made from structural-carbonsteel shapes.
2.8 MATERIALS
A. Aluminum: ASTM B221.
B. Carbon Steel: ASTM A1011/A1011M.
C. Structural Steel: ASTM A36/A36M carbon-steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized.
D. Stainless Steel: ASTM A240/A240M.
E. Grout: ASTM C1107/C1107M, factory-mixed and -packaged, dry, hydraulic-cement, nonshrink and nonmetallic grout; suitable for interior and exterior applications.
1. Properties: Nonstaining, noncorrosive, and nongaseous.
2. Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 APPLICATION
A. Comply with requirements in Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping" for firestopping materials and installation, for penetrations through fire-rated walls, ceilings, and assemblies.
B. Strength of Support Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of components, so strength will be adequate to carry present and future static loads within specified loading limits.
Minimum static design load used for strength determination is the weight of supported components plus 200 lb.
3.2 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION
A. Metal Pipe-Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-58. Install hangers, supports, clamps, and attachments as required to properly support piping from building structure.
B. Metal Trapeze Pipe-Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-58. Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of horizontal piping, and support together on field-fabricated trapeze pipe hangers.
1. Pipes of Various Sizes: Support together and space trapezes for smallest pipe size, or install intermediate supports for smaller-diameter pipes as specified for individual pipe hangers.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment Renovation & Expansion Final Design 220529 - 5
100% Design Submittal
2. Field fabricate from ASTM A36/A36M carbon-steel shapes selected for loads being supported. Weld steel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M.
C. Metal Framing System Installation: Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of piping, and support together on field-assembled metal framing systems.
D. Thermal Hanger-Shield Installation: Install in pipe hanger or shield for insulated piping.
E. Fastener System Installation:
1. Install powder-actuated fasteners for use in lightweight concrete or concrete slabs less than 4 inches thick in concrete, after concrete is placed and completely cured. Use operators that are licensed by powder-actuated tool manufacturer. Install fasteners according to powder-actuated tool manufacturer's operating manual.
2. Install mechanical-expansion anchors in concrete, after concrete is placed and completely cured. Install fasteners according to manufacturer's written instructions.
F. Install hangers and supports complete with necessary attachments, inserts, bolts, rods, nuts, washers, and other accessories.
G. Equipment Support Installation: Fabricate from welded-structural-steel shapes.
H. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled thermal and seismic movement of piping systems, to permit freedom of movement between pipe anchors, and to facilitate action of expansion joints, expansion loops, expansion bends, and similar units.
I. Install lateral bracing with pipe hangers and supports to prevent swaying.
J. Install building attachments within concrete slabs or attach to structural steel. Install additional attachments at concentrated loads, including valves, flanges, and strainers, NPS 2-1/2 and larger and at changes in direction of piping. Install concrete inserts before concrete is placed; fasten inserts to forms and install reinforcing bars through openings at top of inserts.
K. Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports, so that piping live and dead loads and stresses from movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment.
L. Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes and to not exceed maximum pipe deflections allowed by ASME B31.9 for building services piping.
M. Insulated Piping:
1. Attach clamps and spacers to piping.
a. Piping Operating Above Ambient Air Temperature: Clamp may project through insulation.
b. Piping Operating Below Ambient Air Temperature: Use thermal hanger-shield insert with clamp sized to match OD of insert.
c. Do not exceed pipe stress limits allowed by ASME B31.9 for building services piping.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment Renovation & Expansion Final Design 220529 - 6
100% Design Submittal
2. Install MSS SP-58, Type 39 protection saddles if insulation without vapor barrier is indicated. Fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation. a. Option: Thermal hanger-shield inserts may be used. Include steel weightdistribution plate for pipe NPS 4 and larger if pipe is installed on rollers.
3. Install MSS SP-58, Type 40 protective shields on cold piping with vapor barrier. Shields span an arc of 180 degrees.
a. Option: Thermal hanger-shield inserts may be used. Include steel weightdistribution plate for pipe NPS 4 and larger if pipe is installed on rollers.
4. Shield Dimensions for Pipe: Not less than the following:
a. NPS 1/4 to NPS 3-1/2: 12 inches long and 0.048 inch thick. b. NPS 4: 12 inches long and 0.06 inch thick.
c. NPS 5 and NPS 6: 18 inches long and 0.06 inch thick. d. NPS 8 to NPS 14: 24 inches long and 0.075 inch thick. e. NPS 16 to NPS 24: 24 inches long and 0.105 inch thick.
5. Pipes NPS 8 and Larger: Include wood or reinforced calcium-silicate-insulation inserts of length at least as long as protective shield.
6. Thermal Hanger Shields: Install with insulation of same thickness as piping insulation.
3.3 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS
A. Fabricate structural-steel stands to suspend equipment from structure overhead or to support equipment above floor.
B. Grouting: Place grout under supports for equipment and make bearing surface smooth.
C. Provide lateral bracing, to prevent swaying, for equipment supports.
3.4 METAL FABRICATIONS
A. Cut, drill, and fit miscellaneous metal fabrications for trapeze pipe hangers and equipment supports.
B. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. Field weld connections that cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations.
C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M procedures for shielded, metal arc welding; appearance and quality of welds; and methods used in correcting welding work; and with the following:
1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals.
2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
3. Remove welding flux immediately.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment Renovation & Expansion Final Design 220529 - 7
100% Design Submittal
4. Finish welds at exposed connections, so no roughness shows after finishing and so contours of welded surfaces match adjacent contours.
3.5 ADJUSTING
A. Hanger Adjustments: Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments and to achieve indicated slope of pipe.
B. Trim excess length of continuous-thread hanger and support rods to 1-1/2 inches.
3.6 PAINTING
A. Touchup: Clean field welds and abraded, shop-painted areas. Paint exposed areas immediately after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as those used for shop painting. Comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces.
1. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils.
3.7 HANGER AND SUPPORT SCHEDULE
A. Specific hanger and support requirements are in Sections specifying piping systems and equipment.
B. Comply with MSS SP-58 for pipe-hanger selections and applications that are not specified in piping system Sections.
C. Use hangers and supports with galvanized metallic coatings for piping and equipment that will not have field-applied finishes.
D. Use nonmetallic coatings on attachments for electrolytic protection where attachments are in direct contact with copper tubing.
E. Use stainless steel pipe hangers and stainless steel attachments for hostile environment applications.
F. Use padded hangers for piping that is subject to scratching.
G. Use thermal hanger-shield inserts for insulated piping and tubing.
H. Horizontal-Piping Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:
1. Adjustable, Steel Clevis Hangers (MSS Type 1): For suspension of noninsulated or insulated, stationary pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 30.
2. Yoke-Type Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 2): For suspension of up to 1050 deg F pipes NPS 4 to NPS 24, requiring up to 4 inches of insulation.
3. Carbon- or Alloy-Steel, Double-Bolt Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 3): For suspension of pipes NPS 3/4 to NPS 36, requiring clamp flexibility and up to 4 inches of insulation. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment Renovation & Expansion Final Design 220529 - 8
100% Design Submittal
4. Steel Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 4): For suspension of cold and hot pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 24 if little or no insulation is required.
5. Pipe Hangers (MSS Type 5): For suspension of pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 4, to allow offcenter closure for hanger installation before pipe erection.
6. Adjustable, Swivel Split- or Solid-Ring Hangers (MSS Type 6): For suspension of noninsulated, stationary pipes NPS 3/4 to NPS 8.
7. Adjustable, Steel Band Hangers (MSS Type 7): For suspension of noninsulated, stationary pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 8.
8. Adjustable Band Hangers (MSS Type 9): For suspension of noninsulated, stationary pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 8.
9. Adjustable, Swivel-Ring Band Hangers (MSS Type 10): For suspension of noninsulated, stationary pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 8.
10. Split Pipe Ring with or without Turnbuckle Hangers (MSS Type 11): For suspension of noninsulated, stationary pipes NPS 3/8 to NPS 8.
11. Extension Hinged or Two-Bolt Split Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 12): For suspension of noninsulated, stationary pipes NPS 3/8 to NPS 3.
12. U-Bolts (MSS Type 24): For support of heavy pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 30.
13. Clips (MSS Type 26): For support of insulated pipes not subject to expansion or contraction.
14. Pipe Saddle Supports (MSS Type 36): For support of pipes NPS 4 to NPS 36, with steelpipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange or carbon-steel plate.
15. Pipe Stanchion Saddles (MSS Type 37): For support of pipes NPS 4 to NPS 36, with steel-pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange or carbon-steel plate, and with U-bolt to retain pipe.
16. Adjustable Pipe Saddle Supports (MSS Type 38): For stanchion-type support for pipes NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 36 if vertical adjustment is required, with steel-pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange.
17. Single-Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 41): For suspension of pipes NPS 1 to NPS 30, from two rods if longitudinal movement caused by expansion and contraction occurs.
18. Adjustable Roller Hangers (MSS Type 43): For suspension of pipes NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 24, from single rod if horizontal movement caused by expansion and contraction occurs.
19. Complete Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 44): For support of pipes NPS 2 to NPS 42 if longitudinal movement caused by expansion and contraction occurs but vertical adjustment is unnecessary.
20. Pipe Roll and Plate Units (MSS Type 45): For support of pipes NPS 2 to NPS 24 if small horizontal movement caused by expansion and contraction occurs and vertical adjustment is unnecessary.
21. Adjustable Pipe Roll and Base Units (MSS Type 46): For support of pipes NPS 2 to NPS 30 if vertical and lateral adjustment during installation, in addition to expansion and contraction, is required.
I. Vertical-Piping Clamps: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:
1. Extension Pipe or Riser Clamps (MSS Type 8): For support of pipe risers NPS 3/4 to NPS 24.
2. Carbon- or Alloy-Steel Riser Clamps (MSS Type 42): For support of pipe risers NPS 3/4 to NPS 24 if longer ends are required for riser clamps. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment Renovation & Expansion Final Design 220529 - 9
100% Design Submittal
J. Hanger-Rod Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:
1. Steel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 13): For adjustment of up to 6 inches for heavy loads.
2. Steel Clevises (MSS Type 14): For 120 to 450 deg F piping installations.
3. Swivel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 15): For use with MSS Type 11 split pipe rings.
4. Malleable-Iron Sockets (MSS Type 16): For attaching hanger rods to various types of building attachments.
5. Steel Weldless Eye Nuts (MSS Type 17): For 120 to 450 deg F piping installations.
K. Building Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:
1. Steel or Malleable-Concrete Inserts (MSS Type 18): For upper attachment to suspend pipe hangers from concrete ceiling.
2. Top-Beam C-Clamps (MSS Type 19): For use under roof installations with bar-joist construction, to attach to top flange of structural shape.
3. Side-Beam or Channel Clamps (MSS Type 20): For attaching to bottom flange of beams, channels, or angles.
4. Center-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 21): For attaching to center of bottom flange of beams.
5. Welded Beam Attachments (MSS Type 22): For attaching to bottom of beams if loads are considerable and rod sizes are large.
6. C-Clamps (MSS Type 23): For structural shapes.
7. Top-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 25): For top of beams if hanger rod is required tangent to flange edge.
8. Side-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 27): For bottom of steel I-beams.
9. Steel-Beam Clamps with Eye Nuts (MSS Type 28): For attaching to bottom of steel Ibeams for heavy loads.
10. Linked-Steel Clamps with Eye Nuts (MSS Type 29): For attaching to bottom of steel Ibeams for heavy loads, with link extensions.
11. Malleable-Beam Clamps with Extension Pieces (MSS Type 30): For attaching to structural steel.
12. Welded-Steel Brackets: For support of pipes from below or for suspending from above by using clip and rod. Use one of the following for indicated loads:
a. Light (MSS Type 31): 750 lb.
b. Medium (MSS Type 32): 1500 lb.
c. Heavy (MSS Type 33): 3000 lb.
13. Side-Beam Brackets (MSS Type 34): For sides of steel or wooden beams.
14. Plate Lugs (MSS Type 57): For attaching to steel beams if flexibility at beam is required.
15. Horizontal Travelers (MSS Type 58): For supporting piping systems subject to linear horizontal movement where headroom is limited.
L. Saddles and Shields: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:
1. Steel-Pipe-Covering Protection Saddles (MSS Type 39): To fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation.
2. Protection Shields (MSS Type 40): Of length recommended in writing by manufacturer to prevent crushing insulation.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment Renovation & Expansion Final Design 220529 - 10
100% Design Submittal
3. Thermal Hanger-Shield Inserts: For supporting insulated pipe.
M. Spring Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:
1. Restraint-Control Devices (MSS Type 47): Where indicated to control piping movement.
2. Spring Cushions (MSS Type 48): For light loads if vertical movement does not exceed 1- 1/4 inches.
3. Spring-Cushion Roll Hangers (MSS Type 49): For equipping Type 41 roll hanger with springs.
4. Spring Sway Braces (MSS Type 50): To retard sway, shock, vibration, or thermal expansion in piping systems.
5. Variable-Spring Hangers (MSS Type 51): Preset to indicated load, and limit variability factor to 25 percent to allow expansion and contraction of piping system from hanger.
6. Variable-Spring Base Supports (MSS Type 52): Preset to indicated load, and limit variability factor to 25 percent to allow expansion and contraction of piping system from base support.
7. Variable-Spring Trapeze Hangers (MSS Type 53): Preset to indicated load, and limit variability factor to 25 percent to allow expansion and contraction of piping system from trapeze support.
8. Constant Supports: For critical piping stress and if necessary to avoid transfer of stress from one support to another support, critical terminal, or connected equipment. Include auxiliary stops for erection, hydrostatic test, and load-adjustment capability. These supports include the following types:
a. Horizontal (MSS Type 54): Mounted horizontally.
b. Vertical (MSS Type 55): Mounted vertically.
c. Trapeze (MSS Type 56): Two vertical-type supports and one trapeze member.
N. Comply with MSS SP-58 for trapeze pipe-hanger selections and applications that are not specified in piping system Sections.
O. Comply with MFMA-103 for metal framing system selections and applications that are not specified in piping system Sections.
P. Use powder-actuated fasteners or mechanical-expansion anchors instead of building attachments where required in concrete construction.
Q. Use pipe-positioning systems in pipe spaces behind plumbing fixtures to support supply and waste piping for plumbing fixtures.
END OF SECTION 220529
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment Renovation & Expansion Final Design 220553 - 1
100% Design Submittal
SECTION 220553 - IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Equipment labels.
2. Warning signs and labels.
3. Pipe labels.
4. Valve tags.
5. Warning tags.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Samples: For color, letter style, and graphic representation required for each identification material and device.
C. Equipment Label Schedule: Include a listing of all equipment to be labeled with the proposed content for each label.
D. Valve numbering scheme.
E. Valve Schedules: For each piping system to include in maintenance manuals.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 EQUIPMENT LABELS
A. Metal Labels for Equipment:
1. Material and Thickness: stainless steel, 0.025-inch minimum thickness, and having predrilled or stamped holes for attachment hardware.
2. Letter Color: White.
3. Background Color: Black.
4. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than 2-1/2 by 3/4 inch.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment Renovation & Expansion Final Design 220553 - 2
100% Design Submittal
5. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24 inches, 1/2 inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-quarters the size of principal lettering.
6. Fasteners: Stainless steel rivets or self-tapping screws.
7. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate.
2.2 WARNING SIGNS AND LABELS
A. Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical engraving, 1/8 inch thick, and having predrilled holes for attachment hardware.
B. Letter Color: Black.
C. Background Color: Yellow.
D. Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures up to 160 deg F.
E. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than 2-1/2 by 3/4 inch.
F. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24 inches, 1/2 inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-quarters the size of principal lettering.
G. Fasteners: Stainless steel rivets or self-tapping screws.
H. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate.
I. Label Content: Include caution and warning information plus emergency notification instructions.
2.3 PIPE LABELS
A. General Requirements for Manufactured Pipe Labels: Preprinted, color-coded, with lettering indicating service, and showing flow direction.
B. Pretensioned Pipe Labels: Precoiled, semirigid plastic formed to cover full circumference of pipe and to attach to pipe without fasteners or adhesive.
C. Self-Adhesive Pipe Labels: Printed plastic with contact-type, permanent-adhesive backing.
D. Pipe Label Contents: Include identification of piping service using same designations or abbreviations as used on Drawings; also include pipe size and an arrow indicating flow direction.
1. Flow-Direction Arrows: Integral with piping-system service lettering to accommodate both directions or as separate unit on each pipe label to indicate flow direction. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment Renovation & Expansion Final Design 220553 - 3
100% Design Submittal
2. Lettering Size: At least 1/2 inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances.
2.4 VALVE TAGS
A. Valve Tags: Stamped or engraved with 1/4-inch letters for piping system abbreviation and 1/2- inch numbers.
1. Tag Material: stainless steel, 0.025-inch minimum thickness, and having predrilled or stamped holes for attachment hardware.
2. Fasteners: Brass wire-link chain or beaded chain or S-hook.
B. Valve Schedules: For each piping system, on 8-1/2-by-11-inch bond paper. Tabulate valve number, piping system, system abbreviation (as shown on valve tag), location of valve (room or space), normal-operating position (open, closed, or modulating), and variations for identification. Mark valves for emergency shutoff and similar special uses.
1. Valve-tag schedule included in operation and maintenance data.
2.5 WARNING TAGS
A. Description: Preprinted or partially preprinted accident-prevention tags of plasticized card stock with matte finish suitable for writing.
1. Size: Approximately 4 by 7 inches.
2. Fasteners: Reinforced grommet and wire or string.
3. Nomenclature: Large-size primary caption such as "DANGER," "CAUTION," or "DO NOT OPERATE."
4. Color: Safety yellow background with black lettering.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Clean piping and equipment surfaces of substances that could impair bond of identification devices, including dirt, oil, grease, release agents, and incompatible primers, paints, and encapsulants.
3.2 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of surfaces where devices are to be applied.
B. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with locations of access panels and doors.
C. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment Renovation & Expansion Final Design 220553 - 4
100% Design Submittal
3.3 EQUIPMENT LABEL INSTALLATION
A. Install or permanently fasten labels on each major item of mechanical equipment.
B. Locate equipment labels where accessible and visible.
3.4 PIPE LABEL INSTALLATION
A. Pipe Label Locations: Locate pipe labels where piping is exposed or above accessible ceilings in finished spaces; machine rooms; accessible maintenance spaces such as shafts, tunnels, and plenums; and exterior exposed locations as follows:
1. Near each valve and control device.
2. Near each branch connection, excluding short takeoffs for fixtures and terminal units.
Where flow pattern is not obvious, mark each pipe at branch.
3. Near penetrations through walls, floors, ceilings, and inaccessible enclosures.
4. At access doors, manholes, and similar access points that permit view of concealed piping.
5. Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination.
6. Spaced at maximum intervals of 50 feet along each run. Reduce intervals to 25 feet in areas of congested piping and equipment.
7. On piping above removable acoustical ceilings. Omit intermediately spaced labels.
B. Directional Flow Arrows: Use arrows to indicate direction of flow in pipes, including pipes where flow is allowed in both directions.
C. Pipe Label Color Schedule:
1. Domestic Water Piping:
a. Background: Blue.
b. Letter Colors: White.
2. Natural Gas Piping:
a. Background: Safety yellow.
b. Letter Colors: Black
3.5 VALVE-TAG INSTALLATION
A. Install tags on valves and control devices in piping systems, except check valves, valves within factory-fabricated equipment units, shutoff valves, faucets, convenience and lawn-watering hose connections, and similar roughing-in connections of end-use fixtures and units. List tagged valves in a valve schedule.
B. Valve-Tag Application Schedule: Tag valves according to size, shape, and color scheme and with captions similar to those indicated in the following subparagraphs:
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment Renovation & Expansion Final Design 220553 - 5
100% Design Submittal
1. Valve-Tag Size and Shape:
a. Cold Water: 2 inches, round.
b. Hot Water: 2 inches, round.
2. Valve-Tag Colors:
a. Cold Water: Blue.
b. Hot Water: Red.
3. Letter Colors:
a. Cold Water: White.
b. Hot Water: White.
3.6 WARNING-TAG INSTALLATION
A. Write required message on, and attach warning tags to, equipment and other items where required.
END OF SECTION 220553
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment Renovation & Expansion Final Design 220553 - 6
100% Design Submittal
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Plumbing Piping Insulation Renovation & Expansion Final Design 220719 - 1
100% Design Submittal
SECTION 220719 - PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes insulating the following plumbing piping services:
1. Domestic cold-water piping.
2. Domestic hot-water piping.
1.3 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate sizes and locations of supports, hangers, and insulation shields specified in Section 220529 "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment." B. Coordinate clearance requirements with piping Installer for piping insulation application.
Before preparing piping Shop Drawings, establish and maintain clearance requirements for installation of insulation and field-applied jackets and finishes and for space required for maintenance.
C. Coordinate installation and testing of heat tracing.
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include thermal conductivity, water-vapor permeance thickness, and jackets (both factory- and field-applied if any).
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Surface-Burning Characteristics: For insulation and related materials, as determined by testing identical products in accordance with ASTM E84 by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Factory label insulation and jacket materials and adhesive, mastic, tapes, and cement material containers, with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.
1. Insulation Installed Indoors: Flame-spread index of 25 or less and smoke-developed index of 50 or less.
2. Insulation Installed Outdoors: Flame-spread index of 75 or less and smoke-developed index of 150 or less.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Plumbing Piping Insulation Renovation & Expansion Final Design 220719 - 2
100% Design Submittal
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Packaging: Insulation material containers shall be marked by manufacturer with appropriate ASTM standard designation, type and grade, and maximum use temperature.
1.7 SCHEDULING
A. Schedule insulation application after pressure testing systems and, where required, after installing and testing heat tracing. Insulation application may begin on segments that have satisfactory test results.
B. Complete installation and concealment of plastic materials as rapidly as possible in each area of construction.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 INSULATION MATERIALS
A. Comply with requirements in "Piping Insulation Schedule, General," "Indoor Piping Insulation Schedule," "Outdoor, Aboveground Piping Insulation Schedule," and "Outdoor, Underground Piping Insulation Schedule" articles for where insulating materials shall be applied.
B. Products shall not contain asbestos, lead, mercury, or mercury compounds.
C. Products that come into contact with stainless steel shall have a leachable chloride content of less than 50 ppm when tested in accordance with ASTM C871.
D. Insulation materials for use on austenitic stainless steel shall be qualified as acceptable in accordance with ASTM C795.
E. Foam insulation materials shall not use CFC or HCFC blowing agents in the manufacturing process.
F. Cellular Glass: Inorganic, incombustible, foamed or cellulated glass with annealed, rigid, hermetically sealed cells. Comply with ASTM C552.
1. Preformed Pipe Insulation, Type II, Class 1: Unfaced.
2. Preformed Pipe Insulation, Type II, Class 2: With factory-applied ASJ-SSL jacket.
3. Fabricated shapes in accordance with ASTM C450, ASTM C585, and ASTM C1639.
4. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article.
G. Flexible Elastomeric: Closed-cell or expanded-rubber materials; suitable for maximum use temperature between minus 70 degrees F and 220 degrees F. Comply with ASTM C534/C534M, Type I for tubular materials.
H. Glass-Fiber, Preformed Pipe: Glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin; suitable for maximum use temperature up to 850 degrees F in accordance with ASTM C411. Comply with ASTM C547.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Plumbing Piping Insulation Renovation & Expansion Final Design 220719 - 3
100% Design Submittal
1. Preformed Pipe Insulation: Type I, Grade A with factory-applied ASJ-SSL.
2. Fabricated shapes in accordance with ASTM C450 and ASTM C585.
3. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article.
2.2 INSULATING CEMENTS
A. Mineral-Fiber Insulating Cement: Comply with ASTM C195.
B. Expanded or Exfoliated Vermiculite Insulating Cement: Comply with ASTM C196.
C. Mineral-Fiber, Hydraulic-Setting Insulating and Finishing Cement: Comply with ASTM C449.
2.3 ADHESIVES
A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates and for bonding insulation to itself and to surfaces to be insulated, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Cellular-Glass Adhesive: Two-component, thermosetting urethane adhesive containing no flammable solvents, with a service temperature range of minus 100 to plus 200 degrees F.
C. Flexible Elastomeric and Polyolefin Adhesive: Solvent-based adhesive.
1. Flame-spread index shall be 25 or less and smoke-developed index shall be 50 or less as tested in accordance with ASTM E84.
2. Wet Flash Point: Below 0 degrees F 40 to 200 degrees F. Color: Black.
D. Mineral-Fiber Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A.
E. ASJ Adhesive and FSK Jacket Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A, for bonding insulation jacket lap seams and joints.
2.4 MASTICS AND COATINGS
A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates.
B. Vapor-Barrier Mastic, Water Based: Suitable for indoor use on below-ambient services.
1. Water-Vapor Permeance: Comply with ASTM E96/E96M or ASTM F1249.
2. Service Temperature Range: [0 to plus 180 degrees F Minus 20 to plus 180 degrees F.
3. Comply with MIL-PRF-19565C, Type II, for permeance requirements.
4. Color: White.
C. Vapor-Retarder Mastic, Solvent Based, Indoor Use: Suitable for indoor use on below-ambient services.
1. Water-Vapor Permeance: Comply with ASTM E96/E96M or ASTM F1249.
2. Service Temperature Range: 0 to 180 degrees F.
3. Color: White.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Plumbing Piping Insulation Renovation & Expansion Final Design 220719 - 4
100% Design Submittal
D. Vapor-Retarder Mastic, Solvent Based, Outdoor Use: Suitable for outdoor use on belowambient services.
1. Water-Vapor Permeance: Comply with ASTM E96/E96M or ASTM F1249.
2. Service Temperature Range: Minus 50 to plus 220 degrees F.
3. Color: White.
E. Breather Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor and outdoor use on above-ambient services.
1. Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM E96/E96M, greater than 1.0 perm at manufacturer’s recommended dry film thickness.
2. Service Temperature Range: 0 to plus 180 degrees F.
3. Color: White.
2.5 LAGGING ADHESIVES
A. Adhesives shall comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class I, Grade A, and shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates.
1. Fire-resistant, water-based lagging adhesive and coating for use indoors to adhere fireresistant lagging cloths over pipe insulation.
2. Service Temperature Range: 20 to plus 180 degrees F 0 to plus 180 degrees F.
3. Color: White.
2.6 SEALANTS
A. Materials shall be as recommended by the insulation manufacturer and shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates.
B. Joint Sealants:
1. Permanently flexible, elastomeric sealant.
2. Service Temperature Range: Minus 58 to plus 176 degrees FMinus 100 to plus 300 degrees F.
3. Color: White or gray.
C. ASJ Flashing Sealants and PVC Jacket Flashing Sealants:
1. Fire- and water-resistant, flexible, elastomeric sealant.
2. Service Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 250 degrees F.
3. Color: White.
2.7 FACTORY-APPLIED JACKETS
A. Insulation system schedules indicate factory-applied jackets on various applications. When factory-applied jackets are indicated, comply with the following:
1. ASJ-SSL: ASJ with self-sealing, pressure-sensitive, acrylic-based adhesive covered by a removable protective strip; complying with ASTM C1136, Type I. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Plumbing Piping Insulation Renovation & Expansion Final Design 220719 - 5
100% Design Submittal
2.8 FIELD-APPLIED JACKETS
A. Field-applied jackets shall comply with ASTM C1136, Type I, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Metal Jacket:
1. Aluminum Jacket: Comply with ASTM B209, Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105, or 5005, Temper H-14.
a. Factory cut and rolled to size.
b. Finish and thickness are indicated in field-applied jacket schedules. c. Moisture Barrier for Indoor Applications: 3-mil- thick, heat-bonded polyethylene and kraft paper.
d. Moisture Barrier for Outdoor Applications: 3-mil- thick, heat-bonded polyethylene and kraft paper.
e. Factory-Fabricated Fitting Covers:
1) Same material, finish, and thickness as jacket.
2) Preformed two-piece or gore, 45- and 90-degree, short- and long-radius elbows.
3) Tee covers.
4) Flange and union covers.
5) End caps.
6) Beveled collars.
7) Valve covers.
8) Field fabricate fitting covers only if factory-fabricated fitting covers are not available.
2. Stainless Steel Jacket: ASTM A240/A240M.
a. Factory cut and rolled to size.
b. Material, finish, and thickness are indicated in field-applied jacket schedules. c. Moisture Barrier for Indoor Applications: 3-mil- thick, heat-bonded polyethylene and kraft paper.
d. Moisture Barrier for Outdoor Applications: 3-mil- thick, heat-bonded polyethylene and kraft paper.
e. Factory-Fabricated Fitting Covers:
1) Same material, finish, and thickness as jacket.
2) Preformed two-piece or gore, 45- and 90-degree, short- and long-radius elbows.
3) Tee covers.
4) Flange and union covers.
5) End caps.
6) Beveled collars.
7) Valve covers.
8) Field fabricate fitting covers only if factory-fabricated fitting covers are not available.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Plumbing Piping Insulation Renovation & Expansion Final Design 220719 - 6
100% Design Submittal
C. Underground Direct-Buried Jacket: 125-mil- thick vapor barrier and waterproofing membrane, consisting of a rubberized bituminous resin reinforced with a woven-glass fiber or polyester scrim and laminated aluminum foil.
D. Self-Adhesive Outdoor Jacket: 125-mil.
2.9 TAPES
A. ASJ Tape: White vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with acrylic adhesive, complying with ASTM C1136.
1. Width: 3 inches.
2. Thickness: 11.5 mils.
3. Adhesion: 90 ounces force/inch in width.
4. Elongation: 2 percent.
5. Tensile Strength: 40 lbf/inch in width.
6. ASJ Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of ASJ tape.
B. Aluminum-Foil Tape: Vapor-retarder tape with acrylic adhesive.
1. Width: 2 inches.
2. Thickness: 3.7 mils.
3. Adhesion: 100 ounces force/inch in width.
4. Elongation: 5 percent.
5. Tensile Strength: 34 lbf/inch in width.
2.10 SECUREMENTS
A. Bands:
1. Stainless Steel: ASTM A240/A240M, Type 304; 0.015 inch thick, 3/4 inch wide with wing seal or closed seal.
2. Aluminum: ASTM B209, Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105, or 5005; Temper H-14, 0.020 inch thick, 3/4 inch wide with wing seal or closed seal.
B. Staples: Outward-clinching insulation staples, nominal 3/4-inch- wide, stainless steel or Monel.
2.11 PROTECTIVE SHIELDING GUARDS
A. Protective Shielding Pipe Covers:
1. Description: Manufactured plastic wraps for covering plumbing fixture hot-water supply and trap and drain piping. Comply with Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) requirements.
B. Protective Shielding Piping Enclosures:
1. Description: Manufactured plastic enclosure for covering plumbing fixture hot- and coldwater supplies and trap and drain piping. Comply with ADA requirements. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Plumbing Piping Insulation Renovation & Expansion Final Design 220719 - 7
100% Design Submittal
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of insulation application.
1. Verify that systems to be insulated have been tested and are free of defects.
2. Verify that surfaces to be insulated are clean and dry.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove materials that will adversely affect insulation application.
B. Clean and prepare surfaces to be insulated. Before insulating, apply a corrosion coating to insulated surfaces as follows:
1. Stainless Steel: Coat 300 series stainless steel with an epoxy primer 5 mils thick and an epoxy finish 5 mils thick if operating in a temperature range of between 140 and 300 degrees F. Consult coating manufacturer for appropriate coating materials and application methods for operating temperature range.
2. Carbon Steel: Coat carbon steel operating at a service temperature of between 32 and 300 degrees F with an epoxy coating. Consult coating manufacturer for appropriate coating materials and application methods for operating temperature range.
C. Coordinate insulation installation with the tradesman installing heat tracing. Comply with requirements for heat tracing that apply to insulation.
D. Mix insulating cements with clean potable water; if insulating cements are to be in contact with stainless steel surfaces, use demineralized water.
3.3 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A. Install insulation materials, accessories, and finishes with smooth, straight, and even surfaces; free of voids throughout the length of piping including fittings, valves, and specialties.
B. Install insulation materials, forms, vapor barriers or retarders, jackets, and of thicknesses required for each item of pipe system, as specified in insulation system schedules.
C. Install accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service. Install accessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in either wet or dry state.
D. Install insulation with longitudinal seams at top and bottom of horizontal runs.
E. Install multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Plumbing Piping Insulation Renovation & Expansion Final Design 220719 - 8
100% Design Submittal
F. Do not weld brackets, clips, or other attachment devices to piping, fittings, and specialties.
G. Keep insulation materials dry during storage, application, and finishing. Replace insulation materials that get wet.
H. Install insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with adhesive recommended by insulation material manufacturer.
I. Install insulation with least number of joints practical.
J. Where vapor barrier is indicated, seal joints, seams, and penetrations in insulation at hangers, supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor-barrier mastic.
1. Install insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments.
2. For insulation application where vapor barriers are indicated, extend insulation on anchor legs from point of attachment to supported item to point of attachment to structure. Taper and seal ends attached to structure with vapor-barrier mastic.
3. Install insert materials and insulation to tightly join the insert. Seal insulation to insulation inserts with adhesive or sealing compound recommended by insulation material manufacturer.
4. Cover inserts with jacket material matching adjacent pipe insulation. Install shields over jacket, arranged to protect jacket from tear or puncture by hanger, support, and shield.
K. Apply adhesives, mastics, and sealants at manufacturer's recommended coverage rate and wet and dry film thicknesses.
L. Install insulation with factory-applied jackets as follows:
1. Draw jacket tight and smooth.
2. Cover circumferential joints with 3-inch- wide strips, of same material as insulation jacket. Secure strips with adhesive and outward-clinching staples along both edges of strip, spaced 4 inches o.c.
3. Overlap jacket longitudinal seams at least 1-1/2 inches. Install insulation with longitudinal seams at bottom of pipe. Clean and dry surface to receive self-sealing lap.
Staple laps with outward-clinching staples along edge at 4 inches o.c. a. For below-ambient services, apply vapor-barrier mastic over staples.
4. Cover joints and seams with tape, in accordance with insulation material manufacturer's written instructions, to maintain vapor seal.
5. Where vapor barriers are indicated, apply vapor-barrier mastic on seams and joints and at ends adjacent to pipe flanges and fittings.
M. Cut insulation in a manner to avoid compressing insulation more than 25 percent of its nominal thickness.
N. Finish installation with systems at operating conditions. Repair joint separations and cracking due to thermal movement.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Plumbing Piping Insulation Renovation & Expansion Final Design 220719 - 9
100% Design Submittal
O. Repair damaged insulation facings by applying same facing material over damaged areas.
Extend patches at least 4 inches beyond damaged areas. Adhere, staple, and seal patches in similar fashion to butt joints.
P. For above-ambient services, do not install insulation to the following:
1. Vibration-control devices.
2. Testing agency labels and stamps.
3. Nameplates and data plates.
4. Cleanouts.
3.4 PENETRATIONS
A. Insulation Installation at Roof Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through roof penetrations.
1. Seal penetrations with flashing sealant.
2. For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation above roof surface and seal with joint sealant. For applications requiring indoor and outdoor insulation, install insulation for outdoor applications tightly joined to indoor insulation ends. Seal joint with joint sealant.
3. Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside roof flashing at least 2 inches below top of roof flashing.
4. Seal jacket to roof flashing with flashing sealant.
B. Insulation Installation at Underground Exterior Wall Penetrations: Terminate insulation flush with sleeve seal. Seal terminations with flashing sealant.
C. Insulation Installation at Aboveground Exterior Wall Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through wall penetrations.
1. Seal penetrations with flashing sealant.
2. For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation inside wall surface and seal with joint sealant. For applications requiring indoor and outdoor insulation, install insulation for outdoor applications tightly joined to indoor insulation ends. Seal joint with joint sealant.
3. Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside wall flashing and overlap wall flashing at least 2 inches.
4. Seal jacket to wall flashing with flashing sealant.
D. Insulation Installation at Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations (That Are Not Fire Rated):
Install insulation continuously through walls and partitions.
E. Insulation Installation at Fire-Rated Wall and Partition Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through penetrations of fire-rated walls and partitions.
1. Comply with requirements in Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping" for firestopping and fire-resistive joint sealers.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Plumbing Piping Insulation Renovation & Expansion Final Design 220719 - 10
100% Design Submittal
F. Insulation Installation at Floor Penetrations:
1. Pipe: Install insulation continuously through floor penetrations.
2. Seal penetrations through fire-rated assemblies. Comply with requirements in Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping."
3.5 GENERAL PIPE INSULATION INSTALLATION
A. Requirements in this article generally apply to all insulation materials except where more specific requirements are specified in various pipe insulation material installation articles.
B. Insulation Installation on Fittings, Valves, Strainers, Flanges, Mechanical Couplings, and Unions:
1. Install insulation over fittings, valves, strainers, flanges, mechanical couplings, unions, and other specialties with continuous thermal and vapor-retarder integrity unless otherwise indicated.
2. Insulate pipe elbows using preformed fitting insulation or mitered fittings made from same material and density as that of adjacent pipe insulation. Each piece shall be butted tightly against adjoining piece and bonded with adhesive. Fill joints, seams, voids, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement finished to a smooth, hard, and uniform contour that is uniform with adjoining pipe insulation.
3. Insulate tee fittings with preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same material and thickness as that used for adjacent pipe. Cut sectional pipe insulation to fit.
Butt each section closely to the next and hold in place with tie wire. Bond pieces with adhesive.
4. Insulate valves using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same material, density, and thickness as that used for adjacent pipe. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than 2 times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker. For valves, insulate up to and including the bonnets, valve stuffingbox studs, bolts, and nuts. Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement.
5. Insulate strainers using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same material, density, and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than 2 times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker. Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement.
Insulate strainers, so strainer basket flange or plug can be easily removed and replaced without damaging the insulation and jacket. Provide a removable reusable insulation cover. For below-ambient services, provide a design that maintains vapor barrier.
6. Insulate flanges, mechanical couplings, and unions, using a section of oversized preformed pipe insulation. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than 2 times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker. Stencil or label the outside insulation jacket of each union with the word “union” matching size and color of pipe labels.
7. Cover segmented insulated surfaces with a layer of finishing cement and coat with a mastic. Install vapor-barrier mastic for below-ambient services and a breather mastic for above-ambient services. Reinforce the mastic with fabric-reinforcing mesh. Trowel the mastic to a smooth and well-shaped contour.
8. For services not specified to receive a field-applied jacket, except for flexible elastomeric and polyolefin, install fitted PVC cover over elbows, tees, strainers, valves, flanges, and ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Plumbing Piping Insulation Renovation & Expansion Final Design 220719 - 11
100% Design Submittal
unions. Terminate ends with PVC end caps. Tape PVC covers to adjoining insulation facing using PVC tape.
C. Insulate instrument connections for thermometers, pressure gages, pressure temperature taps, test connections, flow meters, sensors, switches, and transmitters on insulated pipes. Shape insulation at these connections by tapering it to and around the connection with insulating cement and finish with finishing cement, mastic, and flashing sealant.
D. Install removable insulation covers at locations indicated. Installation shall conform to the following:
1. Make removable flange and union insulation from sectional pipe insulation of same thickness as that on adjoining pipe. Install same insulation jacket as that of adjoining pipe insulation.
2. When flange and union covers are made from sectional pipe insulation, extend insulation from flanges or union at least 2 times the insulation thickness over adjacent pipe insulation on each side of flange or union. Secure flange cover in place with stainless steel or aluminum bands. Select band material compatible with insulation and jacket.
3. Construct removable valve insulation covers in same manner as for flanges, except divide the two-part section on the vertical center line of valve body.
4. When covers are made from block insulation, make two halves, each consisting of mitered blocks wired to stainless steel fabric. Secure this wire frame, with its attached insulation, to flanges with tie wire. Extend insulation at least 2 inches over adjacent pipe insulation on each side of valve. Fill space between flange or union cover and pipe insulation with insulating cement. Finish cover assembly with insulating cement applied in two coats. After first coat is dry, apply and trowel second coat to a smooth finish.
5. Unless a PVC jacket is indicated in field-applied jacket schedules, finish exposed surfaces with a metal jacket.
3.6 INSTALLATION OF CELLULAR-GLASS INSULATION
A. Insulation Installation on Straight Pipes and Tubes:
1. Secure each layer of insulation to pipe with wire or bands and tighten bands without deforming insulation materials.
2. Where vapor barriers are indicated, seal longitudinal seams, end joints, and protrusions with vapor-barrier mastic and joint sealant.
3. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on above-ambient services, secure laps with outward-clinched staples at 6 inches o.c.
4. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on below-ambient services, do not staple longitudinal tabs. Instead, secure tabs with additional adhesive, as recommended by insulation material manufacturer, and seal with vapor-barrier mastic and flashing sealant.
B. Insulation Installation on Pipe Flanges:
1. Install preformed pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange.
2. Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts, plus twice the thickness of pipe insulation.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Plumbing Piping Insulation Renovation & Expansion Final Design 220719 - 12
100% Design Submittal
3. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of adjacent straight pipe segments with cut sections of cellular-glass block insulation of same thickness as that of pipe insulation.
4. Install jacket material with manufacturer's recommended adhesive, overlap seams at least 1 inch, and seal joints with flashing sealant.
C. Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows:
1. Install preformed sections of same material as that of straight segments of pipe insulation when available. Secure according to manufacturer's written instructions.
2. When preformed sections of insulation are not available, install mitered sections of cellular-glass insulation. Secure insulation materials with wire or bands.
D. Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties:
1. Install preformed sections of cellular-glass insulation to valve body.
2. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without disturbing insulation.
3. Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application.
3.7 INSTALLATION OF FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC INSULATION
A. Seal longitudinal seams and end joints with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated.
B. Insulation Installation on Pipe Flanges:
1. Install pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange.
2. Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts, plus twice the thickness of pipe insulation.
3. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of adjacent straight pipe segments with cut sections of sheet insulation of same thickness as that of pipe insulation.
4. Secure insulation to flanges and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated.
C. Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows:
1. Install mitered sections of pipe insulation.
2. Secure insulation materials and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated.
D. Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties:
1. Install preformed valve covers manufactured of same material as that of pipe insulation when available.
2. When preformed valve covers are not available, install cut sections of pipe and sheet insulation to valve body. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without disturbing insulation.
3. Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Plumbing Piping Insulation Renovation & Expansion Final Design 220719 - 13
100% Design Submittal
4. Secure insulation to valves and specialties, and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated.
3.8 INSTALLATION OF MINERAL-FIBER INSULATION
A. Insulation Installation on Straight Pipes and Tubes:
1. Secure each layer of preformed pipe insulation to pipe with wire or bands and tighten bands without deforming insulation materials.
2. Where vapor barriers are indicated, seal longitudinal seams, end joints, and protrusions with vapor-barrier mastic and joint sealant.
3. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on above-ambient surfaces, secure laps with outward-clinched staples at 6 inches o.c.
4. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on below-ambient surfaces, do not staple longitudinal tabs. Instead, secure tabs with additional adhesive, as recommended by insulation material manufacturer, and seal with vapor-barrier mastic and flashing sealant.
B. Insulation Installation on Pipe Flanges:
1. Install preformed pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange.
2. Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts, plus twice the thickness of pipe insulation.
3. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of adjacent straight pipe segments with mineral-fiber blanket insulation.
4. Install jacket material with manufacturer's recommended adhesive, overlap seams at least 1 inch, and seal joints with flashing sealant.
C. Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows:
1. Install preformed sections of same material as that of straight segments of pipe insulation when available.
2. When preformed insulation elbows and fittings are not available, install mitered sections of pipe insulation, to a thickness equal to adjoining pipe insulation. Secure insulation materials with wire or bands.
D. Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties:
1. Install preformed sections of same material as that of straight segments of pipe insulation when available.
2. When preformed sections are not available, install mitered sections of pipe insulation to valve body.
3. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without disturbing insulation.
4. Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Plumbing Piping Insulation Renovation & Expansion Final Design 220719 - 14
100% Design Submittal
3.9 FIELD-APPLIED JACKET INSTALLATION
A. Where metal jackets are indicated, install with 2-inch overlap at longitudinal seams and end joints. Overlap longitudinal seams arranged to shed water. Seal end joints with weatherproof sealant recommended by insulation manufacturer. Secure jacket with stainless steel bands 12 inches o.c. and at end joints.
3.10 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform tests and inspections with the assistance of a factory-authorized service representative.
B. Tests and Inspections: Inspect pipe, fittings, strainers, and valves, randomly selected by Engineer, by removing field-applied jacket and insulation in layers in reverse order of their installation.
C. All insulation applications will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.
D. Prepare test and inspection reports.
3.11 PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE, GENERAL
A. Acceptable preformed pipe and tubular insulation materials and thicknesses are identified for each piping system and pipe size range. If more than one material is listed for a piping system, selection from materials listed is Contractor's option.
B. Items Not Insulated: Unless otherwise indicated, do not install insulation on the following:
1. Drainage piping located in crawl spaces.
2. Underground piping.
3. Chrome-plated pipes and fittings unless there is a potential for personnel injury.
3.12 PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE
A. Domestic Cold Water:
1. Insulation shall be one of the following:
a. Cellular Glass: 1-1/2 inches thick.
b. Flexible Elastomeric: 1 inch thick.
c. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation, Type I: 1 inch thick.
B. Domestic Hot and Recirculated Hot Water:
1. Insulation shall be one of the following:
a. Cellular Glass: 1-1/2 inches thick.
b. Flexible Elastomeric: 1 inch thick.
c. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation, Type I: 1 inch thick. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Plumbing Piping Insulation Renovation & Expansion Final Design 220719 - 15
100% Design Submittal
3.13 INDOOR, FIELD-APPLIED JACKET SCHEDULE
A. Install jacket over insulation material. For insulation with factory-applied jacket, install the field-applied jacket over the factory-applied jacket.
B. If more than one material is listed, selection from materials listed is Contractor's option.
C. Piping, Concealed:
1. None.
D. Piping, Exposed:
1. Aluminum, Smooth: 0.016 inch thick.
2. Stainless Steel, Type 304, Smooth No. 2B Finish: 0.016 inch thick.
3.14 OUTDOOR, FIELD-APPLIED JACKET SCHEDULE
A. Install jacket over insulation material. For insulation with factory-applied jacket, install the field-applied jacket over the factory-applied jacket.
B. If more than one material is listed, selection from materials listed is Contractor's option.
C. Piping, Concealed:
1. None.
D. Piping, Exposed:
1. Aluminum, Smooth: 0.016 inch thick.
2. Stainless Steel, Type 304 or Type 316, Smooth No. 2B Finish: 0.016 inch thick.
3.15 UNDERGROUND, FIELD-APPLIED INSULATION JACKET
A. For underground direct-buried piping applications, install underground direct-buried jacket over insulation material.
END OF SECTION 220719
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Plumbing Piping Insulation Renovation & Expansion Final Design 220719 - 16
100% Design Submittal
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Domestic Water Piping Renovation & Expansion Final Design 221116 - 1
100% Design Submittal
SECTION 221116 - DOMESTIC WATER PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Copper tube and fittings.
2. Piping joining materials.
3. Encasement for piping.
4. Transition fittings.
5. Dielectric fittings.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For transition fittings and dielectric fittings.
1.4 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Interruption of Existing Water Service: Do not interrupt water service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary water service according to requirements indicated:
1. Notify Owner no fewer than two days in advance of proposed interruption of water service.
2. Do not interrupt water service without Owner's written permission.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PIPING MATERIALS
A. Comply with requirements in "Piping Schedule" Article for applications of pipe, tube, fitting materials, and joining methods for specific services, service locations, and pipe sizes.
B. Potable-water piping and components shall comply with NSF 14 and NSF 61 Annex G. Plastic piping components shall be marked with "NSF-pw."
C. Comply with NSF 372 for low lead.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Domestic Water Piping Renovation & Expansion Final Design 221116 - 2
100% Design Submittal
2.2 COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS
A. Hard Copper Tube: ASTM B88, Type L and ASTM B88, Type M water tube, drawn temper.
B. Soft Copper Tube: ASTM B88, Type K and ASTM B88, Type L water tube, annealed temper.
C. Cast-Copper, Solder-Joint Fittings: ASME B16.18, pressure fittings.
D. Wrought-Copper, Solder-Joint Fittings: ASME B16.22, wrought-copper pressure fittings.
E. Bronze Flanges: ASME B16.24, Class 150, with solder-joint ends.
F. Copper Unions:
1. MSS SP-123.
2. Cast-copper-alloy, hexagonal-stock body.
3. Ball-and-socket, metal-to-metal seating surfaces.
4. Solder-joint or threaded ends.
G. Copper Pressure-Seal-Joint Fittings:
1. Fittings for NPS 2 and Smaller: Wrought-copper fitting with EPDM-rubber, O-ring seal in each end.
2. Fittings for NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: Cast-bronze or wrought-copper fitting with EPDMrubber, O-ring seal in each end.
H. Copper Push-on-Joint Fittings:
1. Description:
a. Cast-copper fitting complying with ASME B16.18 or wrought-copper fitting complying with ASME B 16.22.
b. Stainless steel teeth and EPDM-rubber, O-ring seal in each end instead of solderjoint ends.
I. Copper-Tube, Extruded-Tee Connections:
1. Description: Tee formed in copper tube according to ASTM F2014.
J. Appurtenances for Grooved-End Copper Tubing:
1. Bronze Fittings for Grooved-End, Copper Tubing: ASTM B75/B75M copper tube or ASTM B584 bronze castings.
2. Mechanical Couplings for Grooved-End Copper Tubing:
a. Copper-tube dimensions and design similar to AWWA C606. b. Ferrous housing sections.
c. EPDM-rubber gaskets suitable for hot and cold water. d. Bolts and nuts.
e. Minimum Pressure Rating: 300 psig.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Domestic Water Piping Renovation & Expansion Final Design 221116 - 3
100% Design Submittal
2.3 ENCASEMENT FOR PIPING
A. Standard: ASTM A674 or AWWA C105/A21.5.
B. Form: tube.
2.4 TRANSITION FITTINGS
A. General Requirements:
1. Same size as pipes to be joined.
2. Pressure rating at least equal to pipes to be joined.
3. End connections compatible with pipes to be joined.
B. Fitting-Type Transition Couplings: Manufactured piping coupling or specified piping system fitting.
C. Sleeve-Type Transition Coupling: AWWA C219.
D. Plastic-to-Metal Transition Fittings:
1. Description:
a. CPVC or PVC one-piece fitting with manufacturer's Schedule 80 equivalent dimensions.
b. One end with threaded brass insert and one solvent-cement-socket or threaded end.
E. Plastic-to-Metal Transition Unions:
1. Description:
a. CPVC or PVC four-part union.
b. Brass or stainless steel threaded end.
c. Solvent-cement-joint or threaded plastic end.
d. Rubber O-ring.
e. Union nut.
2.5 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS
A. General Requirements: Assembly of copper alloy and ferrous materials with separating nonconductive insulating material. Include end connections compatible with pipes to be joined.
B. Dielectric Unions:
1. Standard: ASSE 1079.
2. Pressure Rating: 250 psig.
3. End Connections: Solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Domestic Water Piping Renovation & Expansion Final Design 221116 - 4
100% Design Submittal
C. Dielectric Flanges:
1. Standard: ASSE 1079.
2. Factory-fabricated, bolted, companion-flange assembly.
3. Pressure Rating: 300 psig.
4. End Connections: Solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous; threaded solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous.
D. Dielectric-Flange Insulating Kits:
1. Nonconducting materials for field assembly of companion flanges.
2. Pressure Rating: 150 psig.
3. Gasket: Neoprene or phenolic.
4. Bolt Sleeves: Phenolic or polyethylene.
5. Washers: Phenolic with steel backing washers.
E. Dielectric Nipples:
1. Standard: IAPMO PS 66.
2. Electroplated steel nipple complying with ASTM F1545.
3. Pressure Rating and Temperature: 300 psig at 225 deg F.
4. End Connections: Male threaded or grooved.
5. Lining: Inert and noncorrosive, propylene.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EARTHWORK
A. Comply with requirements in Section 312000 "Earthwork" for excavating, trenching, and backfilling.
3.2 PIPING INSTALLATION
A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of domestic water piping. Indicated locations and arrangements are used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on coordination drawings.
B. Install copper tubing under building slab according to CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook." C. Install underground copper tube in PE encasement according to ASTM A674 or AWWA C105/A21.5.
D. Install shutoff valve, hose-end drain valve, strainer, pressure gage, and test tee with valve inside the building at each domestic water-service entrance. Comply with requirements for pressure gages in Section 220519 "Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping" and with requirements for drain valves and strainers in Section 221119 "Domestic Water Piping Specialties." E. Install shutoff valve immediately upstream of each dielectric fitting. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Domestic Water Piping Renovation & Expansion Final Design 221116 - 5
100% Design Submittal
F. Install water-pressure-reducing valves downstream from shutoff valves. Comply with requirements for pressure-reducing valves in Section 221119 "Domestic Water Piping Specialties."
G. Install domestic water piping level with 0.25 percent slope downward toward drain and plumb.
H. Rough-in domestic water piping for water-meter installation according to utility company's requirements.
I. Install piping concealed from view and protected from physical contact by building occupants unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas.
J. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise.
K. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal, and coordinate with other services occupying that space.
L. Install piping to permit valve servicing.
M. Install nipples, unions, special fittings, and valves with pressure ratings the same as or higher than the system pressure rating used in applications below unless otherwise indicated.
N. Install piping free of sags and bends.
O. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.
P. Install PEX tubing with loop at each change of direction of more than 90 degrees.
Q. Install unions in copper tubing at final connection to each piece of equipment, machine, and specialty.
R. Install sleeves for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements for sleeves specified in Section 220517 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Plumbing Piping." S. Install sleeve seals for piping penetrations of concrete walls and slabs. Comply with requirements for sleeve seals specified in Section 220517 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Plumbing Piping."
T. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements for escutcheons specified in Section 220518 "Escutcheons for Plumbing Piping."
3.3 JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.
B. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipes, tubes, and fittings before assembly.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Domestic Water Piping Renovation & Expansion Final Design 221116 - 6
100% Design Submittal
C. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:
1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads.
2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or damaged.
D. Brazed Joints for Copper Tubing: Comply with CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook," "Brazed Joints" chapter.
E. Soldered Joints for Copper Tubing: Apply flux to end of tube. Join copper tube and fittings according to ASTM B828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook." F. Pressure-Sealed Joints for Copper Tubing: Join copper tube and pressure-seal fittings with tools recommended by fitting manufacturer.
G. Push-on Joints for Copper Tubing: Clean end of tube. Measure insertion depth with manufacturer's depth gage. Join copper tube and push-on-joint fittings by inserting tube to measured depth.
H. Extruded-Tee Connections: Form tee in copper tube according to ASTM F2014. Use tool designed for copper tube; drill pilot hole, form collar for outlet, dimple tube to form seating stop, and braze branch tube into collar.
I. Joint Construction for Grooved-End Copper Tubing: Make joints according to AWWA C606.
Roll groove ends of tubes. Lubricate and install gasket over ends of tubes or tube and fitting.
Install coupling housing sections over gasket with keys seated in tubing grooves. Install and tighten housing bolts.
J. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate asbestos-free, nonmetallic gasket material in size, type, and thickness suitable for domestic water service. Join flanges with gasket and bolts according to ASME B31.9.
K. Joints for Dissimilar-Material Piping: Make joints using adapters compatible with materials of both piping systems.
3.4 TRANSITION FITTING INSTALLATION
A. Install transition couplings at joints of dissimilar piping.
B. Transition Fittings in Underground Domestic Water Piping:
1. Fittings for NPS 1-1/2 and Smaller: Fitting-type coupling.
2. Fittings for NPS 2 and Larger: Sleeve-type coupling.
C. Transition Fittings in Aboveground Domestic Water Piping NPS 2 and Smaller: Plastic-to-metal transition fittings or unions.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Domestic Water Piping Renovation & Expansion Final Design 221116 - 7
100% Design Submittal
3.5 DIELECTRIC FITTING INSTALLATION
A. Install dielectric fittings in piping at connections of dissimilar metal piping and tubing.
B. Dielectric Fittings for NPS 2 and Smaller: Use dielectric unions.
C. Dielectric Fittings for NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: Use dielectric flanges.
D. Dielectric Fittings for NPS 5 and Larger: Use dielectric flange kits.
3.6 INSTALLATION OF HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. Comply with requirements for seismic-restraint devices specified in Section 220548 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment." B. Comply with requirements for pipe hangers, supports, and anchor devices in Section 220529 "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."
1. Vertical Piping: MSS Type 8 or 42, clamps.
2. Individual, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs:
a. 100 Feet and Less: MSS Type 1, adjustable, steel clevis hangers. b. Longer Than 100 Feet: MSS Type 43, adjustable roller hangers. c. Longer Than 100 Feet if Indicated: MSS Type 49, spring cushion rolls.
3. Multiple, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs 100 Feet or Longer: MSS Type 44, pipe rolls.
Support pipe rolls on trapeze.
4. Base of Vertical Piping: MSS Type 52, spring hangers.
C. Install hangers for copper tubing and piping, with maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters, to comply with MSS-58, locally enforced codes, and authorities having jurisdiction requirements, whichever are most stringent.
D. Support horizontal piping within 12 inches of each fitting.
E. Support vertical runs of copper tubing and piping to comply with MSS-58, locally enforced codes, and authorities having jurisdiction requirements, whichever are most stringent.
3.7 CONNECTIONS
A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
B. When installing piping adjacent to equipment and machines, allow space for service and maintenance.
C. Connect domestic water piping to exterior water-service piping. Use transition fitting to join dissimilar piping materials.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Domestic Water Piping Renovation & Expansion Final Design 221116 - 8
100% Design Submittal
D. Connect domestic water piping to water-service piping with shutoff valve; extend and connect to the following:
1. Water Heaters: Cold-water inlet and hot-water outlet piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than sizes of water heater connections.
2. Plumbing Fixtures: Cold- and hot-water-supply piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than that required by plumbing code.
3. Equipment: Cold- and hot-water-supply piping as indicated, but not smaller than equipment connections. Provide shutoff valve and union for each connection. Use flanges instead of unions for NPS 2-1/2 and larger.
3.8 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify system components. Comply with requirements for identification materials and installation in Section 220553 "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment." B. Label pressure piping with system operating pressure.
3.9 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform the following tests and inspections:
1. Piping Inspections:
a. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it has been inspected and approved by authorities having jurisdiction.
b. During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least one day before inspection must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities having jurisdiction:
1) Roughing-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing or closing in after roughing in and before setting fixtures. 2) Final Inspection: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to observe tests specified in "Piping Tests" Subparagraph below and to ensure compliance with requirements.
c. Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass tests or inspections, make required corrections and arrange for reinspection. d. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having jurisdiction.
2. Piping Tests:
a. Fill domestic water piping. Check components to determine that they are not air bound and that piping is full of water.
b. Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered, extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submit a separate report for each test, complete with diagram of portion of piping tested. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Domestic Water Piping Renovation & Expansion Final Design 221116 - 9
100% Design Submittal
c. Leave new, altered, extended, or replaced domestic water piping uncovered and unconcealed until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that was covered or concealed before it was tested.
d. Cap and subject piping to static water pressure of 50 psig above operating pressure, without exceeding pressure rating of piping system materials. Isolate test source and allow it to stand for four hours. Leaks and loss in test pressure constitute defects that must be repaired.
e. Repair leaks and defects with new materials, and retest piping or portion thereof until satisfactory results are obtained.
f. Prepare reports for tests and for corrective action required.
B. Domestic water piping will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.
C. Prepare test and inspection reports.
3.10 ADJUSTING
A. Perform the following adjustments before operation:
1. Close drain valves, hydrants, and hose bibbs.
2. Open shutoff valves to fully open position.
3. Open throttling valves to proper setting.
4. Adjust balancing valves in hot-water-circulation return piping to provide adequate flow. a. Manually adjust ball-type balancing valves in hot-water-circulation return piping to provide hot-water flow in each branch.
b. Adjust calibrated balancing valves to flows indicated.
5. Remove plugs used during testing of piping and for temporary sealing of piping during installation.
6. Remove and clean strainer screens. Close drain valves and replace drain plugs.
7. Remove filter cartridges from housings and verify that cartridges are as specified for application where used and are clean and ready for use.
8. Check plumbing specialties and verify proper settings, adjustments, and operation.
3.11 CLEANING
A. Clean and disinfect potable domestic water piping as follows:
1. Purge new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered, extended, or repaired before using.
2. Use purging and disinfecting procedures prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction; if methods are not prescribed, use procedures described in either AWWA C651 or AWWA C652 or follow procedures described below:
a. Flush piping system with clean, potable water until dirty water does not appear at outlets.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Domestic Water Piping Renovation & Expansion Final Design 221116 - 10
100% Design Submittal
b. Fill and isolate system according to either of the following:
1) Fill system or part thereof with water/chlorine solution with at least 50 ppm of chlorine. Isolate with valves and allow to stand for 24 hours. 2) Fill system or part thereof with water/chlorine solution with at least 200 ppm of chlorine. Isolate and allow to stand for three hours. c. Flush system with clean, potable water until no chlorine is in water coming from system after the standing time.
d. Repeat procedures if biological examination shows contamination. e. Submit water samples in sterile bottles to authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Clean non-potable domestic water piping as follows:
1. Purge new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered, extended, or repaired before using.
2. Use purging procedures prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction; or, if methods are not prescribed, follow procedures described below:
a. Flush piping system with clean, potable water until dirty water does not appear at outlets.
b. Submit water samples in sterile bottles to authorities having jurisdiction. Repeat procedures if biological examination shows contamination.
C. Prepare and submit reports of purging and disinfecting activities. Include copies of watersample approvals from authorities having jurisdiction.
D. Clean interior of domestic water piping system. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses.
3.12 PIPING SCHEDULE
A. Transition and special fittings with pressure ratings at least equal to piping rating may be used in applications below unless otherwise indicated.
B. Flanges and unions may be used for aboveground piping joints unless otherwise indicated.
C. Fitting Option: Extruded-tee connections and brazed joints may be used on aboveground copper tubing.
D. Under-building-slab, domestic water, building-service piping shall be the following:
1. Soft copper tube, ASTM B88, Type K; wrought-copper, solder-joint fittings; and brazed joints.
E. Aboveground domestic water piping,, shall be one of the following:
1. Hard copper tube, ASTM B88, Type L or ASTM B88, Type M; copper pressure-sealjoint fittings; and pressure-sealed joints.
2. Hard copper tube, ASTM B88, Type L or ASTM B88, Type M; copper push-on-joint fittings; and push-on joints.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Domestic Water Piping Renovation & Expansion Final Design 221116 - 11
100% Design Submittal
3.13 VALVE SCHEDULE
A. Drawings indicate valve types to be used. Where specific valve types are not indicated, the following requirements apply:
1. Shutoff Duty: Use ball or gate valves for piping NPS 2 and smaller. Use butterfly, ball, or gate valves with flanged ends for piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger.
2. Throttling Duty: Use ball or globe valves for piping NPS 2 and smaller. Use butterfly or ball valves with flanged ends for piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger.
3. Hot-Water Circulation Piping, Balancing Duty: Memory-stop balancing valves.
4. Drain Duty: Hose-end drain valves.
B. Use check valves to maintain correct direction of domestic water flow to and from equipment.
C. Iron grooved-end valves may be used with grooved-end piping.
END OF SECTION 221116
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Domestic Water Piping Renovation & Expansion Final Design 221116 - 12
100% Design Submittal
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Domestic Water Piping Specialties Renovation & Expansion Final Design 221119 - 1
100% Design Submittal
SECTION 221119 - DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Vacuum breakers.
2. Backflow preventers.
3. Strainers.
4. Drain valves.
5. Water-hammer arresters.
6. Air vents.
7. Trap-seal primer valves.
8. Trap-seal primer systems.
9. Flexible connectors.
10. Water meters.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 221116 "Domestic Water Piping" for water meters.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR PIPING SPECIALTIES
A. Potable-water piping and components comply with NSF 61 Annex G and NSF 14.
2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Minimum Working Pressure for Domestic Water Piping Specialties: 125 psig unless otherwise indicated.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Domestic Water Piping Specialties Renovation & Expansion Final Design 221119 - 2
100% Design Submittal
2.3 VACUUM BREAKERS
A. Pipe-Applied, Atmospheric-Type Vacuum Breakers:
1. Standard: ASSE 1001.
2. Size: NPS 1/4 to NPS 3, as required to match connected piping.
3. Body: Bronze.
4. Inlet and Outlet Connections: Threaded.
5. Finish: Chrome plated.
B. Laboratory-Faucet Vacuum Breakers:
1. Standard: ASSE 1035.
2. Size: NPS 1/4 or NPS 3/8 matching faucet size.
3. Body: Bronze.
4. End Connections: Threaded.
5. Finish: Chrome plated.
2.4 BACKFLOW PREVENTERS
A. Reduced-Pressure-Principle Backflow Preventers:
1. Standard: ASSE 1013.
2. Operation: Continuous-pressure applications.
3. Pressure Loss: 12 psig maximum, through middle third of flow range.
4. Size: 2 NPS.
5. Body: Bronze for NPS 2 and smaller; cast iron with interior lining that complies with AWWA C550 or that is FDA approved for NPS 2-1/2 and larger.
6. End Connections: Threaded for NPS 2 and smaller; flanged for NPS 2-1/2 and larger.
7. Configuration: Designed for horizontal, straight-through flow.
8. Accessories:
a. Valves NPS 2 and Smaller: Ball type with threaded ends on inlet and outlet. b. Valves NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Outside-screw and yoke-gate type with flanged ends on inlet and outlet.
c. Air-Gap Fitting: ASME A112.1.2, matching backflow-preventer connection.
2.5 STRAINERS FOR DOMESTIC WATER PIPING
A. Y-Pattern Strainers:
1. Pressure Rating: 125 psig minimum unless otherwise indicated.
2. Body: Bronze for NPS 2 and smaller; cast iron for NPS 2-1/2 and larger.
3. End Connections: Threaded for NPS 2 and smaller; flanged for NPS 2-1/2 and larger.
4. Screen: Stainless steel with round perforations unless otherwise indicated.
5. Perforation Size:
a. Strainers NPS 2 and Smaller: 0.020 inch.
b. Strainers NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: 0.045 inch.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Domestic Water Piping Specialties Renovation & Expansion Final Design 221119 - 3
100% Design Submittal
c. Strainers NPS 5 and Larger: 0.10 inch.
6. Drain: Factory-installed, hose-end drain valve.
2.6 DRAIN VALVES
A. Ball-Valve-Type, Hose-End Drain Valves:
1. Standard: MSS SP-110 for standard-port, two-piece ball valves.
2. Pressure Rating: 400-psig minimum CWP.
3. Size: NPS 3/4.
4. Body: Copper alloy.
5. Ball: Chrome-plated brass.
6. Seats and Seals: Replaceable.
7. Handle: Vinyl-covered steel.
8. Inlet: Threaded or solder joint.
9. Outlet: Threaded, short nipple with garden-hose thread complying with ASME B1.20.7 and cap with brass chain.
2.7 WATER-HAMMER ARRESTERS
A. Water-Hammer Arresters:
1. Standard: ASSE 1010 or PDI-WH 201.
2. Type: Copper tube with piston.
3. Size: ASSE 1010, Sizes AA and A through F, or PDI-WH 201, Sizes A through F.
2.8 AIR VENTS
A. Bolted-Construction Automatic Air Vents:
1. Body: Bronze.
2. Pressure Rating and Temperature: 125-psig minimum pressure rating at 140 deg F.
3. Float: Replaceable, corrosion-resistant metal.
4. Mechanism and Seat: Stainless steel.
5. Size: NPS 1/2 minimum inlet.
6. Inlet and Vent Outlet End Connections: Threaded.
B. Welded-Construction Automatic Air Vents:
1. Body: Stainless steel.
2. Pressure Rating: 150-psig minimum pressure rating.
3. Float: Replaceable, corrosion-resistant metal.
4. Mechanism and Seat: Stainless steel.
5. Size: NPS 3/8 minimum inlet.
6. Inlet and Vent Outlet End Connections: Threaded.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Domestic Water Piping Specialties Renovation & Expansion Final Design 221119 - 4
100% Design Submittal
2.9 TRAP-SEAL PRIMER DEVICE
A. Supply-Type, Trap-Seal Primer Device:
1. Standard: ASSE 1018.
2. Pressure Rating: 125 psig minimum.
3. Body: Bronze.
4. Inlet and Outlet Connections: NPS 1/2 threaded, union, or solder joint.
5. Gravity Drain Outlet Connection: NPS 1/2 threaded or solder joint.
6. Finish: Chrome plated, or rough bronze for units used with pipe or tube that is not chrome finished.
B. Drainage-Type, Trap-Seal Primer Device:
1. Standard: ASSE 1044, lavatory P-trap with NPS 3/8 minimum, trap makeup connection.
2. Size: NPS 1-1/4 minimum.
3. Material: Chrome-plated, cast brass.
2.10 TRAP-SEAL PRIMER SYSTEMS
A. Trap-Seal Primer Systems:
1. Standard: ASSE 1044.
2. Piping: NPS 3/4, ASTM B88, Type L; copper, water tubing.
3. Cabinet: Surface-mounted steel box with stainless steel cover.
4. Electric Controls: 24-hour timer, solenoid valve, and manual switch for 120-V ac power. a. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
5. Vacuum Breaker: ASSE 1001.
6. Number Outlets: Eight.
7. Size Outlets: NPS 1/2.
2.11 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS
A. Bronze-Hose Flexible Connectors: Corrugated-bronze tubing with bronze wire-braid covering and ends brazed to inner tubing.
1. Working-Pressure Rating: Minimum 250 psig.
2. End Connections NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded copper pipe or plain-end copper tube.
3. End Connections NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Flanged copper alloy.
B. Stainless Steel-Hose Flexible Connectors: Corrugated-stainless steel tubing with stainless steel wire-braid covering and ends welded to inner tubing.
1. Working-Pressure Rating: Minimum 250 psig.
2. End Connections NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded steel-pipe nipple.
3. End Connections NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Flanged steel nipple. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Domestic Water Piping Specialties Renovation & Expansion Final Design 221119 - 5
100% Design Submittal
2.12 WATER METERS
A. Displacement-Type Water Meters:
1. Description:
a. Standard: AWWA C700.
b. Pressure Rating: 150-psig working pressure.
c. Body Design: Nutating disc; totalization meter.
d. Registration: In gallons or cubic feet as required by utility company. e. Case: Bronze.
f. End Connections: Threaded.
B. Turbine-Type Water Meters:
1. Description:
a. Standard: AWWA C701.
b. Pressure Rating: 150-psig working pressure.
c. Body Design: Turbine; totalization meter.
d. Registration: In gallons or cubic feet as required by utility company. e. Case: Bronze.
f. End Connections for Meters NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded. g. End Connections for Meters NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Flanged.
C. Compound-Type Water Meters:
1. Description:
a. Standard: AWWA C702.
b. Pressure Rating: 150-psig working pressure.
c. Body Design: With integral mainline and bypass meters; totalization meter. d. Registration: In gallons or cubic feet as required by utility company. e. Case: Bronze.
f. Pipe Connections: Flanged.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install backflow preventers in each water supply to mechanical equipment and systems and to other equipment and water systems that may be sources of contamination. Comply with authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Locate backflow preventers in same room as connected equipment or system.
2. Install drain for backflow preventers with atmospheric-vent drain connection with air-gap fitting, fixed air-gap fitting, or equivalent positive pipe separation of at least two pipe diameters in drain piping and pipe-to-floor drain. Locate air-gap device attached to or under backflow preventer. Simple air breaks are unacceptable for this application. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Domestic Water Piping Specialties Renovation & Expansion Final Design 221119 - 6
100% Design Submittal
3. Do not install bypass piping around backflow preventers.
B. Install water regulators with inlet and outlet shutoff valves and bypass with memory-stop balancing valve. Install pressure gages on inlet and outlet.
C. Install water-hammer arresters in water piping according to PDI-WH 201.
D. Install air vents at high points of water piping.
E. Install supply-type, trap-seal primer valves with outlet piping pitched down toward drain trap a minimum of 1 percent, and connect to floor-drain body, trap, or inlet fitting. Adjust valve for proper flow.
F. Install drainage-type, trap-seal primer valves as lavatory trap with outlet piping pitched down toward drain trap a minimum of 1 percent, and connect to floor-drain body, trap, or inlet fitting.
G. Install trap-seal primer systems with outlet piping pitched down toward drain trap a minimum of 1 percent, and connect to floor-drain body, trap, or inlet fitting. Adjust system for proper flow.
3.2 CONNECTIONS
A. Comply with requirements for ground equipment in Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."
B. Fire-retardant-treated-wood blocking is specified in Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables" for electrical connections.
3.3 LABELING AND IDENTIFYING
A. Equipment Nameplates and Signs: Install engraved plastic-laminate equipment nameplate or sign on or near each of the following:
1. Pressure vacuum breakers.
2. Intermediate atmospheric-vent backflow preventers.
3. Reduced-pressure-principle backflow preventers.
4. Double-check, backflow-prevention assemblies.
5. Carbonated-beverage-machine backflow preventers.
6. Dual-check-valve backflow preventers.
7. Reduced-pressure-detector, fire-protection, backflow-preventer assemblies.
8. Double-check, detector-assembly backflow preventers.
9. Water pressure-reducing valves.
10. Calibrated balancing valves.
11. Primary, thermostatic, water mixing valves.
12. Manifold, thermostatic, water mixing-valve assemblies.
13. Photographic-process, thermostatic, water mixing-valve assemblies.
14. Primary water tempering valves.
15. Outlet boxes.
16. Hose stations.
17. Supply-type, trap-seal primer valves.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Domestic Water Piping Specialties Renovation & Expansion Final Design 221119 - 7
100% Design Submittal
18. Trap-seal primer systems.
B. Distinguish among multiple units, inform operator of operational requirements, indicate safety and emergency precautions, and warn of hazards and improper operations, in addition to identifying unit. Nameplates and signs are specified in Section 220553 "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform the following tests and inspections:
1. Test each reduced-pressure-principle backflow preventer according to authorities having jurisdiction and the device's reference standard.
B. Domestic water piping specialties will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.
C. Prepare test and inspection reports.
3.5 ADJUSTING
A. Set field-adjustable pressure set points of water pressure-reducing valves.
B. Set field-adjustable flow set points of balancing valves.
C. Set field-adjustable temperature set points of temperature-actuated, water mixing valves.
END OF SECTION 221119
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Domestic Water Piping Specialties Renovation & Expansion Final Design 221119 - 8
100% Design Submittal
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping Renovation & Expansion Final Design 221316 - 1
100% Design Submittal
SECTION 221316 - SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Hub-and-spigot, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings.
2. Hubless, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings.
3. PVC pipe and fittings.
4. Specialty pipe fittings.
5. Encasement for underground metal piping.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
1.4 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Interruption of Existing Sanitary Waste Service: Do not interrupt service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary service according to requirements indicated:
1. Notify Owner no fewer than days in advance of proposed interruption of sanitary waste service.
2. Do not proceed with interruption of sanitary waste service without Owner's written permission.
1.5 WARRANTY
A. Listed manufacturers to provide labeling and warranty of their respective products. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping Renovation & Expansion Final Design 221316 - 2
100% Design Submittal
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Components and installation capable of withstanding the following minimum working pressure unless otherwise indicated:
1. Soil, Waste, and Vent Piping: 10-foot head of water.
2.2 PIPING MATERIALS
A. Piping materials bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency.
B. Comply with requirements in "Piping Schedule" Article for applications of pipe, tube, fitting materials, and joining methods for specific services, service locations, and pipe sizes.
2.3 HUB-AND-SPIGOT, CAST-IRON SOIL PIPE AND FITTINGS
A. Pipe and Fittings: ASTM A74, Service class(es).
B. Gaskets: ASTM C564, rubber.
C. Caulking Materials: ASTM B29, pure lead and oakum or hemp fiber.
2.4 HUBLESS, CAST-IRON SOIL PIPE AND FITTINGS
A. Pipe and Fittings: ASTM A888 or CISPI 301.
B. Single-Stack Aerator Fittings: ASME B16.45, hubless, cast-iron aerator and deaerator drainage fittings.
C. CISPI, Hubless-Piping Couplings:
1. Standards: ASTM C1277 and CISPI 310.
2. Description: Stainless-steel corrugated shield with stainless-steel bands and tightening devices; and ASTM C564, rubber sleeve with integral, center pipe stop.
D. Cast-Iron, Hubless-Piping Couplings:
1. Standard: ASTM C1277.
2. Description: Two-piece ASTM A48/A48M, cast-iron housing; stainless-steel bolts and nuts; and ASTM C564, rubber sleeve with integral, center pipe stop. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping Renovation & Expansion Final Design 221316 - 3
100% Design Submittal
2.5 PVC PIPE AND FITTINGS
A. Comply with NSF 14, "Plastics Piping Systems Components and Related Materials," for plastic piping components. Include marking with "NSF-dwv" for plastic drain, waste, and vent piping and "NSF-sewer" for plastic sewer piping.
B. Solid-Wall PVC Pipe: ASTM D2665, drain, waste, and vent.
C. Cellular-Core PVC Pipe: ASTM F891, Schedule 40.
D. PVC Socket Fittings: ASTM D2665, made to ASTM D3311, drain, waste, and vent patterns and to fit Schedule 40 pipe.
E. Adhesive Primer: ASTM F656.
F. Solvent Cement: ASTM D2564.
2.6 SPECIALTY PIPE FITTINGS
A. Transition Couplings:
1. Fitting-Type Transition Couplings: Manufactured piping coupling or specified piping system fitting.
2. Unshielded, Nonpressure Transition Couplings:
a. Standard: ASTM C1173.
b. Description: Elastomeric, sleeve-type, reducing or transition pattern. Include shear ring and corrosion-resistant-metal tension band and tightening mechanism on each end.
c. End Connections: Same size as and compatible with pipes to be joined. d. Sleeve Materials:
1) For Cast-Iron Soil Pipes: ASTM C564, rubber.
2) For Plastic Pipes: ASTM F477, elastomeric seal or ASTM D5926, PVC. 3) For Dissimilar Pipes: ASTM D5926, PVC or other material compatible with pipe materials being joined.
3. Shielded, Nonpressure Transition Couplings:
a. Standard: ASTM C1460.
b. Description: Elastomeric or rubber sleeve with full-length, corrosion-resistant outer shield and corrosion-resistant-metal tension band and tightening mechanism on each end.
c. End Connections: Same size as and compatible with pipes to be joined.
4. Pressure Transition Couplings:
a. Standard: AWWA C219.
b. Description: Metal, sleeve-type same size as, with pressure rating at least equal to, and ends compatible with, pipes to be joined.
c. Center-Sleeve Material: Ductile iron.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping Renovation & Expansion Final Design 221316 - 4
100% Design Submittal
d. Gasket Material: Natural or synthetic rubber.
e. Metal Component Finish: Corrosion-resistant coating or material.
B. Dielectric Fittings:
1. Dielectric Unions:
a. Description:
1) Standard: ASSE1079.
2) Pressure Rating: 250 psig.
3) End Connections: Solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous.
2. Dielectric Flanges:
a. Description:
1) Standard: ASSE 1079.
2) Factory-fabricated, bolted, companion-flange assembly. 3) Pressure Rating: 300 psig.
4) End Connections: Solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous; threaded solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous.
3. Dielectric-Flange Insulating Kits:
a. Description:
1) Nonconducting materials for field assembly of companion flanges. 2) Pressure Rating: 150 psig.
3) Gasket: Neoprene or phenolic.
4) Bolt Sleeves: Phenolic or polyethylene.
5) Washers: Phenolic with steel backing washers.
4. Dielectric Nipples:
a. Description:
1) Standard: IAPMO PS 66.
2) Electroplated steel nipple.
3) Pressure Rating: 300 psig at 225 degrees F.
4) End Connections: Male threaded or grooved.
5) Lining: Inert and noncorrosive, propylene.
2.7 ENCASEMENT FOR UNDERGROUND METAL PIPING
A. Standard: ASTM A674 or AWWA C105/A 21.5.
B. Material: high-density, cross-laminated polyethylene film of 0.004-inch minimum thickness.
C. Form: Tube.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping Renovation & Expansion Final Design 221316 - 5
100% Design Submittal
D. Color: Black.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EARTHWORK
A. Comply with requirements for excavating, trenching, and backfilling specified in Section 312000 "Earthwork."
3.2 PIPING INSTALLATION
A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping systems.
1. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations.
2. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on coordination drawings.
B. Install piping in concealed locations unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas.
C. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise.
D. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal.
E. Install piping to permit valve servicing.
F. Install piping at indicated slopes.
G. Install piping free of sags and bends.
H. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.
I. Install piping to allow application of insulation.
J. Make changes in direction for soil and waste drainage and vent piping using appropriate branches, bends, and long-sweep bends.
1. Sanitary tees and short-sweep 1/4 bends may be used on vertical stacks if change in direction of flow is from horizontal to vertical.
2. Use long-turn, double Y-branch and 1/8-bend fittings if two fixtures are installed back to back or side by side with common drain pipe.
a. Straight tees, elbows, and crosses may be used on vent lines.
3. Do not change direction of flow more than 90 degrees. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping Renovation & Expansion Final Design 221316 - 6
100% Design Submittal
4. Use proper size of standard increasers and reducers if pipes of different sizes are connected.
a. Reducing size of waste piping in direction of flow is prohibited.
K. Lay buried building waste piping beginning at low point of each system.
1. Install true to grades and alignment indicated, with unbroken continuity of invert. Place hub ends of piping upstream.
2. Install required gaskets according to manufacturer's written instructions for use of lubricants, cements, and other installation requirements.
3. Maintain swab in piping and pull past each joint as completed.
L. Install soil and waste and vent piping at the following minimum slopes unless otherwise indicated:
1. Building Sanitary Waste: 2 percent downward in direction of flow for piping NPS 3 and smaller; 1 percent downward in direction of flow for piping NPS 4 and larger.
2. Horizontal Sanitary Waste Piping: 2 percent downward in direction of flow.
3. Vent Piping: 1 percent down toward vertical fixture vent or toward vent stack.
M. Install cast-iron soil piping according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook," Chapter IV, "Installation of Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings."
1. Install encasement on underground piping according to ASTM A674 or AWWA C105/A 21.5.
N. Install aboveground PVC piping according to ASTM D2665.
O. Install engineered soil and waste and vent piping systems as follows:
1. Combination Waste and Vent: Comply with standards of authorities having jurisdiction.
2. Hubless, Single-Stack Drainage System: Comply with ASME B16.45 and hubless, single-stack aerator fitting manufacturer's written installation instructions.
3. Reduced-Size Venting: Comply with standards of authorities having jurisdiction.
P. Plumbing Specialties:
1. Install cleanouts at grade and extend to where building sanitary drains connect to building sanitary sewers in sanitary waste gravity-flow piping.
a. Install cleanout fitting with closure plug inside the building in sanitary drainage force-main piping.
b. Comply with requirements for cleanouts specified in Section 221319 "Sanitary Waste Piping Specialties."
2. Install drains in sanitary waste gravity-flow piping. a. Comply with requirements for drains specified in Section 221319 "Sanitary Waste Piping Specialties."
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping Renovation & Expansion Final Design 221316 - 7
100% Design Submittal
Q. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it is inspected and approved by authorities having jurisdiction.
R. Install sleeves for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors.
1. Comply with requirements for sleeves specified in Section 220517 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Plumbing Piping."
S. Install sleeve seals for piping penetrations of concrete walls and slabs.
1. Comply with requirements for sleeve seals specified in Section 220517 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Plumbing Piping."
T. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors.
1. Comply with requirements for escutcheons specified in Section 220518 "Escutcheons for Plumbing Piping."
3.3 JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A. Join hub-and-spigot, cast-iron soil piping with gasket joints according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook" for compression joints.
B. Join hub-and-spigot, cast-iron soil piping with calked joints according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook" for lead-and-oakum calked joints.
C. Join hubless, cast-iron soil piping according to CISPI 310 and CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook" for hubless-piping coupling joints.
D. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1.
1. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies.
2. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:
a. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dry seal threading is specified.
b. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or damaged.
c. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds.
E. Grooved Joints: Cut groove ends of pipe according to AWWA C606. Lubricate and install gasket over ends of pipes or pipe and fitting. Install coupling housing sections, over gasket, with keys seated in piping grooves. Install and tighten housing bolts.
F. Flanged Joints: Align bolt holes. Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness.
Install gasket concentrically positioned. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads. Torque bolts in cross pattern.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping Renovation & Expansion Final Design 221316 - 8
100% Design Submittal
G. Plastic, Nonpressure-Piping, Solvent-Cement Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces. Join pipe and fittings according to the following: